779907

Bulls EVO 2 - BOSCH Purion 2022 Handleiding

6
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/321
Pagina verder
22-15-1054, 22-15-1055, 22-15-1058, 22-15-1066…22-15-1068, 22-15-1081…22-15-1083, 22-15-1084…22-15-1086, 22-15-4004, 22-15-4006,
22-18-0006…22-18-0012, 22-18-0020, 22-18-0024, 22-18-0070…22-18-0080, 22-18-2009, 22-18-3001…22-18-3009, 22-18-3013,
22-18-5001…22-18-5004, 22-18-5010, 22-18-5015, 22-18-5017, 22-18-5025, 22-18-5027, 22-18-5029, 22-18-5031, 22-18-5032, 22-19-3001,
22-19-3002
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021
Aminga
EVA 1 27.5", EVA 2 27.5", EVA 3 27.5", EVA TR 1 27.5", EVA TR 2 27.5"
Copperhead
EVO 1 27.5", EVO 1 29", EVO 1 Street 27.5", EVO 1 Street 29", EVO 1 XXL 27.5", EVO 1 XXL 29", EVO 2 27.5", EVO 2 29",
EVO 2 Street 27.5", EVO 2 XXL 27.5", EVO 2 XXL 29", EVO 2 XXL Street 27.5", EVO AM 1
Cross
Flyer EVO, Mover EVO 1
Iconic
EVO 1 27.5", EVO 1 29"
Landscape EVO
LT
CX 27.5", CX 29", EVO CX 27.5", EVO CX 29", Performance 27.5", Performance 29"
Sonic
EVA 1, EVA TR 1, EVA TR 2, EVO 1 27.5", EVO 1 29", EVO AM 1, EVO AM 2 Carbon, EVO EN 1, EVO EN 2, EVO TR1 29",
EVO TR2 Carbon 29", EVO XS
Urban EVO 12
Translation of original operating instructions for BULLS Pedelecs with BOSCH Purion on-board computer
WALK
WALK
WALK
W
AL
W
W
W
W
W
W
A
L
K
K
K
K
K
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
WWWW
WW
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
WW
W
W
W
W
A
A
W
W
W
A
W
W
W
W
W
WW
W
W
W
W
A
WW
AAAA
AA
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
LLLL
LL
L
AA
A
A
A
A
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
K
KKKK
KK
K
K
K
K
K
KK
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
IMPORTANT
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE
KEEP SAFE TO CONSULT AT A LATER DATE
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 1
Contents
Contents
1 About these operating instructions
1.1 Manufacturer 11
1.2 Laws, standards and directives 11
1.3 Language 11
1.4 For your information 11
1.4.1 Warnings 11
1.4.2 Markups 11
1.5 Type number and model 12
1.6 Frame number 13
1.7 Identifying the operating instructions 13
1.8 Aim of the operating instructions 14
2 Safety
2.1 Residual risks 15
2.1.1 Risk of fire and explosion 15
2.1.1.1 Rechargeable battery 15
2.1.1.2 Overheated charger 15
2.1.1.3 Hot components 15
2.1.2 Electric shock 16
2.1.2.1 Damage 16
2.1.2.2 Water penetration 16
2.1.2.3 Condensation 16
2.1.3 Risk of a crash 16
2.1.3.1 Incorrect quick release setting 16
2.1.3.2 Incorrect tightening torque 16
2.1.3.3 Incorrect component 16
2.1.4 Risk of amputation 16
2.1.5 Key breaking off 16
2.2 Toxic substances 17
2.2.1 Brake fluid 17
2.2.2 Suspension oil 17
2.2.3 Lubrication oil 17
2.2.4 Defective battery 17
2.3 Requirements for riders 17
2.4 Vulnerable groups 17
2.5 Personal protective equipment 17
2.6 Safety guards 17
2.7 Safety markings and safety instructions 18
2.8 What to do in an emergency 18
2.8.1 Dangerous situation in road traffic 18
2.8.2 Leaked brake fluid 18
2.8.3 Battery vapours emitted 19
2.8.4 Battery fire 19
2.8.5 Oil and lubricant leaks from the rear frame damper 19
2.8.6 Oil and lubricant leaks from the fork 19
2.8.7 Lubricant leaking from the eightpins suspension seat post 20
3 Description
3.1 Proper use 21
3.1.1 Improper use 22
3.1.2 Permitted total weight (PTW) 23
3.1.3 Environmental requirements 24
3.2 Nameplate 26
3.3 Components 27
3.3.1 Overview 27
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 2
Contents
3.3.2 Chassis 28
3.3.2.1 Frame 28
3.3.2.2 Steering system 28
3.3.2.3 Steering headset 28
3.3.2.4 Stem 28
3.3.2.5 Handlebars 29
3.3.2.6 Fork 29
3.3.3 Suspension 30
3.3.3.1 Rigid fork 30
3.3.3.2 Suspension fork 30
3.3.3.3 Rear frame damper 34
3.3.3.4 Suntour rear frame damper 36
3.3.3.5 RockShox rear frame damper 37
3.3.4 Wheel 39
3.3.4.1 Tyres 39
3.3.4.2 Rim 39
3.3.4.3 Valve 39
3.3.4.4 Spoke 40
3.3.4.5 Spoke nipples 40
3.3.4.6 Hub 40
3.3.5 Braking system 41
3.3.5.1 Mechanical brake 41
3.3.5.2 Hydraulic brake 41
3.3.5.3 Disc brake 42
3.3.6 Seat post 43
3.3.6.1 Patent seat post 43
3.3.6.2 Suspension seat post 43
3.3.7 Mechanical drive system 44
3.3.7.1 Chain drive layout 44
3.3.7.2 Belt drive layout 44
3.3.8 Electric drive system 45
3.3.8.1 Motor 45
3.3.8.2 Rechargeable battery 45
3.3.8.3 Frame battery 46
3.3.8.4 Pannier rack battery 46
3.3.8.5 Integrated battery 47
3.3.8.6 Charger 47
3.3.9 Lighting 47
3.3.10 On-board computer 48
3.4 Description of controls and screens 49
3.4.1 Handlebars 49
3.5 On-board computer 50
3.5.1 Display 50
3.5.1.1 Indicator unit km/h or mph 50
3.5.1.2 Tachometer screen 50
3.5.1.3 Information display 51
3.5.1.4 Level of assistance 51
3.5.1.5 Riding light symbol 51
3.5.1.6 Maintenance indicator 51
3.5.1.7 Battery level indicator (on-board computer) 51
3.5.2 System message 51
3.5.3 Gear shift 52
3.5.3.1 SHIMANO derailleur gears 52
3.5.4 Hand brake 53
3.5.5 Battery level indicator (battery) 54
3.5.5.1 Battery level indicator (battery) 54
3.6 Technical data 55
3.6.1 Pedelec 55
3.6.2 Emissions 55
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 3
Contents
3.6.3 Bicycle lighting 55
3.6.4 BOSCH Purion on-board computer 55
3.6.5 Motor 55
3.6.5.1 BOSCH Active Line 55
3.6.5.2 BOSCH Active Line Plus 55
3.6.5.3 BOSCH Performance Line 55
3.6.5.4 BOSCH Performance Line CX 56
3.6.6 Rechargeable battery 56
3.6.6.1 BOSCH PowerPack 400 56
3.6.6.2 BOSCH PowerPack 500 56
3.6.6.3 BOSCH PowerTube 400 56
3.6.6.4 BOSCH PowerTube 500 56
3.6.6.5 BOSCH PowerTube 625 56
3.6.7 Tightening torques 57
4 Transporting and storing
4.1 Weight and dimensions for transportation 59
4.2 Designated handles, lifting points 61
4.3 Transportation 62
4.3.1 Using the brake transport securing system 62
4.3.2 Transporting the pedelec 62
4.3.3 Shipping a pedelec 62
4.3.4 Transporting the battery 62
4.3.5 Shipping the battery 62
4.4 Storing 63
4.4.1 Break in operation 63
4.4.1.1 Preparing a break in operation 63
4.4.1.2 Carrying out a break in operation 63
5 Assembly
5.1 Unpacking 64
5.2 Required tools 64
5.3 Commissioning 65
5.3.1 Checking the battery 65
5.3.2 Preparing the battery 66
5.3.2.1 Retrofitting the PowerTube adapter 66
5.3.2.2 Fit battery cover onto Bosch PowerTube 625 battery (horizontal) 68
5.3.2.3 Fit battery cover onto Bosch PowerTube 500 battery (horizontal) 69
5.3.3 Preparing the wheel 70
5.3.4 Installing the wheel in the SUNTOUR fork 71
5.3.4.1 Screw-on axle (12AH2 and 15AH2) 71
5.3.4.2 20 mm cross axle 72
5.3.4.3 Q-LOC quick release 74
5.3.5 Preparing the RockShox Reverb AXS seat post 75
5.3.5.1 Recharging the SRAM battery 75
5.3.5.2 Inserting the SRAM battery 75
5.3.5.3 Pairing the system 75
5.3.5.4 Ending pairing 75
5.3.6 Preparing the LIMOTEC seat post 76
5.3.7 Fitting the pedals 77
5.3.8 Checking the stem and handlebars 78
5.3.8.1 Checking the connections 78
5.3.8.2 Checking stem is firmly in position 78
5.3.8.3 Checking the headset backlash 78
5.4 Pedelec sale 78
6 Operation
6.1 Risks and hazards 79
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 4
Contents
6.2 Tips for a greater range 81
6.3 Error message 82
6.3.1 On-board computer 82
6.3.2 Rechargeable battery 85
6.4 Instruction and customer service 86
6.5 Adjusting the pedelec 86
6.5.1 Preparing 86
6.5.2 Pedelec adjustment procedure 87
6.5.3 Determining the sitting position 88
6.5.4 Adjusting the saddle 90
6.5.4.1 Straightening the saddle 90
6.5.4.2 Adjusting the saddle height 90
6.5.4.3 Setting the saddle height with the remote control 91
6.5.4.4 Adjusting the eightpins seat post saddle height 92
6.5.4.5 Adjusting the saddle position 92
6.5.4.6 Adjust saddle tilt 93
6.5.4.7 Checking saddle stability 93
6.5.4.8 eightpins H01 seat post saddle tilt 93
6.5.4.9 eightpins NGS2 seat post saddle tilt 94
6.5.4.10 Adjusting the saddle position 95
6.5.4.11 Adjusting the saddle tilt 95
6.5.4.12 Checking saddle stability 95
6.5.4.13 ROCKSHOX Reverb AXS saddle tilt 96
6.5.4.14 eightpins NGS2 seat post saddle tilt 97
6.5.5 Handlebars 98
6.5.5.1 Handlebar width 98
6.5.5.2 Hand position 98
6.5.5.3 Adjusting the handlebars 98
6.5.6 Stem 99
6.5.6.1 Adjusting the handlebar height with quick release 99
6.5.6.2 Setting the quill stem 100
6.5.6.3 Adjusting the Ahead stem 100
6.5.6.4 Adjusting the angle-adjustable stem 101
6.5.7 Ergonomic handles 102
6.5.7.1 Checking handlebar stability 102
6.5.8 Tyres 103
6.5.9 Brake 104
6.5.9.1 Brake handle position 104
6.5.9.2 Brake handle tilt angle 104
6.5.9.3 Determining the grip distance 105
6.5.9.4 Grip distance on a SHIMANO ST-EF41 brake lever 106
6.5.9.5 Grip distance on a SHIMANO ST-EF41 brake lever 107
6.5.9.6 Retracting the brake linings 108
6.5.10 Suspension 109
6.5.11 Fork sag 109
6.5.11.1 Adjusting the Suntour fork steel suspension 110
6.5.11.2 Adjusting the Suntour fork air suspension 111
6.5.11.3 ROCKSHOX Paragon Silver coil spring 112
6.5.11.4 Adjusting the RockShox coil spring with an external preload adjuster 114
6.5.11.5 Adjusting the ROCKSHOX fork coil spring with spacer for pre-tensioning 115
6.5.12 Adjust the rear frame damper sag 117
6.5.12.1 Adjusting the Suntour rear frame damper 118
6.5.12.2 Adjusting the RockShox rear frame damper 119
6.5.13 Fork rebound damping 121
6.5.13.1 Adjusting the Suntour fork rebound damping 122
6.5.13.2 Adjusting the RockShox suspension fork 123
6.5.14 Adjusting the rear frame damper rebound damper 124
6.5.14.1 Adjusting the RockShox rear frame damper 125
6.5.15 Compression adjuster on rear frame damper 126
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 5
Contents
6.5.15.1 Adjusting the Suntour compression adjuster 127
6.5.15.2 Adjusting the RockShox compression adjuster 128
6.5.15.3 Adjusting the RockShox threshold 129
6.5.16 Lighting 130
6.5.16.1 Adjusting the lights 130
6.5.17 On-board computer 132
6.5.17.1 Changing the tachometer unit 132
6.5.17.2 Adjust display screen brightness 132
6.5.17.3 Displaying versions and type numbers 132
6.6 Accessories 133
6.6.1 Child seat 133
6.6.2 Trailer 134
6.6.2.1 Approval for trailer with Enviolo hub 134
6.6.2.2 Approval for trailer with ROHLOFF hub 135
6.6.3 Mobile holder 135
6.6.4 Tubeless and airless tyres 135
6.6.5 Suspension fork coil spring 135
6.6.6 Pannier rack 135
6.6.7 Panniers and cargo boxes 135
6.7 Personal protective equipment and accessories for road safety 136
6.8 Before each ride 136
6.9 Straightening the quickly adjustable stem 137
6.10 Using the pannier rack 137
6.11 Raising the kickstand 138
6.12 Using the saddle 138
6.12.1 Using the leather saddle 138
6.13 Using the pedals 138
6.14 Using the multifunctional handlebars or bar ends 138
6.14.1 Using leather handles 138
6.15 Using the bell 138
6.16 Using the battery 139
6.16.1 Frame battery 139
6.16.1.1 Removing the frame battery 139
6.16.1.2 Inserting the frame battery 139
6.16.2 Pannier rack battery 139
6.16.2.1 Removing the pannier rack battery 139
6.16.2.2 Inserting the pannier rack battery 139
6.16.3 Integrated battery 140
6.16.3.1 Removing the integrated battery 140
6.16.3.2 Inserting the integrated battery 140
6.16.4 Charging the battery 141
6.16.5 Charging the dual battery 141
6.16.5.1 Charging process when two batteries are used 141
6.16.5.2 Charging process when one battery is used 141
6.16.6 Using double battery model with a single battery only 142
6.16.7 Waking the battery 142
6.17 Using pedelec with the electric drive system 143
6.17.1 Switching on the electric drive system 143
6.17.2 Switching off the electric drive system 143
6.18 On-board computer 144
6.18.1 Actions on the on-board computer 144
6.18.2 Switching on the on-board computer 144
6.18.3 Switching off the on-board computer 144
6.18.4 Using the riding light 144
6.18.5 Using the push assist system 145
6.18.6 Selecting the level of assistance 145
6.18.7 Using the journey information 145
6.18.7.1 Switching the journey information 145
6.18.7.2 Resetting the trip distance 145
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 6
Contents
6.18.7.3 Resetting the range 145
6.18.8 Replacing the battery 146
6.18.9 Using the USB port 146
6.19 Brake 147
6.19.1 Using the brake lever 147
6.20 Suspension and damping 148
6.20.1 Adjusting the Suntour compression adjuster 149
6.20.1.1 Adjusting the RockShox compression adjuster 150
6.21 Gear shift 151
6.21.1 Using the derailleur gears 151
6.22 Parking 152
6.22.1 Screwing in the All Up handlebars 152
7 Cleaning, servicing and maintenance
7.1 Before each ride 158
7.1.1 Checking the guards 158
7.1.2 Checking the frame 158
7.1.3 Checking the fork 158
7.1.4 Checking the rear frame damper 158
7.1.5 Checking the pannier rack 158
7.1.6 Checking the guards 158
7.1.7 Checking wheel concentricity 158
7.1.8 Checking the quick releases 158
7.1.9 Checking the suspension seat post 158
7.1.10 Checking the bell 159
7.1.11 Checking the handles 159
7.1.12 Checking the USB cover 159
7.1.13 Checking the lighting 159
7.1.14 Checking the brake 159
7.2 After each ride 160
7.2.1 Cleaning the lights and reflectors 160
7.2.2 Cleaning the suspension fork 160
7.2.3 Caring for the suspension fork 160
7.2.4 Cleaning the pedals 160
7.2.5 Cleaning the brake 160
7.2.6 Cleaning the suspension seat post 160
7.2.7 Cleaning the rear frame damper 160
7.3 Basic cleaning 161
7.3.1 On-board computer and control panel 161
7.3.2 Rechargeable battery 161
7.3.3 Motor 161
7.3.4 Frame, fork, pannier rack, guards and kickstand 162
7.3.5 Stem 162
7.3.6 Handlebars 162
7.3.7 Handles 162
7.3.7.1 Leather handles 162
7.3.8 Seat post 162
7.3.9 Saddle 162
7.3.9.1 Leather saddle 163
7.3.10 Tyres 163
7.3.11 Spokes and spoke nipples 163
7.3.12 Hub 163
7.3.13 Switching elements 163
7.3.13.1 Shifter 163
7.3.14 Cassette, chain wheels and front derailleur 163
7.3.15 Brake 164
7.3.15.1 Brake lever 164
7.3.16 Brake disc 164
7.3.17 Belt 164
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 7
Contents
7.3.18 Chain 164
7.3.18.1 Chain with all-round chain guard 164
7.4 Servicing 165
7.4.1 Frame 165
7.4.2 Fork 165
7.4.3 Pannier rack 166
7.4.4 Mudguard 166
7.4.5 Servicing the kickstand 166
7.4.6 Stem 166
7.4.7 Handlebars 166
7.4.8 Handle 166
7.4.8.1 Rubber handles 166
7.4.8.2 Leather handle 167
7.4.9 Seat post 167
7.4.9.1 Suspension seat post 167
7.4.9.2 Carbon seat post 167
7.4.10 Leather saddle 167
7.4.11 Hub 167
7.4.12 Spoke nipples 167
7.4.13 Rim 167
7.4.14 Gear shift 168
7.4.14.1 Rear derailleur articulated shafts and jockey wheels 168
7.4.14.2 Shifter 168
7.4.15 Pedal 168
7.4.16 Caring for the chain 168
7.4.16.1 Caring for the chain and all-round chain guard 168
7.4.17 Caring for the brake 169
7.4.17.1 Caring for the brake 169
7.4.18 Lubricating the eightpins seat post tube 169
7.5 Maintenance 170
7.5.1 Wheel 170
7.5.1.1 Checking the tyre pressure 170
7.5.1.2 Checking the tyres 172
7.5.1.3 Checking the rims 173
7.5.1.4 Checking the nipple holes 173
7.5.1.5 Checking the nipple well 173
7.5.1.6 Checking the rim hooks 173
7.5.1.7 Checking the spokes 173
7.5.2 Checking the brake system 174
7.5.2.1 Checking the hand brake 174
7.5.2.2 Checking the hydraulic system 174
7.5.2.3 Checking the Bowden cables 174
7.5.2.4 Checking the disc brake 175
7.5.2.5 Checking the back-pedal brake 176
7.5.2.6 Checking the rim brake 177
7.5.3 Checking the lighting 178
7.5.4 Checking the stem 179
7.5.5 Check the handlebars 179
7.5.6 Checking the saddle 179
7.5.7 Checking the seat post 179
7.5.8 Checking the chain 179
7.5.9 Checking the chain and belt tension 179
7.5.9.1 Checking the derailleur gears 180
7.5.9.2 Checking the hub gear 180
7.5.10 Checking the gear shift 180
7.5.10.1 Electric gear shift 180
7.5.10.2 Mechanical gear shift 180
7.5.10.3 Checking the derailleur gears 180
7.5.11 Adjusting gear shift 181
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 8
Contents
7.5.11.1 ROHLOFF hub 181
7.5.12 Bowden-cable-operated gear shift, single-cable 181
7.5.13 Bowden-cable-operated gear shift, dual-cable 181
7.5.14 Bowden-cable-operated twist grip, dual-cable 182
7.5.15 Checking kickstand stability 182
8 Maintenance
8.1 Initial inspection 183
8.2 Maintenance 183
8.3 Component-specific maintenance tasks 183
8.4 Carry out initial inspection 186
8.5 Maintenance instructions 187
8.5.1 Servicing the frame 194
8.5.1.1 Servicing the carbon frame 194
8.5.2 Checking the pannier rack 194
8.5.3 Servicing axle with quick release 194
8.5.4 Maintaining the stem 195
8.5.5 Servicing the gear hub 195
8.5.5.1 Adjusting the hub with cone bearing 195
8.5.6 Servicing the steering headset 196
8.5.7 Servicing the fork 196
8.5.7.1 Servicing the carbon suspension fork 197
8.5.7.2 Servicing the suspension fork 197
8.5.8 Servicing seat post 198
8.5.8.1 Servicing the carbon seat post 198
8.5.8.2 by.schulz suspension seat post 199
8.5.8.3 Suntour suspension seat post 199
8.5.8.4 eightpins NGS2 seat post 200
8.5.8.5 eightpins H01 seat post 206
8.5.9 Rear frame damper 210
8.5.9.1 FOX component-specific maintenance 211
9 Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1 Troubleshooting and fault clearance 212
9.1.1 Drive system or on-board computer does not start up 212
9.1.2 Error message 212
9.1.3 Errors in assistance function 213
9.1.4 Battery errors 214
9.1.5 On-board computer errors 215
9.1.6 Lighting does not work 215
9.1.7 Other errors 216
9.1.8 Suntour suspension fork 217
9.1.8.1 Rebound too fast 217
9.1.8.2 Rebounding too slowly 218
9.1.8.3 Suspension too soft on inclines 219
9.1.8.4 Excessively hard damping on bumps 220
9.1.9 RockShox suspension fork 221
9.1.9.1 Rebound too fast 221
9.1.9.2 Rebounding too slowly 222
9.1.9.3 Suspension too soft on inclines 223
9.1.9.4 Excessively hard damping on bumps 224
9.1.10 Rear frame damper 225
9.1.10.1 Rebound too fast 225
9.1.10.2 Rebounding too slowly 226
9.1.10.3 Suspension too soft on inclines 227
9.1.10.4 Excessively hard damping on bumps 228
9.1.11 RockShox rear frame damper 229
9.1.11.1 Rebound too fast 229
9.1.11.2 Rebounding too slowly 230
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 9
Contents
9.1.11.3 Suspension too soft on inclines 231
9.1.11.4 Excessively hard damping on bumps 232
9.2 Repair 233
9.2.1 Original parts and lubricants 233
9.2.2 Replacing the lighting 233
9.2.3 Setting the front light 233
9.2.4 Checking tyre clearance 233
10 Recycling and disposal
10.1 Removal of waste guidelines 234
11 Documents
11.1 Assembly report 236
11.2 Maintenance log 238
11.3 Parts list 242
11.3.1 Aminga EVA 1 242
11.3.2 Aminga EVA 2 244
11.3.3 Aminga EVA 3 246
11.3.4 Aminga EVA TR 1 248
11.3.5 Copperhead EVO 1 250
11.3.6 Copperhead EVO 1 Street 252
11.3.7 Copperhead EVO 1 XXL 254
11.3.8 Copperhead EVO 2 Street 256
11.3.9 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL 258
11.3.10 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL Street 260
11.3.11 Copperhead EVO AM 1 262
11.3.12 Cross Mover EVO 1 264
11.3.13 Iconic EVO 1 266
11.3.14 Landscape EVO 268
11.3.15 LT CX 270
11.3.16 LT EVO CX 272
11.3.17 LT Performance 274
11.3.18 Sonic EVA 1 276
11.3.19 Sonic EVA TR 1 278
11.3.20 Sonic EVA TR 2 280
11.3.21 Sonic EVO AM 1 282
11.3.22 Sonic EVO AM 1 284
11.3.23 Sonic EVO AM 2 Carbon 286
11.3.24 Sonic EVO EN 1 288
11.3.25 Sonic EVO EN 2 290
11.3.26 Sonic EVO TR1 292
11.3.27 Sonic EVO TR2 Carbon 294
11.3.28 Sonic EVO XS 296
11.3.29 Urban EVO 12 298
11.4 Charger operating instructions 300
12 Glossary
12.1 Abbreviations 312
12.2 Simplified terms 312
13 Appendix
I. Translation of the original EC/EU Declaration of Conformity 313
II. Declaration of conformity for incomplete machine 315
14 Keyword index
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 10
About these operating instructions
Thank you for your trust!
BULLS pedelecs are premium quality vehicles.
You have made an excellent choice. Your
specialist dealer will provide you with guidance
and instruction and assemble your product. Your
specialist dealer will also be happy to assist you in
the future, whether you require maintenance,
conversion or repair.
You are receiving these operating instructions
with your new pedelec. Please take time to
become familiar with your new pedelec. Use the
tips and suggestions in the operating instructions.
They will help you to enjoy your pedelec for a long
time to come. We hope you have fun and wish you
well on all of your rides!
Download the operating instructions onto your
phone at the following link, so that you can use
them when you are out riding:
www.bulls.de/service/downloads.
Copyright
© ZEG Zweirad-Einkaufs-Genossenschaft eG
Distribution or reproduction of these operating
instructions and utilisation or communication of
their content is prohibited unless expressly
approved. Any infringement will render the
offender liable for compensation. All rights
reserved in the event that a patent, utility model or
industrial design is registered.
Subject to internal changes
The information contained in these operating
instructions are the approved technical
specifications at the time of printing. In addition to
the functions described here, software changes
may be introduced to rectify errors and extend
functions at any time.
Any significant changes are included in a new
published version of the operating instructions.
All changes to the operating instructions are
published on the following website:
www.bulls.de/service/downloads.
Editing
Text and images:
ZEG Zweirad-Einkaufs-Genossenschaft eG
Longericher Strasse 2
50739 Köln, Germany
Translation
RKT Übersetzungs- und Dokumentations-GmbH
Bahnhofstrasse 27
78713 Schramberg, Germany
In case of any questions or problems
regarding these operating instructions,
please contact:
tecdoc@zeg.de
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 11
About these operating instructions
1 About these operating instructions
1.1 Manufacturer
ZEG Zweirad-Einkaufs-Genossenschaft eG
Longericher Strasse 2
50739 Köln, Germany
Tel.: +49 221 17959 0
Fax: +49 221 1795931
E-mail: info@zeg.de
1.2 Laws, standards and directives
The operating instructions comply with the
essential requirements specified in:
• Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
• Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2014/30/
EU
• ISO 20607:2018 Safety of machinery –
Instruction handbook – General drafting
principles
• EN 15194:2018 Cycles – Electrically power
assisted cycles – pedelec bicycles
• EN 11243:2016, Cycles – Pannier racks for
bicycles – Requirements and test methods
• ISO 17100:2016-05 Translation Services –
Requirements for translation services.
1.3 Language
The original operating instructions are written in
German. A translation is invalid without the
original operating instructions.
1.4 For your information
Different markings are used in the operating
instructions to make them easier to read.
1.4.1 Warnings
Warnings indicate hazardous situations and
actions. You will find three warnings in the
operating instructions:
1.4.2 Markups
You will find ten text markups in the operating
instructions:
May lead to serious or even fatal injuries if
ignored. Medium-risk hazard.
May lead to minor or moderate injuries if ignored.
Low-risk hazard.
Notice
May lead to material damage if ignored.
Stylised form Use
Italics Glossary term, first mention in
section
Underlined in blue Link
Underlined in grey Cross references
Requirements
Instructions for actions without
specific order
1Instructions for actions in
specified order
Result of the action
SPACED Indicators on the display screen
• Bulleted lists
Only applies to pedelecs
with this equipment
A note beneath the heading
indicates components which can
be used as an option.
Table 1: Markups
WARNING
!
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 12
About these operating instructions
1.5 Type number and model
These operating instructions are an integral part of
pedelecs with the type numbers:
Type no. Model Pedelec type
22-15-1054 Iconic EVO 1 27.5" City and trekking
bicycle
22-15-1055 Iconic EVO 1 29" City and trekking
bicycle
22-15-1058 Iconic EVO 1 27.5" City and trekking
bicycle
22-15-1066 Urban EVO 12 City and trekking
bicycle
22-15-1067 Urban EVO 12 City and trekking
bicycle
22-15-1068 Urban EVO 12 City and trekking
bicycle
22-15-1081 Cross Flyer EVO City and trekking
bicycle
22-15-1082 Cross Flyer EVO City and trekking
bicycle
22-15-1083 Cross Flyer EVO City and trekking
bicycle
22-15-1084 Landscape EVO City and trekking
bicycle
22-15-1085 Landscape EVO City and trekking
bicycle
22-15-1086 Landscape EVO City and trekking
bicycle
22-15-4004 Cross Mover EVO 1 City and trekking
bicycle
22-15-4006 Cross Mover EVO 1 City and trekking
bicycle
22-18-0006 LT CX 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0007 LT CX 29" Mountain bike
22-18-0008 Copperhead EVO 1 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0009 Copperhead EVO 1 29" Mountain bike
22-18-0010 Copperhead EVO 2 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0011 Copperhead EVO 2 29" Mountain bike
22-18-0012 Copperhead EVO AM 1 Mountain bike
22-18-0020 Copperhead EVO 2 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0024 Copperhead EVO 2 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0070 LT Performance 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0071 LT Performance 29" Mountain bike
22-18-0072 LT EVO CX 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0073 LT EVO CX 29" Mountain bike
22-18-0074 Aminga EVA TR 2 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0075 Aminga EVA TR 1 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0076 Aminga EVA 1 27.5" Mountain bike
Table 2: Type number, model and pedelec type
22-18-0077 Aminga EVA 2 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0078 Aminga EVA 2 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0079 Aminga EVA 2 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0080 AMINGA E2 CX
(MARKGRAF) Mountain bike
22-18-2009 Aminga EVA 3 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-3001 Sonic EVO 1 29" Mountain bike
22-18-3002 Sonic EVO 1 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-3003 Sonic EVA 1 Mountain bike
22-18-3004 Sonic EVA TR 1 Mountain bike
22-18-3005 Sonic EVA TR 2 Mountain bike
22-18-3006 Sonic EVO TR1 29" Mountain bike
22-18-3007 Sonic Evo TR2 Carbon
29" Mountain bike
22-18-3008 Sonic EVO AM 1 Mountain bike
22-18-3009 Sonic EVO AM 2 Carbon Mountain bike
22-18-3013 Sonic EVO XS Mountain bike
22-18-5001 Copperhead EVO 1 XXL
27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5002 Copperhead EVO 1 XXL
29" Mountain bike
22-18-5003 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL
27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5004 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL
29" Mountain bike
22-18-5010 Copperhead EVO 1 XXL
27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5015 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL
Street 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5017 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL
Street 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5025 Copperhead EVO 2 Street
27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5027 Copperhead EVO 2 Street
27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5029 Copperhead EVO 1 Street
27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5031 Copperhead EVO 1 Street
27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5032 Copperhead EVO 1 Street
29" Mountain bike
22-19-3001 Sonic EVO EN 1 Mountain bike
22-19-3001 Sonic EVO EN 2 Mountain bike
Type no. Model Pedelec type
Table 2: Type number, model and pedelec type
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 13
About these operating instructions
1.6 Frame number
Each frame has an individual frame number
stamped on it (see Figure 2). The frame number
can be used to associate the pedelec with the
owner. The frame number is the most important
identifier for verifying ownership.
1.7 Identifying the operating
instructions
The operating instructions identification number is
located in bottom left-hand corner of each page.
The identification number is composed of the
document number, the version number and the
release date.
Identification number MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 14
About these operating instructions
1.8 Aim of the operating instructions
These operating instructions are not a substitute
for personal instruction by the specialist dealer
supplying the bike. These operating instructions
are an integral part of the pedelec. Therefore, if it
is re-sold at a later time, they must be handed
over to the subsequent owner.
These operating instructions are mainly designed
for riders and operators of the pedelec.
Paragraphs with a white background are intended
to enable non-professionals to make safe settings
on the pedelec, use it, clean it and identify and
eliminate any faults.
Sections intended for technical staff are
highlighted in blue and marked with a spanner
symbol.
These paragraphs aim to allow trained technical
staff (bicycle mechatronics engineers, bicycle
mechanics or similar) to carry out initial
assembly, adjustment, maintenance and repair
safely.
Technical staff also need to read all sections for
riders and operators to ensure they can provide
a better customer service.
All documents in Section 11 need to be filled out
whenever any work is performed on the vehicle
(assembly report, maintenance report).
Section
Rider
Specialist dealer
1About these instructions
2Safety
3Description
4 Transportation and storage
5 Assembly and installation
6Operation
7Cleaning and servicing
8Maintenance
9.1 Troubleshooting and fault clearance 
9.2 Repair
10 Disassembly and disposal
11 Documents
12 Glossary
13 Appendix
14 Keyword index 
Table 3: Target groups-section matrix
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 15
Safety
2 Safety
2.1 Residual risks
2.1.1 Risk of fire and explosion
2.1.1.1 Rechargeable battery
The safety electronics may fail if the batteries are
damaged or faulty. The residual voltage can
cause a short circuit. The battery may self-ignite
and explode.
Only use and charge the battery and
accessories if they are in perfect condition.
Never open or repair the battery.
Batteries with external damage must be
removed from service immediately.
If a battery is dropped or struck, remove it from
service and keep it under observation for at
least 24 hours.
Faulty batteries are hazardous goods.
Dispose of faulty batteries in the correct
manner.
Store battery in a dry place until disposal.
Never store near flammable substances.
The battery is only protected from spray water.
Penetration by water can cause a short circuit.
The battery may self-ignite and explode.
Never immerse battery in water.
Put battery out of service if you suspect water
has penetrated it.
Temperatures over 60 °C can also cause liquid to
leak from the battery and the battery will become
damaged. The battery may self-ignite and
explode.
Protect the battery against heat.
Never store next to hot objects.
Never expose battery to continuous direct
sunlight.
Avoid wide temperature fluctuations.
Chargers with excessive voltage damage
batteries. This may cause a fire or an explosion.
Only use approved batteries to charge.
Metal objects may interconnect the battery's
electrical terminals. The battery may self-ignite
and explode.
Never insert paper clips, screws, coins, keys
and other small parts into the battery.
2.1.1.2 Overheated charger
The charger heats up when charging the battery.
If it is not allowed to cool down sufficiently, it can
cause a fire or burns to the hands.
Never use charger on a highly flammable
surface.
Never cover the charger during charging.
Never leave battery unattended during
charging.
2.1.1.3 Hot components
The brakes and the motor may become very hot
during operation. There is a risk of burns or fire in
case of contact.
Never touch the brakes or the motor
immediately after a ride.
Never place the pedelec on a flammable
surface, such as grass or wood, directly after
use.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 16
Safety
2.1.2 Electric shock
2.1.2.1 Damage
Damaged chargers, cables and plug connectors
increase the risk of electric shock.
Check the charger, cable and plug connector
before each use. Never use a damaged
charger.
2.1.2.2 Water penetration
If water penetrates into the charger, there is a risk
of electric shock.
Never charge the battery outdoors.
2.1.2.3 Condensation
Condensation may form in the charger and battery
when the temperature changes from cold to hot,
possibly causing a short circuit.
Wait until both the charger and battery have
warmed up to room temperature before
connecting them.
2.1.3 Risk of a crash
2.1.3.1 Incorrect quick release setting
Excessively high clamping force will damage the
quick release and cause it to lose its function.
Insufficient clamping force will result in
unfavourable transmission of force. This can
cause components to break. This will cause a
crash with injuries.
Never fasten a quick release using a tool (e.g.
hammer or pliers).
Only use the clamping lever with the specified
set clamping force.
2.1.3.2 Incorrect tightening torque
If a screw is fastened too tightly, it may break. If a
screw is not fastened enough, it may loosen. This
will cause a crash with injuries.
Always observe the indicated tightening torque
on the screw or in the operating instructions.
2.1.3.3 Incorrect component
The wheels are designed exclusively for use with
rim brakes or disc brakes. The wheel may break if
an incorrect brake is used. This will cause a crash
with injuries.
Never use the wheel with a different brake.
2.1.4 Risk of amputation
The brake disc in disc brakes is so sharp that it
can cause serious injuries to fingers if they are
inserted into the brake disc openings.
Always keep fingers well away from the
rotating brake discs.
2.1.5 Key breaking off
If you leave a key inserted when riding or
transporting the pedelec, it may break off or the
locking system may open accidentally.
Remove the key from the battery lock.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 17
Safety
2.2 Toxic substances
2.2.1 Brake fluid
Brake fluid may leak out after an accident or due
to material fatigue. Brake fluid can be fatal if
swallowed or inhaled.
Never dismantle the brake system.
Avoid contact with skin.
Do not inhale vapours.
2.2.2 Suspension oil
Suspension oil in the fork and the rear frame
damper is toxic to the touch, irritates respiratory
tracts and can cause cancer, sterility and changes
to the genetic make-up of germ cells.
Never dismantle the rear frame damper or the
suspension fork.
Avoid skin coming into contact with suspension
oil.
2.2.3 Lubrication oil
eightpins seat post lubrication oil is toxic if inhaled
and can be fatal if swallowed.
Never remove the eightpins seat post from the
frame.
Lubricate seat post in the open air or in a well-
ventilated room only.
Avoid skin coming into contact with lubrication
oil. Wear nitrile gloves when lubricating,
cleaning and servicing the vehicle.
2.2.4 Defective battery
Liquids and vapours may leak from damaged or
faulty batteries. Excessively high temperatures
may also cause liquids and vapours to leak from
the battery. Such liquids and vapours can irritate
the airways and cause burns.
Never dismantle the battery.
Avoid contact with skin.
Do not inhale vapours.
2.3 Requirements for riders
The rider must have the required mental capacity
and physical and motor skills to ride on public
roads. A minimum age of 14 years is
recommended.
2.4 Vulnerable groups
Keep batteries and the charger away from
children and people with reduced physical,
sensory or mental capacities or lacking in
experience and knowledge.
If minors use the pedelec, a legal guardian must
should provide them with comprehensive
instructions.
2.5 Personal protective equipment
Wear a suitable helmet for your protection. The
helmet must have a reflective strip or a light in a
clearly visible colour.
Wear sturdy shoes.
Clothing should be retroreflective or as light as
possible. Fluorescent materials are also suitable.
High-visibility jackets and straps on your upper
body ensure even greater safety. Never wear a
skirt. Always wear trousers which reach down to
your ankles instead.
2.6 Safety guards
Three safety guards protect riders against heat or
moving parts:
• Chain or belt guards prevent clothing from being
pulled into the drive train
• Mudguards protect against dirt and water
splashing up from the road.
• Motor covers on the motor casing protect against
heat.
Never remove the guards.
Check the guards on a regular basis.
Take pedelec out of service if a guard is
damaged or missing. Contact specialist dealer.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 18
Safety
2.7 Safety markings and safety
instructions
The pedelec and battery nameplates contain
these safety markings and safety instructions:
2.8 What to do in an emergency
2.8.1 Dangerous situation in road traffic
In the event of any hazards or dangers in road
traffic, apply the brakes on the pedelec until it
comes to a halt. The brake acts as an
emergency stop system in such cases.
2.8.2 Leaked brake fluid
Remove those affected from the danger area to
fresh air.
Never leave those affected unattended.
Remove any clothing contaminated with brake
fluid immediately.
Never inhale vapours. Ensure sufficient
ventilation.
Wear gloves and safety gloves as protective
equipment.
Keep unprotected persons away.
Take care with leaked brake fluid as it poses a
slip hazard.
Keep leaking brake fluid away from naked
flames, hot surfaces and sources of ignition.
Avoid contact with skin and eyes.
After inhalation
Take in fresh air. Immediately consult a doctor
in case of any discomfort.
After skin contact
Wash affected skin with soap and water and
rinse well. Remove contaminated clothing.
Consult doctor in the event of pain or
discomfort.
After contact with eyes
Rinse eyes under flowing water for at least ten
minutes with the lids open; also rinse under
lids. Immediately consult a doctor in case of
any pain or discomfort.
Symbol Explanation
General warning
Adhere to the instructions for use
Table 4: Meaning of safety markings
Symbol Explanation
Read the instructions
Separate collection of electrical
and electronic devices
Separate collection of ordinary
and rechargeable batteries
Must not be thrown into fire
(burning prohibited)
It is forbidden to open any
batteries
Device of protection class II
Only suitable for use indoors
Fuse (device fuse)
EU conformity
Recyclable material
Protect from temperatures
above 50 °C and direct sunlight
Table 5: Safety instructions
max. 50°C
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 19
Safety
After swallowing
Rinse out mouth with water. Never induce
vomiting. Risk of aspiration.
If a person is lying on their back and vomiting,
place them in the recovery position. Seek
medical advice immediately.
Environmental protection measures
Never allow brake fluid to flow into the sewage
system, water courses or groundwater.
Notify the relevant authorities if fluid
penetrates the ground, water courses or the
sewage system.
Dispose of leaked brake fluid in an
environmentally responsible way in accordance
with statutory regulations (see Section 10.1).
The brake system must be repaired
immediately if brake fluid leaks out. Contact
specialist dealer.
2.8.3 Battery vapours emitted
Vapours may be emitted if the battery is damaged
or used improperly. The vapours may cause
respiratory tract irritation.
Get into fresh air.
Consult doctor in the event of pain or
discomfort.
After contact with eyes
Carefully rinse eyes with plenty of water for at
least 15 minutes. Protect unaffected eye. Seek
medical advice immediately.
After skin contact
Remove any solid particles immediately.
Rinse the affected area with plenty of water for
at least 15 minutes. Then dab the affected skin
gently. Do not rub dry.
Remove contaminated clothing immediately.
Immediately consult a doctor if there is any
redness, pain or discomfort.
2.8.4 Battery fire
The safety electronics may fail if the battery is
damaged or faulty. The residual voltage can
cause a short circuit. The battery may self-ignite
and explode.
1Keep your distance if the battery becomes
deformed or starts to emit smoke.
2If charging, remove the plug connector from
the socket.
3Contact the fire service immediately.
Use Class fire extinguishers to put out the fire.
Never extinguish damaged batteries with water
or allow them to come into contact with water.
Inhaling vapours can cause intoxication.
Stand on the side of the fire where the wind is
blowing from.
Use breathing apparatus if possible.
2.8.5 Oil and lubricant leaks from the rear
frame damper
Dispose of leaked oils and lubricants in an
environmentally responsible way in
accordance with statutory regulations (see
Section 10.1).
Contact specialist dealer.
2.8.6 Oil and lubricant leaks from the fork
Dispose of leaked oils and lubricants in an
environmentally responsible way in
accordance with statutory regulations (see
Section 10.1).
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 20
Safety
2.8.7 Lubricant leaking from the eightpins
suspension seat post
Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Wear nitrile
gloves to protect yourself.
Never inhale vapours. Ensure sufficient
ventilation.
Immediately remove any clothing items
contaminated with lubricants.
If swallowed
Phone doctor or poison information centre
immediately.
Never induce vomiting.
If inhaled
Take in fresh air. Phone doctor or poison
information centre immediately if there is any
discomfort.
After skin contact
Wash affected skin with soap and water and
rinse well. Remove contaminated clothing.
Consult doctor in the event of pain or
discomfort.
Environmental protection measures
Never allow lubricant to flow into the sewage
system, water courses or groundwater.
Notify the relevant authorities if fluid
penetrates the ground, water courses or the
sewage system.
Dispose of leaked lubricants in an
environmentally responsible way in
accordance with statutory regulations
(see Section 10.1).
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 21
Description
3 Description
3.1 Proper use
All check lists and instructions for actions in these
operating instructions must be met. Approved
accessories can be installed by specialist staff.
Use the pedelec when it is in perfect, proper
working order only. National requirements may
apply to the pedelec which the standard
equipment may not meet. Different regulations
apply across the country to the riding light,
reflectors and other components when riding on
public roads. The general laws and the
regulations for the prevention of accidents and
environmental protection in the respective country
of use must be adhered to.
The rechargeable batteries are designed to
supply power to the pedelec motor only. Never
use the batteries for other purposes.
Each pedelec is assigned a pedelec type, which
determines its proper use, function and area of
use.
City and trekking
bicycles
Child's bicycles/
bicycles for young
adults
Mountain bikes Racing bicycle Cargo bike Folding bicycle
City and trekking
bicycles are designed
for comfortable, daily
use and are suitable
for riding on public
roads.
Cycles for children
and young adults are
suitable for riding on
public roads.
Legal guardians must
read the operating
instructions before
putting the bike into
use. Tell children and
young people what
the operating
instructions contain
in a way appropriate
to their age.
Check the size of the
pedelec every 3
months for ortho-
paedic reasons.
Check compliance
with the maximum
permitted total weight
(PTW) every 3
months.
Mountain bikes are
designed for sports
use. The design char-
acteristics include a
short wheelbase, a
sitting position with
the rider inclined
towards the front, and
a brake requiring low
actuation force.
Mountain bikes are
sports bikes and not a
means of transport.
They require an
adaptation period in
addition to physical
fitness. Learning how
to ride a mountain
bike takes practice,
especially braking
and riding around
bends.
The strain on hands,
wrists, arms, shoul-
ders, the neck and
back is considerable.
Inexperienced riders
tend to brake too hard
and lose control as a
result.
Racing bikes are
designed for fast
rides on roads and
paths with a good,
undamaged road
surface.
Racing bikes are
sports bikes and not a
means of transport.
Racing bikes are
characterised by their
lightweight structure
and a design which is
stripped to the
minimum parts
required for riding.
The frame geometry
and the layout of the
operating elements
are designed to allow
the bike to be ridden
at high speeds.
Learning how to ride
slowly, apply the
brakes and get on
and off the bike safely
takes practice due to
the frame design.
The sitting position is
athletic. The physical
strain on hands,
wrists, arms, shoul-
ders, the neck and
back is considerable.
The sitting position
requires a high level
of physical fitness.
Cargo bikes are suit-
able for transporting
loads on public roads
on a daily basis.
The transportation of
loads requires skill
and physical fitness
in order to balance
the additional weight.
The very varied
loading conditions
and weight distribu-
tions require special
practice and skill
when braking and
riding in bends.
A longer period is
required to adaptation
to the length, width
and turning circle.
You need to be
cautious when riding
a cargo bike. You
must pay attention to
traffic on public roads
and the condition of
the route.
Folding bicycles are
suitable for riding on
public roads.
Folding bikes can be
folded together and
thus save space
when they are trans-
ported, e.g. in cars or
on local transport.
The folding function
of the folding bicycle
makes it necessary to
use smaller wheels
and longer brake
cables and Bowden
cables. Therefore, in
case of an increased
load, a reduction in
riding stability and
braking power, dimin-
ished comfort and
reduced durability are
to be expected.
Table 6: Proper use for each pedelec type
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 22
Description
3.1.1 Improper use
Failure to adhere to the proper use poses a risk of
personal injury and material damage. It is
prohibited to use the pedelec in the following
ways:
• when the electrical drive system has been
manipulated
• riding with a damaged or incomplete pedelec
• riding over steps
• riding through deep water
• charging with an incorrect charger
• lending the pedelec to untrained riders
• carrying other people
• riding with excessive baggage
• riding with no hands
• riding on ice and snow
• improper servicing
• improper repair
• tough areas of use, such as professional
competitions
• stunt riding or acrobatics.
City and trekking
bicycles
Child's bicycles/
bicycles for young
adults
Mountain bikes Racing bicycle Cargo bike Folding bicycle
City and trekking bicy-
cles are not sports
bicycles. If used for
sports, the rider can
expect reduced riding
stability and dimin-
ished comfort.
Cycles for children
and young adults are
not toys.
Mountain bikes must
be retrofitted with
lighting, a bell and
other fittings as
specified by national
laws and regulations
before they are used
on public roads.
Racing bikes must
be retrofitted with
lights, a bell and
other fittings as
specified by national
laws and regula-
tions before they are
used on public
roads.
Cargo bikes are not a
touring or sports
bicycle.
A folding bicycle is
not a touring or sports
bicycle.
Table 7: Information on improper use
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 23
Description
3.1.2 Permitted total weight (PTW)
The pedelec may only be loaded to its maximum
permitted total weight (PTW).
The maximum permitted total weight is
• the weight of the fully assembled pedelec
• plus body weight
• plus baggage
Type no. Model PTW [kg]
22-15-1054 Iconic EVO 1 27.5" 135
22-15-1055 Iconic EVO 1 29" 135
22-15-1058 Iconic EVO 1 27.5" 135
22-15-1066 Urban EVO 12 150
22-15-1067 Urban EVO 12 150
22-15-1068 Urban EVO 12 150
22-15-1081 Cross Flyer EVO 135
22-15-1082 Cross Flyer EVO 135
22-15-1083 Cross Flyer EVO 135
22-15-1084 Landscape EVO 135
22-15-1085 Landscape EVO 135
22-15-1086 Landscape EVO 135
22-15-4004 Cross Mover EVO 1 135
22-15-4006 Cross Mover EVO 1 135
22-18-0006 LT CX 27.5" 130
22-18-0007 LT CX 29" 130
22-18-0008 Copperhead EVO 1 27.5" 130
22-18-0009 Copperhead EVO 1 29" 130
22-18-0010 Copperhead EVO 2 27.5" 130
22-18-0011 Copperhead EVO 2 29" 130
22-18-0012 Copperhead EVO AM 1 130
22-18-0020 Copperhead EVO 2 27.5" 130
22-18-0024 Copperhead EVO 2 27.5" 130
22-18-0070 LT Performance 27.5" 130
22-18-0071 LT Performance 29" 130
22-18-0072 LT EVO CX 27.5" 130
22-18-0073 LT EVO CX 29" 130
22-18-0074 Aminga EVA TR 2 27.5" 130
22-18-0075 Aminga EVA TR 1 27.5" 130
22-18-0076 Aminga EVA 1 27.5" 130
22-18-0077 Aminga EVA 2 27.5" 130
Table 8: Type number, model and PTW
22-18-0078 Aminga EVA 2 27.5" 130
22-18-0079 Aminga EVA 2 27.5" 130
22-18-0080 Aminga EVA 3 27.5" 130
22-18-2009 AMINGA E2 CX
(MARKGRAF) 130
22-18-3001 Sonic EVO 1 29" 150
22-18-3002 Sonic EVO 1 27.5" 150
22-18-3003 Sonic EVA 1 150
22-18-3004 Sonic EVA TR 1 150
22-18-3005 Sonic EVA TR 2 150
22-18-3006 Sonic EVO TR1 29" 150
22-18-3007 Sonic Evo TR2 Carbon
29" 150
22-18-3008 Sonic EVO AM 1 150
22-18-3009 Sonic EVO AM 2 Carbon 150
22-18-3013 Sonic EVO XS 150
22-18-5001 Copperhead EVO 1 XXL
27.5" 150
22-18-5002 Copperhead EVO 1 XXL
29" 150
22-18-5003 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL
27.5" 150
22-18-5004 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL
29" 150
22-18-5010 Copperhead EVO 1 XXL
27.5" 150
22-18-5015 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL
Street 27.5" 150
22-18-5017 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL
Street 27.5" 130
22-18-5025 Copperhead EVO 2
Street 27.5" 130
22-18-5027 Copperhead EVO 2
Street 27.5" 130
22-18-5029 Copperhead EVO 1
Street 27.5" 130
22-18-5031 Copperhead EVO 1
Street 27.5" 130
22-18-5032 Copperhead EVO 1
Street 29" 130
22-19-3001 Sonic EVO EN 1 150
Type no. Model PTW [kg]
Table 8: Type number, model and PTW
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 24
Description
3.1.3 Environmental requirements
You can be ride the pedelec within a temperature
range between -5 °C and +40 °C. The electric
drive system is limited in its performance outside
this temperature range.
During winter use, especially at temperatures
below 0 °C, we recommend that you don't insert a
battery charged and stored at room temperature
into the pedelec until just before setting off. We
recommend using thermal protection sleeves
when riding longer distances in the cold.
Temperatures under -5 °C and over +40 °C must
be avoided.
You must also keep within the following
temperature ranges:
The nameplate contains symbols for the pedelec's
area of use.
Check what tracks and roads you may ride on
before setting off for the first time.
Operating temperature -5… +40 °C Transportation temperature +10… +40 °C
Storage temperature +10… +40 °C
Work environment temperature +15… +25 °C
Charging temperature +10… +40 °C
Area of use City and trekking
bicycles
Child's bicycles/
bicycles for young
adults
Mountain bikes Racing bicycle Cargo bike Folding bicycle
Suitable for
tarmacked and
paved roads.
Suitable for
tarmacked and
paved roads.
Suitable for
tarmacked and
paved roads.
Suitable for
tarmacked and
paved roads.
Suitable for
tarmacked and
paved roads.
Suitable for
tarmacked roads,
cycle paths and firm
gravel paths and
roads, and longer
sections with
moderate slopes and
jumps up to 15 cm.
Suitable for
tarmacked roads,
cycle paths and firm
gravel paths and
roads, and longer
sections with
moderate slopes and
jumps up to 15 cm.
Suitable for
tarmacked roads,
cycle paths and firm
gravel paths and
roads, and longer
sections with
moderate slopes
and jumps up to
15 cm.
Suitable for
tarmacked roads,
cycle paths and firm
gravel paths and
roads, and longer
sections with
moderate slopes
and jumps up to
15 cm.
Suitable for
tarmacked roads,
cycle paths and easy
to demanding off-
road riding, sections
with moderate slopes
and jumps up to
61 cm.
Suitable for
tarmacked roads,
cycle paths and
easy to demanding
off-road riding,
sections with
moderate slopes
and jumps up to
61 cm.
Suitable for
tarmacked roads,
cycle paths and
easy to demanding
off-road riding,
limited downhill use
and jumps up to
122 cm.
Table 9: Area of use
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 25
Description
The pedelec is unsuitable for the following areas of use:
Area of use City and trekking
bicycles
Child's bicycles/
bicycles for
young adults
Mountain bikes Racing bicycle Cargo bike Folding bicycle
Never drive off-road
or perform jumps. Never drive off-road
or perform jumps. Never drive off-road
or perform jumps. Never drive off-road
or perform jumps. Never drive off-road
or perform jumps.
Never drive off-road
or perform jumps
over 15 cm.
Never drive off-road
or perform jumps
over 15 cm.
Never drive off-road
or perform jumps
over 15 cm.
Never drive off-road
or perform jumps
over 15 cm.
Never ride downhill
or perform jumps
over 61 cm.
Never ride downhill or
perform jumps over
61 cm.
Never traverse
extremely difficult off-
road terrain or
perform jumps over
122 cm.
Table 10: Unsuitable terrain
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 26
Description
3.2 Nameplate
The nameplate is situated on the frame. The
precise position of the nameplate is shown in
Figure 2 . The nameplate contains thirteen pieces
of information.
Figure 1: Example ZEG nameplate
ZEG Zweirad-Einkaufs-
Genossenschaft eG
Longericher Str. 2
50739 Köln, Germany
Typ:
22-17-1017
0,25 kW / 25 km/h
zGG 150 kg
EPAC 25 kg
BJ 2021 / MJ 2022
EN 15194
nach
EPAC
2
1
9
12
13
10
11
4
5
6
7
8
3
No. Designation Description More
information
1CE marking The manufacturer uses the CE marking to declare that the pedelec
complies with applicable requirements.
2 Manufacturer's contact details You can contact the manufacturer at the address indicated. Section 1.1
3 Type number All pedelec models have an eight-digit type number, which is used to
specify the design model year, the type of pedelec and the version. Section 1.5
4 Maximum continuous power The maximum continuous power is the greatest possible power for the
electric motor output shaft over 30 minutes.
5 Maximum permitted total weight The maximum permitted total weight is the weight of the fully assembled
pedelec with the rider plus baggage.
6 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is the year in which the pedelec was
manufactured. The production period is between June 2021 and June 2022.
7 Pedelec type Each pedelec is assigned a pedelec type, which determines its proper use,
function and area of use. Section 3.2
8 Safety markings Safety markings warn of hazards. Section 2.6
9 Disposal instructions These instructions must be followed when disposing of the pedelec. Section 10
10 Area of use The pedelec may only be ridden in authorised locations. Section 3.6
11 Model year The model year refers to the first production year that the series-
manufactured pedelec was produced in the version concerned. The year of
manufacture is different to the model year in some cases.
12 Weight of the ready-to-ride pedelec The weight of the ready-to-ride pedelec is specified as a weight of 25 kg or
above and refers to its weight at the time of purchase. Extra accessories
need to be added to the weight. Section 4.1
13 Shut-off speed The speed that the pedelec reaches at the moment when the current has
dropped to zero or to the no-load current value.
Table 11: Explanation of information on the nameplate
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 27
Description
3.3 Components
3.3.1 Overview
Figure 2: Pedelec from right; BULLS Aminga EVA TR 1 used as example
Figure 3: Pedelec viewed from right; BULLS ICONIC EVO 1 used as example
1 Front wheel
2Fork
3 Front wheel mudguard
4 Headlight
5 Handlebars
6Stem
7Frame
8 Damper
9 Seat post
10 Saddle
11 Reflector
12 Pannier rack
13 Rear wheel mudguard
14 Rear light
15 Rear wheel
16 Kickstand
17 Chain
18 Frame number
19 Chain guard
20 Motor
21 Pedal
22 Battery and nameplate
1
2
3
5
678910
15
17 18 22
20 21
1
2
3
5
679
10
111314
15
17
16
18 19
12
20 21
4
22
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 28
Description
3.3.2 Chassis
The chassis comprises two components:
•Frame and
• steering system.
3.3.2.1 Frame
The frame absorbs all forces which act on the
pedelec from body weight, pedalling and the
ground. The frame also acts as a carrier for most
components.
The frame geometry determines the pedelec’s
ride performance.
3.3.2.2 Steering system
The steering system components are:
• Steering headset
•Stem
• Handlebars
•Fork.
3.3.2.3 Steering headset
The steering headset (also known as a bike
headset or simply a headset) is the fork bearing
system in the frame. A distinction is made
between two different types:
• Conventional steering headsets for fork steerers
with thread and
• Steering headsets for threadless fork steerers,
what are known as headsets.
3.3.2.4 Stem
The stem is the connecting component between
the handlebars and the fork steerer tube. The
stem is used to adjust the handlebars to the rider.
The stem is used to adjust the handlebar height
and the gap between the handlebars and saddle
(see Section 6.5.6).
Quickly adjustable stems
Quickly adjustable stems are an extension to the
fork steerer. You can change the height and angle
of quickly adjustable stems without any tools. Up
to 3 settings can be adjusted, depending on the
model:
Figure 4: Example – BY.SCHULZ Speedlifter Twist Pro
SDS
1 Height adjustment
2 Twist function
3 Stem angle adjustment.
Adjusting the height and stem angle increase ride
comfort as different sitting positions can be
adopted on longer rides. The twist function saves
space when parking.
Figure 5: Twist function, using BY.SCHULZ as an example
2
1
3
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 29
Description
3.3.2.5 Handlebars
The pedelec is steered using the handlebars. The
handlebars are used to support the upper body
and is the mount for most controls and displays
(see Section 3.4.1).
Figure 6: Handlebar dimensions
The main structural dimensions of handlebars are:
1 Rise (height)
2Width
3 Backsweep
3.3.2.6 Fork
The stem and handlebars are attached to the top
end of the fork steerer. The axle is fastened to the
fork ends. The wheel is fastened to the axle.
Figure 7: Overview of fork
1 Fork steerer
2 Side reflectors (optional)
3 Fork end
4 Fork leg
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 30
Description
3.3.3 Suspension
Both forks and suspension forks are fitted in this
model series.
3.3.3.1 Rigid fork
Rigid forks do not feature suspension. They transfer
the used muscle and motor power to the road to
optimum effect. Pedelecs with rigid forks consume
less energy on steep roads and have a greater range
than pedelecs with suspension.
3.3.3.2 Suspension fork
A fork deflects when a steel spring, air suspension,
or both suspension types act on it.
Unlike rigid forks, suspension forks improve contact
with the ground and thus enhance comfort using two
functions: suspension and damping. The suspension
in a pedelec prevents an impact, such as one caused
by a stone lying in the pedelec's path, from being
channelled directly into the body via the fork. The
impact is absorbed by the suspension system
instead. This causes the suspension fork to
compress.
After compressing, the suspension fork returns to
its original position. If the bike has a damper, the
damper will slow this movement down. It thus
prevents the suspension system from springing
back in an uncontrolled manner and the fork from
oscillating up and down. Dampers which dampen
compressive deflection movements, i.e. a
compression load, are called compression
dampers or compression dashpots.
Figure 8: Without suspension (1) and with suspension (2)
Dampers which dampen rebound deflection
movements, i.e. a rebound load, are called
rebound dampers or dashpots.
The compression can be disabled in any suspension
fork. A suspension fork will then behave like a rigid
fork.
The stem and the handlebars are fastened to the
fork steerer. The wheel is fastened to the axle.
12
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 31
Description
Negative deflection (sag)
The negative deflection (sag) is the percentage of
total deflection that is compressed by body
weight, including equipment (such as a
backpack), the seating position and frame
geometry. Sag is not caused by riding. The
pedelec rebounds at a controlled speed if it is
optimally adjusted. The wheel stays in contact
with the ground when passing over bumps (blue
line). The fork head, handlebars and body follow
terrain (green line) when riding over bumps. The
suspension motion is predictable and controlled.
Figure 9: Optimum fork riding performance
When optimally adjusted, the fork counteracts
deflection on hilly terrain and stays higher in its
deflection range. This makes it easier to maintain
speed when riding over hilly sections of terrain.
Figure 10: Optimum fork riding performance on hilly terrain
When optimally adjusted, the fork deflects quickly
and unhindered when the bike hits bumps and
absorbs a bump. Traction is retained (blue line).
The fork responds quickly to the bump. The
headset and handlebars rise slightly when
absorbing a bump (green line).
Figure 11: Optimum fork riding performance over bumps
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 32
Description
Rebound damping
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Rebound damping defines the speed at which the
suspension rebounds after being loaded.
Rebound damping controls the suspension fork
extension and rebound speed, which, in turn, has
an impact on traction and control.
Rebound damping can be adjusted to body
weight, spring stiffness, deflection, the terrain and
the rider's preferences.
If the air pressure or spring stiffness increases,
the extension and rebound speeds also increase.
Rebound damping needs to be increased to
achieve an optimal setting if the air pressure or
spring stiffness are increased.
The damper rebounds at a controlled speed if the
fork is optimally adjusted. The wheel stays in
contact with the ground when passing over bumps
(blue line).
The fork head, handlebars and body follow terrain
(green line) when riding over bumps. The
suspension motion is predictable and controlled.
Figure 12: Optimum fork riding performance
Suspension fork compression adjustment
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
The compression adjuster allows the rider to
make quick adjustments to the fork's suspension
behaviour to adapt to the changes in terrain. It is
intended for adjustments made during the ride.
The compression adjuster controls the
compression lifting speed or the rate at which the
fork deflects slow impacts. The compression
adjuster affects the absorption of bumps and its
efficiency when weight shifts or during transitions,
cornering and uniform impacts caused by bumps,
and when braking. When optimally adjusted, the
fork counteracts deflection, stays higher in its
deflection range and helps to maintain speed
while riding on hilly parts of terrain. The fork
deflects quickly and unhindered when the bike hits
a bump and absorbs the bump. Traction is
retained (blue line).
Figure 13: Optimum performance on hilly terrain
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 33
Description
Steel suspension fork structure
The stem and the handlebars are fastened to the
fork steerer. The wheel is fastened to the axle.
Figure 14: Suntour steel suspension fork as an example
1 Fork steerer
2 Sag setting wheel
3Crown
4 Dust seal
5Q-Loc
6Axle
7 Fork end
8 Stanchion
9 Compression damper
Air suspension fork structure
Depending on the model, the air suspension fork has
either
• an air suspension assembly group (orange) and/
or
• a compression damper assembly (blue) and/or
• a rebound damper assembly group (red)
.
Figure 15: Internal structure of air suspension fork
1 Air valve
2 Air valve cap
3 Fork steerer
4 Sag setting wheel
5 Rebound adjuster
6 Stanchion
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 34
Overview
3.3.3.3 Rear frame damper
A rear frame damper is primarily fitted to mountain
bikes and helps to protect the pedelec and rider
against impacts and vibrations caused by uneven
ground. A rear frame damper deflects when a
steel spring, air suspension, or both suspension
types act on it.
Negative deflection (sag)
The sag is the percentage of total spring
deflection that is compressed by the rider’s body
weight, including equipment (such as a
backpack), their seating position and frame
geometry. Sag is not caused by riding.
The rear frame damper rebounds at a controlled
speed if it is optimally adjusted. The rear wheel
does not bounce off rough surfaces or the ground;
it stays in contact with the ground instead
(blue line).
The saddle is raised slightly if the bump is
compensated and gently sinks downwards when
the suspension deflects as soon as the wheel
touches the ground after the bump. The rear
frame damper rebounds in a controlled way, so
that the rider remains sitting in a horizontal
position when the next bump is absorbed. The
suspension motion is predictable and controlled.
The rider is not thrown upwards or forwards
(green line).
Figure 16: Optimum rear frame damper ride performance
When optimally adjusted, the rear frame damper
counteracts deflection, stays higher in its
deflection range and helps to maintain speed
when riding on hilly parts of terrain.
Figure 17: Optimum rear frame damper ride performance on hilly terrain
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 35
Overview
When optimally adjusted, the rear frame damper
deflects quickly and unhindered when the bike hits
bumps and absorbs a bump. Traction is retained
(blue line).
The saddle rises slightly when absorbing a bump
(green line).
Figure 18: Optimum rear frame damper ride performance over bumps
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 36
Description
3.3.3.4 Suntour rear frame damper
The rear frame damper features air suspension, a
compression damper and a rebound damper.
Figure 19: Example showing Suntour rear frame damper
1 Air chamber
2 Rebound lever (rebound setting)
3 Air valve
4 Lockout lever
5 Total damper length
6 Negative deflection in the rear frame damper
7 Damper unit
8O-ring
3
1
7
2
4
8
5
6
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 37
Description
3.3.3.5 RockShox rear frame damper
The rear frame damper features air suspension, a
compression damper and a rebound damper.
Figure 20: Monarch RL as an example
1 Threshold lever
2 Rebound damper adjuster
3 Air valve
4O-ring
5Scale
1
2
3
45
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 38
Description
Rebound damping for rear frame damper
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
The rear frame damper rebounds at a controlled
speed if it is optimally adjusted. The rear wheel
does not bounce off rough surfaces or the ground;
it stays in contact with the ground instead (blue
line). The saddle is raised slightly if the bump is
compensated and gently sinks downwards when
the suspension deflects as soon as the wheel
touches the ground after the bump. The rear
frame damper rebounds in a controlled way, so
that the rider remains sitting in a horizontal
position when the next bump is absorbed. The
suspension motion is predictable and controlled.
The rider is not thrown upwards or forwards
(green line). The rebound adjuster setting
depends on the air pressure setting. A higher sag
requires lower rebound damping.
Figure 21: Optimum rear frame damper riding performance
Rear frame damper compression adjuster
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
The compression adjuster controls the
compression lifting speed or the rate at which the
rear frame damper deflects in response to slow
impacts. The compression adjuster affects the
absorption of bumps and its efficiency when
weight shifts or during transitions, cornering and
uniform impacts caused by bumps, and when
braking.
When optimally adjusted, the rear frame damper
counteracts deflection, stays higher in its
deflection range and helps to maintain speed
when riding on hilly parts of terrain.
Figure 22: Optimum rear frame damper ride performance on hilly terrain
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 39
Description
3.3.4 Wheel
Figure 23: Visible wheel components
1Tyres
2 Rim
3 Spoke
4 Spoke nipples
5Hub
6Valve
The wheel comprises the wheel itself, an inner
tube with a valve and a tyre.
3.3.4.1 Tyres
The tyre forms the outer section of the wheel.
Tyres differ in their tread, depending on their
intended use.
Tread
The tread has little influence on riding
characteristics on a smooth road. In this case, the
grip between the road and tyre is mainly due to the
rolling friction between the rubber and the road
surface.
Unlike cars, a pedelec will not aquaplane. The
tread contact is much smaller and the contact
pressure much higher. Theoretically, aquaplaning
will not occur until speeds of 200 km/h are
reached.
However, the tread is highly important on terrain.
In this case, the tread creates an interlock with the
ground. This is the only way possible to transmit
the driving, braking and steering forces. The tread
can also help improve control on dirty road
surfaces.
If a tyre with a deep tread is used on asphalt, this
may make an unpleasant noise when the brakes
are used In such a case, the specialist dealer
needs to replace the tyre with a new one with a
shallow tread.
Figure 24: Example: Information on tyres
Tyre pressure
The permitted pressure range is indicated on the
side of the tyre. It is indicated in psi or bars.
The tyre is only able to support the pedelec if there
is adequate tyre pressure. The tyre pressure must
be adjusted to the rider and then checked on a
regular basis.
Tyre size
The tyre size pressure range is indicated on the
side of the tyre.
3.3.4.2 Rim
The rim is the metal profile on a wheel which holds
the tyre, tube and rim band together. The rim is
joined to the hub with spokes.
In rim brakes, the outer surface of the rim is used
to brake.
3.3.4.3 Valve
Each wheel has a valve. Air is pumped into the
tyre via the valve. There is a valve cap on each
valve. The screw-on valve cap keeps out dust and
dirt.
1
2
3
6
5
4
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 40
Description
The pedelec has either:
• a conventional valve
• a Presta valve or
• a Schrader valve.
Dunlop valve
The Dunlop valve, also known as a conventional
valve, is the valve in most widespread use. The
valve insert can be replaced easily and air can be
let out very quickly.
Figure 25: Dunlop valve
Presta valve
The Presta valve, also known as the French valve
(FV) or Sclaverand valve, is the narrowest variant
of all valves. The Presta valve requires a smaller
hole in the rim, which is why it is especially
suitable for the narrow rims on racing bikes. It is
about 4 to 5 g lighter than a Dunlop or Schrader
valve.
Figure 26: Presta valve
Schrader valve
The Schrader valve can be pumped at filling
stations. Older and easy bicycle pumps are
unsuitable for filling tyres via a Schrader valve.
Figure 27: Schrader valve
3.3.4.4 Spoke
A spoke is a rod that connects the hub to the rim.
The bent end of the spoke which is hooked into
the hub is called the spoke head. A thread
between 10 mm and 15 mm is attached to the
other end of the spoke.
3.3.4.5 Spoke nipples
Spoke nipples are screw elements with an internal
thread which fits onto the spoke thread. Fitted
spokes are tensioned by tightening the spoke
nipples. This straightens the wheel uniformly.
3.3.4.6 Hub
The hub is located in the centre of the wheel. The
hub is connected to the rim and tyre with the
spokes. An axle runs through the hub, connecting
the hub with the fork at the front and with the
frame at the rear.
The hub’s main task is to transfer the pedelec’s
force of weight to the tyres. Special hubs on the
rear wheel perform additional functions. There is
a distinction between five types of hub:
• Hubs without additional features
• Brake hub, see Back-pedal brake
• Gear hub, also known as a hub gear
• Generator hub, see Hub dynamo
• Motor hub.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 41
Description
3.3.5 Braking system
A pedelec's brake system is primarily operated
using the brake lever on the handlebars.
• If the left brake handle is pulled, the brake on the
front wheel is applied.
• If the right brake handle is pulled, the brake on the
rear wheel is applied.
The brakes are used as an emergency stop
system and bring the bicycle to a halt quickly and
safely in the event of an emergency.
The brake is applied using the brake lever either
• with the brake lever and shift cable (mechanical
brake) or
• with the brake lever and hydraulic brake cable
(hydraulic brake).
3.3.5.1 Mechanical brake
The brake lever is connected with the brake via a
wire inside the shift cable (also known as a
Bowden cable).
Figure 28: Bowden cable structure
3.3.5.2 Hydraulic brake
The brake fluid is in a closed hose system. If the
brake lever is pulled, the brake fluid transfers
pressure to the brake on the wheel.
Figure 29: Components in a brake cable
1 Brake cable
2 Cable clip
3 Union nut
4 Cover cap
5 Knob
6 Insert pin
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 42
Description
3.3.5.3 Disc brake
Figure 30: Brake system with disc brake – example
1 Brake disc
2 Brake calliper with brake linings
3 Handlebars with brake lever
4 Front wheel brake disc
5 Rear wheel brake disc
On a pedelec with a disc brake, the brake disc is
screwed permanently to the wheel hub.
You increase brake pressure by pulling the brake
lever. The brake fluid is used to transfer pressure
through the brake cables to the cylinders in the
brake calliper. The braking force is boosted by a
speed reduction and applied to the brake linings.
These apply the brake disc mechanically. If the
brake lever is pushed, the brake linings are
pressed against the brake disc and the wheel
movement is decelerated until it comes to a stop.
1
3
4
5
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 43
Description
3.3.6 Seat post
Seat posts are not designed to fasten the saddle
but also to adjust exactly to the optimum sitting
position. The seat post can:
• adjust the seat height in the seat tube
• adjust the saddle horizontally with a clamping
mechanism and
• adjust the saddle angle by swivelling the entire
saddle clamping mechanism.
Retractable seat posts feature a remote control on
the handlebars, which can be used to lower the
seat post – at a traffic light, for example – and
raise it again.
3.3.6.1 Patent seat post
Figure 31: Example of ergotec patent seat post with either
one or two seat clamping screws
Patent seat posts have a rigid link between the
saddle and the post. Patent seat posts which are
angled more markedly towards the rear are called
offset seat posts. Offset seat posts provide a
greater distance between the saddle and the
handlebars.
In patent saddle posts, the saddle is attached to
the head with one or two saddle clamping screws.
It is recommended to lubricate the thread in these
screws to ensure sufficient tension when
tightening the screw.
Patent saddle posts are fastened into the seat
tube with either a quick release or a screwable
clamp.
Figure 32: Example of a quick release
3.3.6.2 Suspension seat post
Spring-loaded seat posts can reduce shock after
one-time hard impacts, thus improving ride
comfort significantly. However, suspension seat
posts are not able to compensate for bumps in the
road.
If the seat post is the only suspension element,
the entire vehicle is a non-suspended mass. This
has an unfavourable effect on loaded touring
bikes or pedelecs with child trailers.
Suspension seat posts feature small, heavy-duty
slide bearings, guides and articulated joints. If
they are not lubricated on a regular basis, the
sensitive response behaviour diminishes
considerably, causing excessive wear.
The pre-tensioning in non-damped suspension
seat posts must be adjusted in such a way that the
suspension seat post does not deflect with just
body weight. This prevents the suspension seat
post from deflecting and bobbing intermittently at
higher pedalling frequencies or if the rider pedals
irregularly.
The spring stiffness can be set lower with damped
suspension seat posts, thus making use of the
negative deflection.
3
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 44
Description
3.3.7 Mechanical drive system
The pedelec is driven by muscle power, just like a
bicycle.
The force which is applied by pedalling in the
direction of travel drives the front chain wheel.
The chain or belt transmits the force onto the rear
chain wheel and then onto the rear wheel.
Figure 33: Diagram of mechanical drive system
1 Direction of travel
2 Chain or belt
3 Rear chain wheel or belt pulley
4 Front chain wheel or belt pulley
5 Pedal
The pedelec is equipped with either a chain or belt
drive.
3.3.7.1 Chain drive layout
Figure 34: Chain drive with derailleur gears
1 Front derailleur
2 Rear derailleur
3Chain
A chain drive is compatible with:
• Back-pedal brake,
• Hub gear or
• Derailleur gears
3.3.7.2 Belt drive layout
Figure 35: Belt drive
1 Front belt pulley
2 Rear belt pulley
3Belt
A belt drive is compatible with:
• Back-pedal brake and
• Hub gear
A belt drive is not compatible with derailleur gears.
1
3
245
1
2
1
2
3
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 45
Description
3.3.8 Electric drive system
The pedelec has an electric drive system in
addition to a mechanical one.
Figure 36: Diagram of an electric drive system with
electric components
1 Front lamp
2 On-board computer
3.1 Integrated battery and/or
3.2 Frame battery and/or
3.3 Pannier rack battery
4 Rear light
5 Electric gear shift (alternative)
6 Motor
7 A charger which is designed for the battery.
3.3.8.1 Motor
As soon as the muscle power required for
pedalling passes a certain level, the motor is
activated gently and assists the pedalling motion.
The pre-set level of assistance determines the
motor output.
The motor switches off automatically as soon as
the rider no longer pedals, the temperature is
outside the permitted range, there is an overload
or the shut-off speed of 25 km/h has been
reached.
A push assist system can be activated. The speed
depends on the selected gear. The motor
continues to drive the pedelec as long as the rider
presses the push assist button on the handlebars.
The speed can be a maximum of 6 km/h in this
case. The electric drive system stops when the
push assist button is released.
The pedelec does not have a separate emergency
shut-off button. In the event of an emergency, the
motor can be stopped by removing the on-board
computer. The mechanical brakes are used as an
emergency stop system and bring the bicycle to a
halt quickly and safely in the event of an
emergency.
3.3.8.2 Rechargeable battery
BOSCH batteries are lithium ion batteries which
are developed and manufactured to the latest
technical standards. Each individual cell is
protected by a steel cup and encased in a plastic
battery housing. These batteries meet and exceed
applicable industrial safety standards. The battery
has an interior electronic protection circuit, which
is specifically designed for the charger and the
pedelec. The battery temperature is monitored at
all times. The battery is protected against deep
discharge, overcharging, overheating and short
circuit. In the event of a hazard, a protective circuit
switches the battery off automatically.
The battery has a high energy content when
charged. The code of practice for their safe
handling is found in Section 2 Safety and
Section 6.9 Rechargeable battery in the operating
instructions. If the electric drive system is not used
for 10 minutes and no button has been pressed on
the on-board computer or the control panel, the
electric drive system and the battery are
automatically switched off to save energy.
The type and duration of operating conditions
have a significant effect on the battery life. Just
like any other lithium-ion battery, the battery will
age naturally if it is not being used. The battery's
service life can be extended if the battery is well
maintained and stored at the correct temperature.
The charging capacity will decrease with age,
even if the battery is serviced properly. If the
operating time is severely shortened after
charging, this is a sign that battery has reached
the end of its useful life.
B
1
23.13.3 3.2
4
56
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 46
Description
Battery performance is reduced when the
temperature drops since this increases electrical
resistance. As a result, you can expect the range
to be shorter than normal in winter. We
recommend using thermal protection sleeves
when riding longer distances in the cold.
Each battery has its own lock.
3.3.8.3 Frame battery
Three different types of frame batteries can be
fitted:
Figure 37: Overview of frame battery
Figure 38: Details of frame battery
1 Battery housing
2Battery lock
3Battery key
4 On-off button (battery)
5 Battery level indicator (battery)
6 Charging port cover
7 Charging port
3.3.8.4 Pannier rack battery
Three different types of pannier rack batteries can
be fitted:
Figure 39: Overview of pannier rack battery
Figure 40: Details of pannier rack battery
1 Battery housing
2 Charging port
3 Charging port cover
4 Battery lock
5 Battery key
6 Battery level indicator (battery)
7 On-Off button (battery)
PowerPack 300 PowerPack 400 PowerPack 500
1
2
4
5
67
3
PowerPack 300 PowerPack 400 PowerPack 500
1
2
3
4
5
67
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 47
Description
3.3.8.5 Integrated battery
Four different types of pannier rack batteries can
be fitted:
Figure 41: Overview of integrated battery
Figure 42: Integrated battery in detail
1Battery key
2 Retainer guard
3 Securing hook
4 On-off button (battery)
5 Battery level indicator (battery)
6 Battery housing
3.3.8.6 Charger
Each pedelec is supplied with a charger. As a
general rule, any BOSCH charger may be used:
• The 2 A compact charger
• The 4 A standard charger
• The 6 A fast charger
Observe the operating instructions in the
Section 11.4 Documents.
3.3.9 Lighting
When the riding light is activated, the front light
and the rear light are switched on together.
PowerTube
400 PowerTube
500 PowerTube
625 PowerTube
750
(vertical and horizontal)
1
2
3
4
5
2
6
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 48
Overview
3.3.10 On-board computer
The pedelec has a BOSCH Purion on-board
computer.
The on-board computer controls the drive system
and shows the journey data on the display screen.
The battery powers the on-board computer. The
on-board computer also has two internal non-
rechargeable coin cells. This ensures that the
electric drive system can be switched on using the
on-board computer.
Figure 43: BOSCH Purion on-board computer
WALK
WALK
WALK
W
AL
W
W
W
W
W
W
A
A
L
K
K
K
K
K
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
WWWW
WW
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
WW
W
W
W
W
A
A
W
W
W
W
A
WW
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
A
WW
AAAA
AA
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
LLLL
LL
L
A
A
A
A
A
A
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
K
KKKK
KK
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 49
Overview
3.4 Description of controls and screens
3.4.1 Handlebars
Figure 44: Detailed view of handlebars from sitting position, example
1 Rear wheel hand brake
2Bell
3 Headlight
4 Front wheel hand brake
5 On-board computer
6 Lockout
7 Shifter
1
2
3
5
4
6
7
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 50
Overview
3.5 On-board computer
The on-board computer is operated using four
buttons on its casing.
.
Figure 45: BOSCH Purion on-board computer layout
3.5.1 Display
The display has nine on-screen indicators:
Figure 46: Display overview
1 Indicator for km/h or mph (see Section
3.8.1.1)
2 Tachometer indicator (see Section 3.8.1.2)
3 TRIP indicator (see Section 3.8.1.3)
4 Level of assistance indicator or Function
indicator (see Section 3.8.1.4)
5 Riding light symbol indicator (see
Section 3.8.1.5)
6 Maintenance indicator (see Section 3.8.1.6)
7 Battery level indicator (on-board computer)
(see Section 3.8.1.7)
8 RANGE indicator (see Section 3.8.1.3)
9 TOTAL indicator (see Section 3.8.1.3)
3.5.1.1 Indicator unit km/h or mph
The speed can be displayed in km/h or mph. You
can choose between the units in the system
settings.
3.5.1.2 Tachometer screen
The tachometer indicator shows the current speed
at all times.
Symbol Use
1WALK Push assist button
2 USB port
3On-Off button (display)
4 Display
5+Plus button
6–Minus button
Table 12: Operating elements overview
WALK
WALK
WALK
W
AL
W
W
W
W
W
W
A
A
L
K
K
K
K
K
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
WWWW
WW
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
WW
W
W
W
W
A
A
WW
W
W
A
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
A
WW
AAAA
AA
A
AA
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
LLLL
LL
L
AA
A
A
A
A
L
L
LL
L
L
L
L
K
KKKK
KK
K
K
K
K
K
KK
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
1
23
4
5
6
1
4
6
2
2
3
7
5
8
9
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 51
Overview
3.5.1.3 Information display
The display shows one of three types of
information. The displayed information can be
changed.
3.5.1.4 Level of assistance
The higher the selected level of assistance is, the
more the drive system assists with pedalling.
eMTB mode is available for Performance Line CX
drives. In eMTB mode, the assistance factor and
the torque are dynamically adjusted depending on
the pedalling force applied to the pedals. If the
pedelec has been configured with “eMTB mode”,
“eMTB mode” appears briefly when the SPORT
level of assistance is selected.
3.5.1.5 Riding light symbol
The riding light symbol is shown when the
riding light is on.
3.5.1.6 Maintenance indicator
Indicates that maintenance is required.
3.5.1.7 Battery level indicator
(on-board computer)
The battery level indicator displays the pedelec
battery level, not the level for the on-board
computer's internal battery. If the on-board
computer is removed from its mount, the last
battery level displayed is saved. Each bar in the
battery symbol on the screen represents 20%
capacity.
3.5.2 System message
The drive system monitors itself continuously and
if an error is detected, it is indicated by a system
message. The system may switch off
automatically depending on the type of error.
You will find more information and a table
containing all system messages in Section 6.2.
Display Function
TRIP Distance travelled since the last RESET
TOTAL Total distance travelled (cannot be
changed)
RANGE Estimated range of the available battery
charge, calculated based on the most
recent manner of riding
Table 13: Information display
Level of assistance Use
OFF When the drive system is switched
on, the motor assistance is switched
off. The pedelec can be used like a
normal bicycle by simply pedalling.
The push assist system cannot be
activated
ECO Limited assistance with maximum
efficiency for maximum range
TOUR Constant assistance, for long-range
tours
SPORT/eMTB
SPORT Powerful assistance for sports rides
on mountainous routes and on urban
roads
eMTB
available in
combination with
motors: BDU250P CX,
BDU365, BDU450 CX
and BDU480 CX
motors
Optimum assistance on any terrain,
sporty start-up, improved dynamics
and maximum performance
TURBO Maximum assistance up to high
pedalling frequencies, for sports riding
Table 14: Overview of levels of assistance
Symbol Meaning
The battery is fully charged.
The battery needs to be recharged.
The LEDs on the battery level indicator have
gone out. The capacity for drive assistance has
been used up and assistance is gently
switched off. The remaining capacity is
reserved for lighting and the on-board
computer. The screen flashes. The pedelec
battery capacity is sufficient to provide 2 more
hours of lighting. Other electrical loads, such
as automatic gears and charging of external
devices connected to the USB port, are not
taken into account here.
Table 15: Overview of battery level indicator
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 52
Description
3.5.3 Gear shift
3.5.3.1 SHIMANO derailleur gears
Only applies to vehicles with this equipment
The gear shift is on the right of the handlebars.
The gear shift has one or two shifters.
SHIMANO SL-M315 gear shift
Figure 47: Example of SHIMANO SL-M315
1 Shifter A
2 Shifter B
SHIMANO SL-M3100 gear shift
Figure 48: Example of SHIMANO SL-M3100
1 Shifter A
2 Shifter B (optional)
1
2
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 53
Description
3.5.4 Hand brake
There is a hand brake on the left and right of the
handlebars.
Figure 49: Front wheel (2) and rear (1) brake levers – Shimano brake used as an example
• The left-hand brake controls the front wheel
brake.
• The right-hand brake controls the rear wheel
brake.
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 54
Description
3.5.5 Battery level indicator (battery)
Each battery has its own level indicator:
Figure 50: Position of charge level indicator on pannier
rack battery
Figure 51: Position of charge level indicator on seat tube
battery
Figure 52: Position of charge level indicator on integrated
battery
1 On-Off button (battery)
2 Battery level indicator (battery)
3.5.5.1 Battery level indicator (battery)
The five green LEDs on the battery level indicator
show the charge level when the battery is switched
on. Each LED represents 20% of battery capacity.
Symbols:
All five LEDs will light up when the battery is fully
charged. The charge level for the activated
battery is also shown on the on-board computer.
If the battery level falls below 5%, all the LEDs on
the operating status and battery level indicator will
go out.
The battery level is still shown on the on-board
computer.
1
2
1
2
1
2
LED 1,2,3,4,5 Battery level
100…80%
79…60%
59…40%
39…20%
19…15%
5…0%
Figure 53: Battery level indicator
LED on LED off
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 55
Description
3.6 Technical data
3.6.1 Pedelec
3.6.2 Emissions
*The safety requirements as per Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive 2014/30/EU have been met. The pedelec and the
charger can be used in residential areas without restriction.
3.6.3 Bicycle lighting
3.6.4 BOSCH Purion on-board computer
3.6.5 Motor
3.6.5.1 BOSCH Active Line
3.6.5.2 BOSCH Active Line Plus
3.6.5.3 BOSCH Performance Line
Power output/system 250 W (0.25 kW)
Shut-off speed 25 km/h
Table 16: Pedelec technical data
A-weighted emission sound
pressure level
< 70 dB(A)
Total vibration level for the hands
and arms
<2.5m/s²
Highest effective value of
weighted acceleration for the
entire body
<0.5m/s²
Table 17: Emissions from the pedelec*
Voltage about 12 V
Maximum output
Front light 17.4 W
Rear light 0.6 W
Table 18: Bicycle lighting
Batteries 2 x 3 V CHR2016
Operating temperature -5 °C - +40 °C
Storage temperature 10 °C - +40 °C
Charging temperature 0 °C - + 40 °C
Protection class
(with USB cover closed)
IP54
Weight about 0.1 kg
Table 19: Technical data for BOSCH Purion on-board
computer (BUI215)
Maximum continuous power 250 W
Max. torque 40 Nm
Nominal voltage 36 V DC
Protection class IP54
Weight about 2.9 kg
Operating temperature -5… +40 °C
Storage temperature -10… +40 °C
Table 20: Technical data for BOSCH Active Line motor,
BDU310
Maximum continuous power 250 W
Max. torque 50 Nm
Nominal voltage 36 V DC
Protection class IP54
Weight about 3.2 kg
Operating temperature -5… +40 °C
Storage temperature -10… +40 °C
Table 21: Technical data for BOSCH Active Line Plus
motor, BDU350
Maximum continuous power 250 W
Max. torque 65 Nm
Nominal voltage 36 V DC
Protection class IP54
Weight 3.2 kg
Operating temperature -5… +40 °C
Storage temperature -10… +40 °C
Table 22: Technical data for BOSCH Performance Line
motor, BDU365
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 56
Description
3.6.5.4 BOSCH Performance Line CX
3.6.6 Rechargeable battery
3.6.6.1 BOSCH PowerPack 400
3.6.6.2 BOSCH PowerPack 500
3.6.6.3 BOSCH PowerTube 400
3.6.6.4 BOSCH PowerTube 500
3.6.6.5 BOSCH PowerTube 625
Maximum continuous power 250 W
Max. torque 85 Nm
Nominal voltage 36 V DC
Protection class IP54
Weight 3 kg
Operating temperature -5… +40 °C
Storage temperature -10… +40 °C
Table 23: Technical data for BOSCH Performance Line CX
motor, BDU450CX
Nominal voltage 36 V
Nominal capacity 11 Ah
Energy 400 Wh
Weight 2.5/ 2.6 kg
Protection class IP54
Operating temperature -5 °C… 40 °C
Storage temperature +10… +40 °C
Permitted charging temperature
range
0 °…40 °C
Table 24: Technical data for BOSCH PowerPack 400
battery, BBS265 and BBR265
Nominal voltage 36 V
Nominal capacity 13.4 Ah
Energy 500 Wh
Weight 2.6/ 2.7 kg
Protection class IP54
Operating temperature -5… +40 °C
Storage temperature +10… +40 °C
Permitted charging temperature
range
0… +40 °C
Table 25: Technical data for BOSCH PowerPack 500,
BBS275 and BBR275 batteries
Nominal voltage 36 V
Nominal capacity 11 Ah
Energy 400 Wh
Weight 2.9 kg
Protection class IP54
Operating temperature -5… +40 °C
Storage temperature +10… +40 °C
Permitted charging temperature
range
0… +40 °C
Table 26: Technical data for BOSCH PowerTube 400,
BBP282 and BBP283 vertical batteries
Nominal voltage 36 V
Nominal capacity 13.4 Ah
Energy 500 Wh
Weight 2.9 kg
Protection class IP54
Operating temperature -5… +40 °C
Storage temperature +10… +40 °C
Permitted charging temperature
range
0… + 40 °C
Table 27: Technical data for PowerTube 500, BBP280
horizontal and BBP281 vertical BOSCH batteries
Nominal voltage 36 V
Nominal capacity 16.7 Ah
Energy 625 Wh
Weight 3.5 kg
Protection class IP54
Operating temperature -5… +40 °C
Storage temperature +10… +40 °C
Permitted charging temperature
range
0… 40 °C
Table 28: Technical data for BOSCH PowerTube 625,
BBP282 and BBP283 vertical batteries
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 57
Description
3.6.7 Tightening torques
Model Tightening torque Screw
On-board computer
SC-E5003
Attachment screw 0.8 Nm 3 mm hex bit
Shifter
SHIMANO DEORE SL-M4100
Attachment screw 3 Nm 4 mm hex bit
SHIMANO DEORE SL-M5100
Attachment screw 3 Nm 4 mm hex bit
SHIMANO DEORE SL-M6100
Attachment screw 3 Nm 4 mm hex bit
SHIMANO DEORE XT SL-M8100
Attachment screw 3 Nm 4 mm hex bit
SHIMANO DEORE XT SL-M8130
Attachment screw 3 Nm 4 mm hex bit
SHIMANO SLX SL-M7100
Attachment screw 3 Nm 4 mm hex bit
SHIMANO XTR SL-M9100
Attachment screw 3 Nm 4 mm hex bit
Seat post operating lever
eightpins
Attachment screw
Bowden cable fastener
2.5 Nm
5Nm 4 mm hex bit
3 mm hex bit
Axle
Conventional axle nut 35…40 Nm*
SUNTOUR screw-on axle 12AH2
Axle
Securing screw 8…10 Nm
5…6 Nm 6 mm hex bit
5 mm hex bit
SUNTOUR screw-on axle 15AH2
Axle
Securing screw 8…10 Nm
5…6 Nm 6 mm hex bit
5 mm hex bit
Handlebars
Clamping screw, conventional 5…7 Nm*
Seat post
by.schulz, G1
M8 seat clamping screw
M5 fixing grub screws
20…24 Nm
3 Nm 2.5 mm hex bit
by.schulz, G2
M6 seat clamping screw
M5 fixing grub screws
12…14 Nm
3 Nm 2.5 mm hex bit
eightpins NGS2
Seat post axle
Slipper clutch
Valve cap
Postpin axle
Rear clamping screw (saddle)
M5 attachment screw for outer sleeve
8Nm
18 Nm
0.5 Nm
8Nm
8Nm
0.5 Nm
6 mm hex bit
3 mm hex bit
5 mm hex bit
5 mm hex bit
3 mm hex bit
3 mm hex bit
Table 29: Tightening torques and bits
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 58
Description
*if there is no other data on the component
eightpins H01
Seat post axle
Slipper clutch
Valve cap
Postpin axle
Rear clamping screw (saddle)
M5 attachment screw for outer sleeve
8Nm
18 Nm
0.5 Nm
8Nm
8Nm
0.5 Nm
6 mm hex bit
3 mm hex bit
5 mm hex bit
5 mm hex bit
3 mm hex bit
3 mm hex bit
LIMOTEC LimoDP
Seat post clamping screw
Saddle clamping screw
6…7 Nm
7…9 Nm
SUNTOUR suspension seat post
Seat clamping screw
M5 fixing grub screws 15…18 Nm
3 Nm 2.5 mm hex bit
Pedals
Pedal, conventional 33…35 Nm 15 mm spanner
Table 29: Tightening torques and bits
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 59
Transporting and storing
4 Transporting and storing
4.1 Weight and dimensions for
transportation
Weight and dimensions during transport
Type no.
Frame
Box dim.
[cm]
Weight**
[kg]
Shipping
weight
[kg]
22-15-1054
41###
44###
48###
54###
60###
22-15-1055
44###
48###
54###
60###
22-15-1058
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-15-1068
45###
50###
55###
60###
22-15-1081
45###
50###
55###
60###
22-15-1084
45###
50###
55###
60###
22-15-1085
45###
50###
55###
22-15-1086
45###
50###
55###
Table 30: Type number, model and pedelec type
22-15-4004
45###
50###
55###
60###
22-15-4006
45###
50###
55###
22-18-0006
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-0007
44###
48###
54###
60###
22-18-0008
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-0009
44###
48###
54###
60###
22-18-0010
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-0011
44###
48###
54###
60###
22-18-0012
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-0020
41###
44###
48###
54###
Type no.
Frame
Box dim.
[cm]
Weight**
[kg]
Shipping
weight
[kg]
Table 30: Type number, model and pedelec type
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 60
Transporting and storing
22-18-0024
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-0070
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-0071
44###
48###
54###
60###
22-18-0072
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-0073
44###
48###
54###
60###
22-18-0074
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-0075
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-0076
37###
41###
44###
48###
22-18-0077
37###
41###
44###
48###
Type no.
Frame
Box dim.
[cm]
Weight**
[kg]
Shipping
weight
[kg]
Table 30: Type number, model and pedelec type
22-18-0078
37###
41###
44###
48###
22-18-0079
37###
41###
44###
48###
22-18-0080
37###
41###
44###
48###
22-18-3001
40###
44###
48###
52###
56###
22-18-3002
40###
44###
48###
52###
22-18-3003
40###
44###
48###
22-18-3004
40###
44###
48###
22-18-3005
40###
44###
48###
22-18-3006
41###
44###
48###
51###
53###
22-18-3007
41###
44###
48###
51###
Type no.
Frame
Box dim.
[cm]
Weight**
[kg]
Shipping
weight
[kg]
Table 30: Type number, model and pedelec type
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 61
Transporting and storing
* Vehicle weight without battery
# Not yet available when the instructions were produced
4.2 Designated handles, lifting points
The box does not have any handles.
22-18-3008
40###
44###
48###
51###
53###
22-18-3009
41###
44###
48###
51###
22-18-3013 40 # # #
22-18-5002
44###
48###
54###
60###
22-18-5003
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-5004
44###
48###
54###
60###
22-18-5010
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-5015
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-5017
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-5025
41###
44###
48###
54###
Type no.
Frame
Box dim.
[cm]
Weight**
[kg]
Shipping
weight
[kg]
Table 30: Type number, model and pedelec type
22-18-5029
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-5031
41###
44###
48###
54###
22-18-5032
44###
48###
54###
60###
22-19-3001 44###
48###
22-19-3002 44###
48###
22-26-1001 32 # # #
22-26-1002 32###
37###
Type no.
Frame
Box dim.
[cm]
Weight**
[kg]
Shipping
weight
[kg]
Table 30: Type number, model and pedelec type
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 62
Transporting and storing
4.3 Transportation
4.3.1 Using the brake transport securing
system
Applicable for pedelec disc brakes only.
Insert the transport securing devices between
the brake linings.
Transport securing device is squeezed
between the two linings and prevents
undesired sustained braking which can cause
brake fluid to leak out.
Figure 54: Fastening the transport securing device
4.3.2 Transporting the pedelec
Bicycle rack systems which use the handlebars or
frame to hold the pedelec in an upside-down
position exert inadmissible forces on its
components during transportation. This can cause
the supporting parts to break.
Never use bicycle rack systems which use the
pedelec's handlebars or frame to hold it in an
upside-down position. The specialist dealer will
give a consultation on correct selection and
safe use of a rack system.
Take into account the weight of the ready-to-
use pedelec when transporting it.
Protect the electrical components and
connections on the pedelec from the weather
conditions with suitable protective covers.
Transport the battery in a dry, clean position
where it is protected from direct sunlight.
4.3.3 Shipping a pedelec
When shipping the pedelec, we recommend
that you have the specialist dealer place it in
proper packaging.
4.3.4 Transporting the battery
Batteries are subject to hazardous goods
regulations. Undamaged batteries may be
transported by private persons in road traffic.
Commercial transport requires compliance with
regulations concerning packaging, labelling and
the transportation of hazardous goods. Open
contacts must be covered and the battery
securely packaged.
4.3.5 Shipping the battery
The battery is considered a hazardous good and
only trained persons may pack and ship a battery.
Contact specialist dealer.
Crash caused by unintentional activation
There is a risk of injury if the drive system is
activated unintentionally.
Remove the battery.
Oil leak if no transport securing device
The brake securing device prevents the brakes
from being applied accidentally during
transportation or shipment. This could cause
irreparable damage to the brake system or an oil
leak, which will harm the environment.
Never push the brake lever when the wheel
has been dismounted.
Always use the transport securing system
when transporting or shipping.
CAUTION
!
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 63
Transporting and storing
4.4 Storing
Store pedelec, on-board computer, battery and
charger in a clean, dry place where they are
protected from sunlight. Do not store outdoors
to ensure a long service life.
Temperatures under -10 °C or over +40 °C must
generally be avoided.
Storage at about 10 °C to 20 °C is beneficial to a
long battery life.
Store pedelec, on-board computer, battery and
charger separately.
4.4.1 Break in operation
Remove the on-board computer from its mount
if the pedelec is not going to be used for up to
four weeks. Store the on-board computer away
safely in a dry environment at room
temperature.
If the pedelec is removed from service for
longer than four weeks, you need to prepare it
for a break in operation.
4.4.1.1 Preparing a break in operation
Remove the rechargeable battery from the
pedelec.
Charge battery to 30%–60%.
The pedelec needs to be cleaned with a damp
cloth and preserved with wax spray. Never wax
the friction surfaces of the brake.
Before longer periods without use, it is
recommended to have the specialist dealer carry
out an inspection and basic cleaning and apply
preservative agent.
4.4.1.2 Carrying out a break in operation
1Store the pedelec, battery and charger in a dry,
clean environment. We recommend storing
them in uninhabited rooms with smoke alarms.
Dry locations with an ambient temperature
between 10 °C and 20 °C are ideal.
2Recharge the on-board computer battery for at
least 1 hour every 3 months.
3Check the battery level after 6 months. If only
one LED on the battery level indicator lights up,
recharge the battery to between 30% and 60%.
Optimum pedelec storage
temperature +10… +20 °C
Table 31: Storage temperature for batteries and the pedelec
Notice
The battery discharges when not in use. This can
cause irreparable damage to the battery.
The battery must be recharged every
6 months.
The battery may become damaged if it is
connected permanently to the charger.
Never connect the battery to the charger
permanently.
The on-board computer battery discharges when
it is not in use. This can cause irreparable
damage to it.
Recharge the on-board computer battery for at
least 1 hour every 3 months.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 64
Assembly
5 Assembly
Assemble the pedelec in a clean, dry
environment.
The work environment temperature should be
between 15 °C and 25 °C.
The fitting stand used must be approved for a
maximum weight of least 30 kg.
5.1 Unpacking
The packaging material consists mainly of
cardboard and plastic film.
Dispose of the packaging in accordance with
the regulatory requirements (see Section 10).
Pedelecs are fully assembled in the factory for
test purposes and then dismantled for
transportation. The pedelec is 95% to 98% pre-
assembled.
Scope of delivery
5.2 Required tools
The following tools are required to assemble the
pedelec:
Risk of eye injury
Problems may arise if components are set
incorrectly. They may cause serious injuries to
the face.
Always wear safety glasses to protect eyes
when assembling pedelecs.
Crash and crushing hazard caused by
unintentional activation
There is a risk of injury if the drive system is
activated unintentionally.
Remove the battery.
WARNING
!
CAUTION
!
1 pre-assembled pedelec
1 front wheel
2 pedals
2 quick releases (optional)
1 charger
1 set of operating instructions on CD.
1 battery (supplied separately from the pedelec)
Knife
Ring spanners
8 mm, 9 mm, 10 mm, 13 mm, 14 mm and 15 mm
Torque wrench
Working range 5–40 Nm
by.Schulz handlebars:
TORX® bits: 4 mm, 5 mm and 6 mm
If not:
Hexagon bits: 4 mm, 5 mm and 6 mm
Hexagon socket spanner
2 mm, 2.5 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm, 6 mm and
8mm
Spline nut socket
T25
Cross-recess screwdriver
Slotted-head screwdriver
Table 32: Tools required for assembly
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 65
Assembly
5.3 Commissioning
Only trained specialist staff may perform initial
commissioning since initial commissioning of the
pedelec requires special tools and specialist
knowledge.
Experience has shown that a pedelec which has
not yet been sold is automatically handed to
customers as soon as it appears ready to ride.
It makes sense to prepare each pedelec so that
it is fully ready for use immediately after being
assembled.
The assembly report (see Section 11.2)
describes all safety-relevant inspections, tests
and maintenance tasks.
All assembly work must be completed to
ensure the pedelec is ready to ride.
Complete an assembly report to document
quality assurance (see Section 11.1).
5.3.1 Checking the battery
The battery must be checked before it is charged
for the first time.
Press the On-Off button (battery).
If none of the LEDs on the battery level
indicator light up, the battery may be damaged.
The battery may be fully charged if at least one,
but not all, of the LEDs on the battery level
indicator is lit up.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 66
Assembly
5.3.2 Preparing the battery
5.3.2.1 Retrofitting the PowerTube adapter
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
A PowerTube Adapter 400 or 500 needs to be
retrofitted to use a BOSCH PowerTube 625
battery.
1Use a TORX® T25 wrench to undo the screws
in the battery mount.
Figure 55: Undoing screws on battery mount
2Use a ratchet to remove the two 4 mm hexagon
screws in the PowerTube adapter. If you don't
have a ratchet, you can use a hexagonal key to
remove the screws.
Figure 56: Removing the 4 mm hexagon screws
3Use a ratchet to remove the two 4 mm hexagon
screws in the PowerTube adapter.
Figure 57: Removing hexagon screws
4Pull out the PowerTube adapter.
Figure 58: Pulling out the PowerTube adapter
5Use adapter plates to adjust the distance if
necessary.
.
Figure 59: Fitted adapter plates
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 67
Assembly
6Use a TORX® T25 wrench to fasten the screws
into the battery mount.
.
Figure 60: Fastening the battery mount
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 68
Assembly
5.3.2.2 Fit battery cover onto Bosch PowerTube 625 battery (horizontal)
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1Detach the upper interface (lock side) from the
BOSCH PowerTube 625 battery with a TORX®
T20 wrench.
Figure 61: Detaching the upper interface
2Screw the battery mounting plate to the
BOSCH the PowerTube 625 battery with
original BOSCH screws (M4 × 8 T20). In doing
so, ensure that the removal tab faces the front
of the battery.
Figure 62: Fitting the mounting plate
3Press to push the battery cover onto the
battery. In doing so, ensure that the battery
On-Off switch fits through its designated slot in
the cover.
The battery cover will lock into the fitting
grooves on the battery.
Figure 63: Pushing the battery cover onto battery
The battery can now be inserted into the frame.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 69
Assembly
5.3.2.3 Fit battery cover onto Bosch PowerTube 500 battery (horizontal)
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1Detach the upper interface (lock side) from the
BOSCH PowerTube 625 battery with a TORX®
T20 wrench.
Figure 64: Detaching the upper interface
2Fasten the PowerTube extension to the
BOSCH PowerTube 500 battery using the two
M4 x 8 T20 screws supplied. In doing so,
ensure that the closed side faces the front of
the battery (towards On-Off switch). The
smooth upper surface of the PowerTube
extension must face upwards, away from the
battery.
Figure 65: Fitting the PowerTube extension
3Screw the battery mounting plate onto the
PowerTube extension with original BOSCH
screws (M4 × 8 T20). To do so, use the
PowerTube extension screw plate as a counter
support. When positioning the extension,
ensure that the removal tab faces the front of
the battery.
Figure 66: Fastening the battery mounting plate
4Press to push the battery cover onto the
battery. In doing so, ensure that the battery
On-Off switch fits through its designated slot in
the cover.
The battery cover will lock into the fitting
grooves on the battery.
Figure 67: Pushing the battery cover onto battery
The battery can now be inserted into the frame.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 70
Assembly
5.3.3 Preparing the wheel
There is an arrow on the sides of the tyres with the
inscription ROTATION to show the direction of
rotation. The inscription says DRIVE on older
tyres. The rotation direction arrow indicates the
recommended direction of rotation. On road tyres,
the direction of rotation is mainly for optical
reasons.
Figure 68: Rotation direction arrow
The direction of rotation is much more important
on off-road terrain because the tread creates an
interlock with the ground. While the rear wheel
needs to transmit the drive forces, the front wheel
is responsible for transmitting braking and
steering forces. Drive and braking forces have
different directions of action. This is why some
tyres are mounted on the front and rear wheels in
opposite directions. On these tyres, there are two
rotation direction arrows:
• The FRONT rotation direction arrow indicates the
recommended direction of rotation for the front
wheel.
• The REAR rotation direction arrow indicates the
recommended direction of rotation for the rear
wheel.
Figure 69: Rotation direction arrow on MTB tyres
The rotation direction arrow must point in the
direction of travel when the wheel is placed in
the fork.
There are also non-directional tyre profiles with
no rotation direction arrow.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 71
Assembly
5.3.4 Installing the wheel in the SUNTOUR fork
Only applies to Suntour forks with this equipment
5.3.4.1 Screw-on axle (12AH2 and 15AH2)
Only applies to Suntour forks with this equipment
Before installing the wheel, ensure that the O-ring
is in the right position on the thread piece.
1Insert the front wheel into the fork ends.
2Insert the axle into the hub on the drive side.
Figure 70: Inserting the axle in the direction of the arrow
3Use a 6 mm hex key to tighten the axle using
between 8 and 10 Nm. The axle thread must
be visible.
Figure 71: Tighten the axle in the direction of the arrow
4Insert the securing screw on the non-drive
side.
Figure 72: Pushing the quick release lever into the axle
5Tighten the securing screw with a 5 mm hex
key using between 5 and 6 Nm.
Figure 73: Tightening the securing screw
The wheel is now fitted.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 72
Assembly
5.3.4.2 20 mm cross axle
Only applies to Suntour forks with this equipment
1Insert the cross axle into the hub on the drive
side.
Figure 74: Inserting the cross axle in the direction of the
arrow
2Tighten the cross axle with the red handle.
Figure 75: Tighten the axle in the direction of the arrow
3Push red lever into the cross axle.
Figure 76: Pushing the red lever in the direction of the
arrow
4Closing the quick release lever.
Figure 77: Pressing the quick release lever in the direction
of the arrow
The cross axle is secured.
Crash caused by loose quick release axle
A faulty or incorrectly installed cross axle may
become caught in the brake disc and block the
wheel. This will cause a crash.
Never fit a defective cross axle.
Crash caused by faulty or incorrectly
installed cross axle
The brake disc becomes very hot during
operation. Parts of the cross axle may become
damaged as a result. The cross axle becomes
loose. This will cause a crash with injuries.
The cross axle and the brake disc must be
opposite one another.
Crash caused by incorrectly set cross axle
Insufficient clamping force will result in
unfavourable transmission of force. The
suspension fork or the quick release axle may
break. This will cause a crash with injuries.
Never fasten the cross axle with a tool (e.g.
hammer or pliers).
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 73
Assembly
5Check the position and clamping force of the
quick release lever. The quick release lever
must be flush with the shock absorber.
Figure 78: Perfect position for the clamping lever
6Use 4 mm hexagon socket spanner to adjust
the clamping lever clamping force if required.
Figure 79: Adjusting the quick release clamping force
7Check the quick release lever position and
clamping force.
The wheel is now fitted.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 74
Assembly
5.3.4.3 Q-LOC quick release
Only applies to Suntour forks with this equipment
Before installing, ensure that the quick release
flange is extended. Open the lever fully.
Figure 80: Closed and opened flange
1Push in the quick release until you can hear a
click. Make sure that the flange is extended.
Figure 81: Inserting the quick release in the direction of
the arrow
2Adjust tensioning with half-open clamping
lever until the flange reaches the fork end.
Figure 82: Adjusting the clamping
3Fully close the quick release. Check that it is
firmly in place and adjust it on the flange if
necessary.
Figure 83: Closing the quick release
The wheel is now fitted.
Crash caused by unfastened quick release
A faulty or incorrectly installed quick release may
become caught in the brake disc and block the
wheel. This will cause a crash.
Never fit a defective quick release.
Crash caused by faulty or incorrectly
installed quick release
The brake disc becomes very hot during
operation. Parts of the quick release may become
damaged as a result. The quick release comes
loose. This will cause a crash with injuries.
The front wheel quick release lever and the
brake disc must be situated on opposite sides.
Crash caused by incorrectly set clamping
force
Excessively high clamping force will damage the
quick release and cause it to lose its function.
Insufficient clamping force will result in
unfavourable transmission of force. The
suspension fork or the quick release may break.
This will cause a crash with injuries.
Never fasten a quick release using a tool (e.g.
hammer or pliers).
Only use the clamping lever with the specified
set clamping force.
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 75
Assembly
5.3.5 Preparing the RockShox Reverb AXS seat post
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
5.3.5.1 Recharging the SRAM battery
1Remove battery cover from battery.
2Do not dispose of battery cover. Attach the
battery cover to the SRAM battery to protect
the battery contacts when the battery is not in
the charger or in the seat post.
3You will find instructions on charging,
maintaining and transporting in the SRAM
operating instructions for the battery and
charger at
www.sram.com/service.
5.3.5.2 Inserting the SRAM battery
1Insert fully charged battery into the seat post.
If the battery is properly inserted, the locking
mechanism will engage.
2Close battery compartment.
5.3.5.3 Pairing the system
All AXS systems have a master component which
is used to start and end the pairing session. The
RockShox AXS controller must be paired with the
seat post master component before use. Pairing
allows the RockShox AXS controller to transmit
actuation commands to the seat post.
Additional AXS systems can be combined to
create one AXS system. To combine AXS
systems, begin pairing with any one of the master
components.
The pairing process does not need to be repeated
when either battery is removed and/or replaced.
The pairing process must be repeated if any
components are replaced, added, or removed.
1Keep AXS button on the seat post held down.
The green LED will flash slowly.
2Release button.
The pairing session is ended automatically
after 30 seconds of inactivity.
3Keep AXS button on the remote control held
down.
The green LED will flash quickly.
4Release button.
5Press rocker switch on the controls.
Pairing is confirmed.
The green LED on the seat post will light up
continuously.
You will hear the motor.
6If the seat post does not respond, repeat
pairing process.
5.3.5.4 Ending pairing
1Keep AXS button on the seat post held down.
2Release to end pairing.
The green LED will stop flashing.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 76
Assembly
5.3.6 Preparing the LIMOTEC seat post
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1Use the seat height formula to calculate the
optimum seat post height for the length of
rider's leg:
Seat height (SH) = inner leg length (I) × 0.9
2Lower the seat post further into the seat tube
3The seat post Bowden cable must be tightened
in the frame up to the remote control to the
same length as the seat post was lowered.
4Trim the seat post Bowden cable on the
handlebars if necessary.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 77
Assembly
5.3.7 Fitting the pedals
The pedals have two different threads to ensure
they don’t come loose while the rider is pedalling.
• The pedal on the left facing the direction of travel
has a left-hand thread and is marked L.
• The pedal on the right facing the direction of travel
has a right-hand thread and is marked R.
The mark is either on the top end, the axle or the
pedal body.
Figure 84: Example of markings on pedals
1Coat threads in both pedals with waterproof
grease.
2Turn the pedal marked L anti-clockwise by
hand into the crank arm on the left as seen
when facing the direction of travel.
Figure 85: L-pedal in the left-hand crank arm
3Turn the pedal marked R anti-clockwise by
hand into the crank arm on the right as seen
when facing the direction of travel.
Figure 86: R-pedal in the right-hand crank arm
4Use a 15 mm spanner to fasten the left-hand
pedal thread in an anti-clockwise direction and
the right-hand pedal in a clockwise direction
with a torque between 33 Nm and 35 Nm.
LR
L
L
R
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 78
Assembly
5.3.8 Checking the stem and handlebars
5.3.8.1 Checking the connections
1Stand in front of the pedelec. Clamp the front
wheel between your legs. Grasp the handlebar
grips.
2Try to twist the handlebars against the
direction of the front wheel.
The stem must not move or twist.
3If the stem can be twisted, check fastening.
If the stem cannot be fastened, contact your
specialist dealer.
5.3.8.2 Checking stem is firmly in position
1Press full body weight on the handlebars.
The handlebars must not move downwards in
the fork.
Stem with clamping lever version I
2If the handlebars should move, increase the
lever tension in the clamping lever.
3Turn knurled nut in a clockwise direction with
the clamping lever open.
4Close clamping lever and check stem is firmly
in position again.
5If the handlebars cannot be fastened, contact
your specialist dealer.
Stem with clamping lever version II and stem
with screw
If the handlebars cannot be fastened, contact
your specialist dealer.
5.3.8.3 Checking the headset backlash
1Place the fingers of one hand on the upper
headset cup. Pull the front wheel brake with the
other hand and try to push the pedelec
backwards and forwards.
Keep in mind that there may be noticeable
backlash due to worn-out bearing bushes or
brake lining backlash in suspension forks and
disc brakes.
The headset cup halves must not move
towards one another.
2Set bearing clearance as per the stem repair
manual as quickly as possible as otherwise the
bearing will become damaged. Contact
specialist dealer.
5.4 Pedelec sale
Complete Pedelec pass on the operating
instructions envelope.
Note down the manufacturer and the number of
the battery key.
Adjust the pedelec to the rider; see Section
6.5.
Adjust the stand and shifter.
Brief operator or rider on all the pedelec’s
functions (see Section 6.3).
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 79
Operation
6 Operation
6.1 Risks and hazards
Injuries and fatalities caused by blind spots
Other road users, trucks, cars and pedestrians
often underestimate the speed of pedelecs.
Likewise, other road users frequently do not see
pedelecs. This may cause a crash with serious
injuries or even death.
Wear a helmet. The helmet must have a
reflective strip or a light in a clearly visible
colour.
Clothing should be retroreflective or as light as
possible. Fluorescent materials are also
suitable. High-visibility jackets and straps on
your upper body ensure even greater safety.
Always take a defensive approach to riding.
Avoid the blind spots of vehicles turning off the
road. Reduce speed as a precaution when
other road users turn right.
Injuries and death caused by riding
incorrectly
A pedelec is not a bicycle. Incorrect riding and
underestimated speeds soon result in hazardous
situations. This can cause an accident with serious
or fatal injuries.
Slowly get used to road traffic and speed
before riding at speeds over 12 km/h,
especially if you have not ridden a bike for
some time. Increase the levels of assistance
gradually.
Practice braking hard on a regular basis.
Take and complete a riding safety course.
WARNING
!
Injuries and death caused by distraction
A lack of concentration while riding increases the
risk of an accident. This may cause a crash with
serious injuries.
Never allow yourself to be distracted by the
on-board computer or your mobile phone.
Stop the pedelec if you want to make inputs on
the on-board computer other than change the
level of assistance. Only enter data when
stationary.
Crash caused by loose clothing
Shoe laces, scarves and other loose items may
become entangled in the spokes on the wheels
and on the chain drive. This may cause a crash
with injuries.
Wear sturdy footwear and close-fitting
clothing.
Crash caused by difficult-to-spot damage
If the pedelec topples over or you have a fall or an
accident, there may be difficult-to-spot damage to
components such as the brake system, quick
releases or frame. This may cause a crash with
injuries.
Take pedelec out of service. Contact specialist
dealer.
WARNING
!
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 80
Operation
Crash caused by material fatigue
Intensive use can cause material fatigue. A
component may suddenly fail in case of material
fatigue. This may cause a crash with injuries.
Remove the pedelec from service immediately
if there are any signs of material fatigue. Have
your specialist dealer inspect the component.
Arrange the mandatory maintenance
appointments with your specialist dealer on a
regular basis. During maintenance, the
specialist dealer will inspect the pedelec for
any signs of material fatigue on the frame,
fork, suspension element mountings (if there
are any) and components made of composite
materials.
Carbon becomes brittle when exposed to heat
radiation such as heating. This can cause the
carbon part to break and result in a crash with
injuries.
Never expose carbon parts on the pedelec to
strong sources of heat.
Crash caused by poor road conditions
Loose objects, such as branches and twigs, may
become caught in the wheels and cause a crash
with injuries.
Be aware of the road conditions.
Ride slowly and brake in good time.
The tyres may slip on wet roads. In wet conditions
you must also expect a longer braking distance.
The braking sensation differs from the usual
sensation. This can cause loss of control or a
crash, which may result in injuries.
Ride slowly and brake in good time when it is
raining.
CAUTION
!
Crash caused by soiling
Heavy soiling can impair pedelec functions, such
as braking. This may cause a crash with injuries.
Remove coarse soiling before riding.
Notice
Heat or direct sunlight can cause the tyre pressure
to increase above the permitted maximum
pressure. This can destroy the tyres.
Never park the pedelec in the sun.
On hot days, regularly check the tyre pressure
and adjust it as necessary.
When riding downhill, high speeds may be
reached. The pedelec is only designed to exceed
a speed of 25 km/h for short intervals. The tyres
in particular can fail if exposed to a continuous
load.
Use the brakes to decelerate the pedelec
if you reach speeds greater than 25 km/h.
Moisture penetrating at low temperatures may
impair individual functions due to the open
structural design.
Always keep the pedelec dry and free from
frost.
If the pedelec is used at temperatures below
3 °C, the specialist dealer must perform an
inspection beforehand and prepared it for
winter use.
Off-road riding subjects the joints in the arms to
severe strain. Take a break from riding every
30 to 90 minutes, depending on the road surface
and your physical fitness.
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 81
Operation
6.2 Tips for a greater range
The pedelec's range depends on many
influencing factors. A single battery charge may
only last fewer than 20 kilometres but much more
than 100 is also possible. There are a few tips
which will generally help you maximize range.
Suspension elements
Only open suspension fork and damper when
necessary on terrain or gravel paths. Block
suspension fork and damper on tarmacked
roads or on hills.
Mileage
The more own physical effort the rider makes, the
greater the attainable range is.
Shift down 1 to 2 gears to increase the induced
power and pedalling frequency.
Pedalling frequency
Ride using pedalling frequencies of over
50 revolutions per minute. This optimises the
electric drive's efficiency.
Avoid pedalling very slowly.
Weight
Minimise the total weight of pedelec and
baggage.
Stopping and starting
Ride long distances at a constant speed.
Avoid stopping and starting frequently.
Level of assistance
The higher the selected levels of assistance
are, the shorter the range is.
Gear shift
Use a low gear and a low level of assistance on
hills and when setting off.
Switch up a gear depending on the speed and
terrain.
50-80 crank rotations are optimal.
Avoid high stress loads on the crank during a
gear change.
Switch gear back in good time, e.g. before
inclines.
Tyres
Always select the right tyres for the surface
type. As a general rule, narrower treads move
along more easily than heavier ones. Long
studs and large grooves usually have an
unfavourable effect on energy consumption.
When riding on asphalt, it is important to
always use the maximum permitted tyre
pressure.
When riding off-road on gravel tracks or soft
woodland or meadow soils, it is important to
remember the lower the tyre pressure is, the
greater the rolling resistance is and thus the
greater electric drive system energy
consumption is.
Rechargeable battery
Electrical resistance increases as the temperature
drops. Battery performance is reduced. As a
result, you should expect the range to be shorter
than normal in winter.
Use a thermal protection sleeve on the battery
in winter.
The range also depends on the battery’s age,
charge level and state of repair.
Maintain the battery and replace older
batteries where necessary.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 82
Operation
6.3 Error message
6.3.1 On-board computer
The drive system monitors itself continuously and
displays a number as an error message if a known
error is detected. The system may switch off
automatically depending on the type of error.
Code Description Method of resolution
410 One or more on-board
computer buttons are
blocked
Check whether buttons
are jammed because dirt
has accumulated
between them, for
example.
Clean buttons if neces-
sary.
414 Connection problem
with the control panel
Contact your specialist
dealer. Have ports and
connections checked.
418 One or more buttons
on the control panel
are blocked
Check whether buttons
are jammed because dirt
has accumulated
between them, for
example.
Clean buttons if neces-
sary.
419 Configuration error 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
422 Battery connection
problem
Have ports and connec-
tions checked.
423 Battery connection
problem
Have ports and connec-
tions checked.
424 Communication error
with components
communicating with
one another
Have ports and connec-
tions checked.
426 Internal time-out error It is not possible to display or
adjust the tyre size in the
basic settings menu in this
error status.
1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
430 On-board computer
battery flat
Recharge on-board
computer battery (while
in its mount or using
USB port).
431 Software version error 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
Table 33: List of on-board computer error messages
440 Battery internal error 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
450 Internal software error 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
460 Error in USB port 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
490 On-board computer
internal error
Have on-board computer
checked.
500 Battery internal error 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
502 Fault in the lighting 1Check the light and its
cabling.
2Re-start the system.
3Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
503 Speed sensor error 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
504 Speed signal manipu-
lation detected
Check position of spike
magnets and re-adjust if
necessary.
Check for manipulation.
Assistance from drive
has been reduced.
503 Speed sensor error 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
510 Internal sensor error 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
511 Battery internal error 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
Code Description Method of resolution
Table 33: List of on-board computer error messages
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 83
Operation
530 Battery error 1Switch off system.
2Remove the battery.
3Re-insert battery.
4Restart electric drive
system.
5Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
531 Configuration error 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
540 Temperature error
The pedelec is outside
the permitted temper-
ature range.
1Switch off the system to
cool the motor and
battery down or warm
them to the permitted
temperature range.
2Re-start the system.
3Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
550 An inadmissible elec-
trical load has been
detected
1Remove consumer.
2Re-start the system.
3Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
580 Software version error 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
591 Authentication error 1Switch off system.
2Remove the battery.
3Re-insert battery.
4Re-start the system.
5Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
592 Incompatible compo-
nent 1Insert compatible on-
board computer.
2Re-start the system.
3Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
593 Configuration error 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
Code Description Method of resolution
Table 33: List of on-board computer error messages
595,
596 Communication error 1Check cabling to the
gears.
2Re-start the system.
3Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
602 Internal error during
charging 1Disconnect charger from
battery.
2Re-start the system.
3Connect charger to the
battery.
4Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
602 Internal fault 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
603 Internal fault 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
605 Temperature error
The pedelec is outside
the permitted temper-
ature range.
1Switch off the system to
cool the motor and
battery down or warm
them to the permitted
temperature range.
2Re-start the system.
3Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
605 Temperature error
during the charging
process
1Disconnect charger from
battery.
2Leave battery to cool
down.
3Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
606 External fault 1Check cabling.
2Re-start the system.
3Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
610 Voltage error 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
620 Charger error 1Replace charger.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
Code Description Method of resolution
Table 33: List of on-board computer error messages
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 84
Operation
640 Internal fault 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
655 Multiple battery error 1Switch off system.
2Remove the battery.
3Re-insert battery.
4Re-start the system.
5Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
656 Software version error Contact your specialist
dealer to install a soft-
ware update.
7xx Gear error Observe the gear shift
manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions.
800 Internal ABS error Contact your specialist
dealer.
810 Implausible signals
from the wheel speed
sensor
Contact your specialist
dealer.
820 Error in the line to the
front wheel speed
sensor
Contact your specialist
dealer.
821…
826 Implausible signals
from the front wheel
speed sensor.
Sensor disc is possibly
missing, defective or
incorrectly installed;
significantly different
tyre diameter between
the front wheel and
rear wheel; extreme
riding situation,
such as riding on the
rear wheel only
1Re-start the system.
2Take a test ride of at
least two minutes. The
ABS indicator lamp must
go out.
3Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
830 Error in the line to the
rear wheel speed
sensor
Contact your specialist
dealer.
831
833 …
835
Implausible signals
from the rear wheel
speed sensor.
Sensor disc may be
missing. It is defective
or incorrectly installed;
significantly different
tyre diameter between
the front wheel and
rear wheel; extreme
riding, such as riding
on the rear wheel only
1Re-start the system.
2Take a test ride of at
least two minutes. The
ABS indicator lamp must
go out.
3Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
840 Internal ABS error Contact your specialist
dealer.
850 Internal ABS error Contact your specialist
dealer.
Code Description Method of resolution
Table 33: List of on-board computer error messages
860,
861 Error in the power
supply 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
870,
871,
880
883 …
885
Communication error 1Re-start the system.
2Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
889 Internal ABS error Contact your specialist
dealer.
890 ABS indicator lamp is
defective or missing;
ABS possibly not func-
tioning
Contact your specialist
dealer.
No dis-
plays On-board computer
internal error
Re-start the drive system
by switching it on and off.
Code Description Method of resolution
Table 33: List of on-board computer error messages
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 85
Operation
6.3.2 Rechargeable battery
The battery is protected against deep discharge,
overcharging, overheating and short circuits by
Electronic Cell Protection (ECP). In the event of a
hazard, a protective circuit switches the battery off
automatically. If a fault is detected in the battery,
the LEDs flash on the battery level indicator.
Description Method of resolution
Code:
If the battery is outside its
charging temperature range,
three LEDs will flash on the
battery level indicator.
1Disconnect charger from
battery.
2Leave battery to cool
down.
3Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
Code:
If a fault is detected in the
battery, two LEDs flash on the
battery level indicator.
Contact your specialist
dealer.
Code:
No LEDs will flash if the charger
is defective and will not charge.
One or more LEDs will light up
permanently, depending on the
battery level.
Contact your specialist
dealer.
Code:
No LEDs will light up if there is
no power. 1Check all plug
connections.
2Check contacts on the
battery for dirt. Clean the
contacts carefully if
needed.
3Contact your specialist
dealer if the problem
persists.
Table 34: List of battery error messages
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 86
Operation
6.4 Instruction and customer service
The supplying specialist dealer will provide
customer service. Contact details can be found on
the pedelec pass for these operating instructions.
The specialist dealer will explain all the pedelec
functions to the new owner in person, this being
when the specialist dealer hands over the pedelec
at the latest. These operating instructions are
provided with every pedelec, so that the rider can
consult them at a later stage.
The supplying specialist dealer will also perform
all maintenance, modifications and repairs in the
future.
6.5 Adjusting the pedelec
Only a correctly adjusted pedelec will guarantee
the desired ride comfort and health-promoting
activity.
All settings must be re-configured if the body
weight or maximum baggage weight changes.
6.5.1 Preparing
The following tools are required to adjust the
pedelec:
Crash caused by incorrectly adjusted torques
If a screw is fastened too tightly, it may break. If a
screw is not fastened enough, it may loosen. This
will cause a crash with injuries.
Always observe the indicated torques on the
screw and in the operating instructions.
CAUTION
!
Tape measure
Scales
Spirit level
Ring spanners
8 mm, 9 mm, 10 mm, 13 mm, 14 mm and 15 mm
Torque wrench
Working range 5–40 Nm
Hex key
2 mm, 2.5 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm, 6 mm and
8mm
Cross-recess screwdriver
Slotted-head screwdriver
Table 35: Tools required for assembly
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 87
Operation
6.5.2 Pedelec adjustment procedure
Observe the correct order for adjustment.
For pedelecs with
components only
Sequence Adjustment Section
Rhomboid
seat post
Ergonomic handles
Suspension fork
Rear frame damper
Headlight
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Saddle
• Straighten saddle
• Adjust saddle height
• Adjust saddle position
• Adjust saddle tilt
6.5.4.1
6.5.4.2
6.5.4.10
6.5.4.11
2 Handlebars 6.5.5
3Stem 6.5.6
4 Handles 6.5.7 x
5Tyres 6.5.8
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
Brake
• Position of the brake handles
• Brake handle tilt angle
• Determine grip distance
• Adjust the grip distance
• Pressure point
• Retract the brake linings
6.5.9.1
6.5.9.2
6.5.9.3
6.5.9.4
6.5.9.4
6.5.9.6
7 Adjust suspension
- Adjust suspension fork sag 6.5.11 x
- Adjust the rear frame damper sag (optional) 6.5.12 x
- Adjust suspension fork rebound damper 6.5.13 x
- Adjust the rear frame damper rebound damper (optional) 6.5.14 x
- Adjust the rear frame damper compression damper (optional) 6.5.15 x
8 Light 6.5.16 x
9 Adjust on-board computer 6.5.15
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 88
Operation
6.5.3 Determining the sitting position
The starting point for a comfortable posture is the
correct position of the pelvis. If the pelvis is in the
wrong position, it can cause different types of
pain, e.g. in the shoulder or back.
Figure 87: The pelvis is in the right position (green) or
incorrect position (red)
The pelvis is in the right position if the spine forms
an S-shape and a natural, easy arch.
The pelvis is positioned incorrectly if it tilts slightly
backwards. As a result, the spine becomes curved
and can no longer deflect to an optimal extent.
A suitable sitting position must be selected
beforehand depending on the pedelec type,
physical fitness and desired trip distance or
speed.
It is especially advisable to check and optimise
the sitting position once more before longer rides.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 89
Operation
Position on roadster Position on city bike Position on trekking
bike
Position on sports
bike
Angle of upper body
(black dashed line)
Upright, almost vertical
posture,
back at an angle of
almost 90°.
Handlebars and handles
are very close to the
upper body.
Slightly inclined upper
body,
back at an angle of 60°–
70°.
Considerably inclined
upper body,
back at an angle of 30°–
60°.
Greater distance between
handlebars and saddle.
Sharply inclined upper
body,
back at an angle of 15°–
30°.
Saddle higher than the
handlebars.
Angle between upper
arm & upper body
(red line)
Extremely acute angle at
around 20°.
The upper arms are
almost parallel to the
upper body.
The hands are simply
placed loosely on the
handlebars.
An angle of 75°–80° is
optimum.
Many people prefer a
smaller angle of up to 60°
as it requires to less effort
to support the shoulders,
arms and hands.
An angle of 90° is
optimum.
The muscular support
required in the arms, back
and shoulder girdle is
reduced at 90°.
Above 90°
Shoulders, arms and
hands need to provide a
great deal of support, the
supporting muscles in the
back are heavily strained
and the load on the
bearing surface shifts to
the front.
Saddle-handlebar
height difference
(blue and green line)
>10
The handlebars are posi-
tioned far higher than the
saddle.
10…5
The handlebars are posi-
tioned higher than the
saddle.
5…0
Handlebars and saddle
are almost at the same
height.
<0
The saddle is positioned
far higher than the
handlebars.
Benefits
The spine is intuitively
moved into its natural S-
shape.
The strain on arms and
hands is very slight – no
effort required to support.
The upright position
provides a good over-
view in traffic.
Force can be applied to
the pedals when pedalling
without using much
energy.
Shoulders, neck and
hands provide more of
the support effort, thus
promoting a dynamic,
agile riding style. Impact
is reduced on the back,
spine and buttocks, which
is particularly important
on longer rides. The
whole body can apply
force to the pedals effec-
tively.
Optimum power transmis-
sion.
Aerodynamic: low air
resistance.
Disadvantages
Force is applied relatively
inefficiently to the pedals.
Weight rests exclusively
on the buttocks.
The spine slumps after a
short time for many
people (pelvic straight-
ening).
The arms are often
stretched through to the
high handlebars – this
leads to tense shoulders
and painful hands.
The spine tends to slump
quickly due to the “high
position”.
There is greater strain on
the hands, neck and
shoulders. The muscular
system needs to be
trained for this higher
strain, i.e. riders should
practise.
Requires highly trained
muscles in back, legs,
shoulders, abdomen!
Comfortable position only
for people who are fit.
Fitness level and use
Low fitness level, occa-
sional cyclists Medium fitness level, city
cyclists Medium to high fitness
level, riding long
distances
Speed-oriented, sports
cycling
Suitable pedelec types City bike
Folding bike City bike
Cargo bike Trekking bike Mountain bike
Racing bicycle
Table 36: Overview of sitting positions
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 90
Operation
6.5.4 Adjusting the saddle
6.5.4.1 Straightening the saddle
Position saddle in direction of travel. In doing
so, align the tip of the saddle with the top tube.
Figure 88: Positioning the saddle in direction of travel
Positioning the saddle with eightpins
suspension seat post
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1Position saddle in direction of travel. In doing
so, align the tip of the saddle with the top tube.
2Use a torque wrench to tighten the seat post
axle with 8 Nm.
Figure 89: Tightening the seat post axle
6.5.4.2 Adjusting the saddle height
To adjust the saddle height safely, either:
• Push the pedelec near to a wall so that the rider
can lean on the wall to support themselves or
• Ask another person to hold the pedelec.
1Use the seat height formula to roughly set the
saddle height:
Seat height (SH) = inner leg length (I) × 0.9
2Climb onto the bicycle.
3Place your heel on the pedal and extend your
leg, so that the pedal is at the lowest crank
rotation point. Your knee should now be fully
extended.
Figure 90: Heel method
4Take a test ride.
Riders should sit straight on the saddle at an
optimal saddle height.
• If the pelvis moves to the left and right as you
pedal, the saddle is too high.
• If your knees are painful after a few kilometres,
the saddle is too low.
Position the seat post according to needs if
necessary. Adjust the seat height with the
quick release.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 91
Operation
5Open the quick release on the seat post to
change the seat height (1). To do so, push the
clamping lever away from the seat post (3).
Figure 91: Opening the seat post quick release
6Set the seat post to the required height.
Figure 92: Detailed view of the seat post – examples of the
minimum insertion depth marking
7To close it, push the seat post clamping lever as
far as it will go into the seat post (2).
8Check the clamping force of the quick releases.
6.5.4.3 Setting the saddle height with the
remote control
Use the seat height formula to set the saddle
height:
Seat height (SH) = inner leg length (I) × 0.9
Lowering the saddle
1Sit on the saddle.
2Press the remote control operating lever.
The seat post will lower.
3Release the remote control operating lever
when you have reached the desired height.
Figure 93: Remote control operating lever (1)
Raising the saddle
1Remove any pressure from the saddle.
2Press the remote control operating lever.
The seat post will rise.
3Release the remote control operating lever
when you have reached the desired height.
Crash caused by an excessively high seat post
setting
A seat post which is set too high will cause the
seat post or the frame to break. This will cause a
crash with injuries.
Do not pull the seat post out of the frame
beyond the minimum insertion depth marking.
3
4
5
1
2
3
CAUTION
!
3
4
2
1
Notice
If you are unable to achieve the required saddle
height, the seat post must be lowered further into
the seat tube. The seat post Bowden cable must
be tightened in the frame up to the remote control
to the same length as the seat post was lowered.
If this is not possible, contact your specialist
dealer.
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 92
Operation
6.5.4.4 Adjusting the eightpins seat post
saddle height
1Press the seat post operating lever on the
handlebars.
The seat post’s internal hydraulic gas pressure
spring is fully extended.
Figure 94: Extending the hydraulic gas pressure spring
2Push the seat post height adjustment operating
lever forwards.
Height adjustment is now open.
3Adjust the seat height roughly by pressing
upwards or downwards and using the seat
height formula:
Seat height (SH) = inner leg length (I) × 0.9
The required seat height is reached.
Figure 95: Setting the seat post height
4Press the height adjustment operating lever
backwards.
If the operating lever should stick, pull the
saddle 1-2 mm upwards or move it downwards
1-2 mm. This will allow the height adjustment
toothing to mesh together again.
Figure 96: Tightening the seat post axle
6.5.4.5 Adjusting the saddle position
The saddle can be shifted on the saddle frame.
The right horizontal position ensures an optimal
leverage position for legs. This prevents knee
pain and painful incorrect pelvis positions. If you
have displaced the saddle more than 10 mm, you
need to adjust the saddle height again since both
settings affect one another.
The saddle setting must only be made when the
bicycle is stationary.
To set the saddle position, either:
• Push the pedelec near to a wall, so that the rider
can lean on the wall to support themselves or
• Ask another person to hold the pedelec.
Move the saddle within its permitted
displacement range only (marked on the saddle
stay).
1Climb onto the pedelec.
2Place the pedals into the vertical position with
your feet.
The rider has adopted the optimal saddle
position if the perpendicular linefrom the
kneecap runs through the pedal axle.
If the perpendicular line crosses behind the
pedal, bring the saddle further forward.
If the perpendicular line crosses in front of the
pedal, bring the saddle further back.
Figure 97: Knee cap perpendicular line
Notice
The height adjustment operation lever must be
placed in blocked mode, in the rear position on
the limit stop, while riding.
90°
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 93
Operation
3Unfasten and adjust the designated screw
connections, and clamp them with the
maximum tightening torque for the clamping
screws of the handlebars.
6.5.4.6 Adjust saddle tilt
The saddle tilt must be adjusted to the seat height,
the saddle and handlebar position, and the saddle
shape to ensure an optimum fit. The seating
position can be optimised in this way if needed.
The saddle prevents the rider from slipping
backwards or forwards when placed in a
horizontal position. This avoids seat problems. In
any other position, the tip of the saddle may press
uncomfortably into the crotch area. It is also
recommended that the centre of the saddle is
exactly straight. This ensures that the rider is
seated with their sit bones on the wide rear part of
the saddle.
1Adjust the saddle tilt to horizontal.
2Position saddle middle so that it is completely
straight.
Figure 98: Horizontal saddle tilt with 0° tilt in the centre of
the saddle
The rider is sitting comfortably on the saddle
and does not slip backwards or forwards.
3If the rider tends to slip forwards on the narrow
part of the saddle, adjust the seat position (see
Section 6.6.2.3) or tilt the saddle very slightly
backwards.
6.5.4.7 Checking saddle stability
Check saddle stability after adjusting it; see
Section 7.5.6.
6.5.4.8 eightpins H01 seat post saddle tilt
The saddle prevents the rider from slipping
backwards or forwards when placed in a
horizontal position. This avoids seat problems. In
any other position, the tip of the saddle may press
uncomfortably into the crotch area. It is also
recommended that the centre of the saddle is
exactly straight. This ensures that the rider is
seated with their sit bones on the wide rear part of
the saddle.
1Loosen the rear attachment screw on the seat
post head with a 5 mm Allen key.
Figure 99: Loosening the rear screw
2Adjust saddle tilt by turning the front seat
clamping screw.
3Tighten the rear screw with a torque wrench
and a maximum torque of 8 Nm.
Figure 100: Securing the front and rear screws
0°
Notice
Never tighten the screw on the seat post head
with more than the stipulated torque of 8 Nm as it
could break the seat post.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 94
Operation
6.5.4.9 eightpins NGS2 seat post saddle tilt
The saddle prevents the rider from slipping
backwards or forwards when placed in a
horizontal position. This avoids seat problems. In
any other position, the tip of the saddle may press
uncomfortably into the crotch area. It is also
recommended that the centre of the saddle is
exactly straight. This ensures that the rider is
seated with their sit bones on the wide rear part of
the saddle.
1Loosen the rear attachment screw on the seat
post head with a 5 mm Allen key.
Figure 101: Loosening the rear screw
2Use the setting wheel to turn the saddle tilt until
the tilt is suitable.
If you turn it clockwise, the tip of the saddle tilts
upwards.
If you turn it anti-clockwise, the tip of the
saddle tilts upwards.
Tighten the rear clamping screw with a 5 mm
torque wrench and a maximum torque of 8 Nm.
Figure 102: Adjusting the saddle tilt with the setting wheel
Notice
Never tighten the screw on the seat post head
with more than the stipulated torque of 8 Nm. as
it could break the seat post.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 95
Operation
6.5.4.10 Adjusting the saddle position
The saddle can be shifted on the saddle frame.
The right horizontal position ensures an optimal
leverage position for legs. This prevents knee
pain and painful incorrect pelvis positions. If you
have displaced the saddle more than 10 mm, you
need to adjust the saddle height again since both
settings affect one another.
The saddle setting must only be made when the
bicycle is stationary.
To set the saddle position, either:
• Push the pedelec near to a wall so that the rider
can lean on the wall to support themselves or
• Ask another person to hold the pedelec.
Move the saddle within its permitted
displacement range only (marked on the saddle
stay).
1Climb onto the pedelec.
2Place the pedals into the vertical position with
your feet.
Riders are adopting the optimal saddle position
if the perpendicular line from the kneecap runs
through the pedal axle.
If the perpendicular line crosses behind the
pedal, bring the saddle further forward.
If the perpendicular line crosses in front of the
pedal, bring the saddle further back.
Figure 103: Knee cap perpendicular line
3Unfasten and adjust the designated screw
connections, and clamp them with the
maximum tightening torque for the saddle
clamping screws.
6.5.4.11 Adjusting the saddle tilt
The saddle tilt must be adjusted to the seat height,
the saddle and handlebar position, and the saddle
shape to ensure an optimum fit. The seating
position can be optimised in this way if needed.
The saddle placed in a horizontal position
prevents the rider from slipping backwards or
forwards. This avoids seat problems. In any other
position, the tip of the saddle may press
uncomfortably into the crotch area. It is also
recommended that the centre of the saddle is
exactly straight. This ensures that the rider is
seated with their sit bones on the wide rear part of
the saddle.
1Adjust the saddle tilt to horizontal.
2Position saddle middle so that it is completely
straight.
Figure 104: Horizontal saddle tilt with 0° tilt in the centre
of the saddle
Riders sit comfortably on the saddle and do not
slip backwards or forwards.
3If the rider tends to slip forwards or sit on the
narrow part of the saddle, adjust the seat
position (see Section 6.6.2.3) or tilt the saddle
very slightly backwards.
6.5.4.12 Checking saddle stability
Check saddle stability after adjusting it; see
Section 7.5.6.
90°
0°
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 96
Operation
6.5.4.13 ROCKSHOX Reverb AXS saddle tilt
The saddle prevents the rider from slipping
backwards or forwards when placed in a
horizontal position. This avoids seat problems. In
any other position, the tip of the saddle may press
uncomfortably into the crotch area. It is also
recommended that the centre of the saddle is
exactly straight. This ensures that the rider is
seated with their sit bones on the wide rear part of
the saddle.
1Open the tilt adjustment screw anti-clockwise.
2Adjust saddle tilt as required.
3Tighten the seat clamping screw in a clockwise
direction with a maximum of 12 Nm.
4Tighten the tilt adjustment screw in a clockwise
direction.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 97
Operation
6.5.4.14 eightpins NGS2 seat post saddle tilt
The saddle prevents the rider from slipping
backwards or forwards when placed in a
horizontal position. This avoids seat problems. In
any other position, the tip of the saddle may press
uncomfortably into the crotch area. It is also
recommended that the centre of the saddle is
exactly straight. This ensures that the rider is
seated with their sit bones on the wide rear part of
the saddle.
1Loosen the rear attachment screw on the seat
post head with a 5 mm Allen key.
Figure 105: Loosening the rear screw
2Use the setting wheel to turn the saddle tilt until
the tilt is suitable.
If you turn it clockwise, the tip of the saddle tilts
upwards.
If you turn it anti-clockwise, the tip of the
saddle tilts upwards.
Tighten the rear clamping screw with a 5 mm
torque wrench and a maximum torque of 8 Nm.
Figure 106: Adjusting the saddle tilt with the setting wheel
Notice
Never tighten the screw on the seat post head
with more than the stipulated torque of 8 Nm. as
it could break the seat post.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 98
Operation
6.5.5 Handlebars
Check handlebar width and hand position.
Choose different handlebars if necessary.
Contact specialist dealer.
6.5.5.1 Handlebar width
The handlebar width should be as wide as the
rider's shoulders as a minimum. This is measured
from mid-point to mid-point on the hand contact
surfaces.
Figure 107: Determining the optimal handlebar width
The wider the handlebars are, the more control
they provide, although wide handlebars require
greater supporting force. Wider handlebars are
particularly useful to ensure a safer ride for loaded
touring bikes.
6.5.5.2 Hand position
The hand is an optimal position on the handlebars
when the forearm and hand are in a straight line,
i.e. the wrist is not bent. In this way, the nerves are
not pinched and do not cause pain.
Figure 108: Distribution of nerves with curved and
straight handlebars
The narrower the shoulders are, the greater the
bend of the handlebars should be (maximum 28°).
Straight handlebars are advisable for sports bikes
(e.g. MTB). They support direct steering
behaviour, but lead to peaks in pressure and
greater muscular strain on the arm and shoulder
muscles.
6.5.5.3 Adjusting the handlebars
The handlebars and their position determine the
posture that the rider adopts on the pedelec.
1After selecting the seating position (see
Section 6.6.2.1), determine the angle of the
upper body and of the upper arm.
2Pre-tension the back muscles when adjusting
the handlebars. The only way to stabilise the
spine and protect it from excessive strain is
with the back and abdominal muscles pre-
tensioned. Passive muscles are not able to
perform this important task.
3Set the required handlebar position by
adjusting the stem height and angle (see
Section 6.6.6).
4After adjusting the handlebars, check the
saddle height and seat position again. The
position of the pelvis on the saddle may have
changed when the handlebars were adjusted.
This can have considerable impact on the
position of the hip joint due to the pelvis tilting
and may change the usable leg length on the
saddle support by up to 3 cm.
5Correct the saddle height and sitting posture if
necessary.
28°
_
9
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 99
Operation
6.5.6 Stem
6.5.6.1 Adjusting the handlebar height with
quick release
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1Open the stem clamping lever.
Figure 109: Open (2) and closed (1) stem clamping lever;
All Up used as an example
Figure 110: Pulling the locking lever upwards; All Up used
as an example
2Pull out the handlebars to the required height.
Observe minimum insertion depth.
3Close the stem clamping lever.
Adjusting the quick release clamping force
If the handlebar clamping lever stops before
reaching its end position, unscrew the knurled nut.
Tighten the knurled nut on the seat post if the
seat post clamping lever's clamping force is not
effective enough.
Contact your specialist dealer if the clamping
force cannot be set.
1
2
Crash caused by incorrectly set clamping
force
Applying excessive clamping force damages the
quick release. Insufficient clamping force will
result in unfavourable transmission of force. This
can cause components to break. This will cause a
crash with injuries.
Never fasten a quick release using a tool (e.g.
hammer or pliers).
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 100
Operation
6.5.6.2 Setting the quill stem
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
In the case of a quill stem, the stem and fork
steerer form a permanently interconnected
component, which is clamped in the fork steerer.
The stem and shaft must be replaced together.
Figure 111: Adjusting the quill stem height
1Undo screw.
2Pull quill stem out.
3Tighten screw.
6.5.6.3 Adjusting the Ahead stem
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
In the case of an Ahead stem, the stem is placed
directly on the fork steerer, which protrudes over
the frame.
Figure 112: Raising the Ahead stem by fitting spacer rings
The handlebar height is adjusted once during
production using spacer rings. The part of the fork
steerer protruding is then cut off. The handlebar
stem can then no longer be raised.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 101
Operation
6.5.6.4 Adjusting the angle-adjustable stem
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Angle-adjustable stems are available in different
lengths for quill and Ahead stems.
Figure 113: Different versions of angle-adjustable stems
Adjusting the stem angle (c) changes both the
distance from the upper body to the handlebars
(b) and the handlebar height (a).
Figure 114: City bike (blue) and trekking bike position
(red) by changing the angle
a
a
b
b
c
c
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 102
Operation
6.5.7 Ergonomic handles
In the case of ergonomically shaped handles, the
palm rests on the anatomically shaped handle. A
greater contact surface means that the pressure is
more evenly distributed. Nerves and vessels are
no longer squeezed in the carpal tunnel.
Figure 115: Correct (1) and incorrect (2) position of the
handle
1Undo the handle screw.
2Turn handle into the right position.
3Tighten the screw.
6.5.7.1 Checking handlebar stability
See Section 7.5.5.
12
9_
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 103
Operation
6.5.8 Tyres
It is not possible to offer a general recommended
tyre pressure for a particular pedelec or tyre. The
correct tyre pressure largely depends on the
weight load on the tyres, mainly determined by
body weight and baggage.
Unlike cars, the weight of the vehicle has only a
small impact on the total weight. Moreover, the
personal preferences for low rolling resistance or
a high degree of suspension comfort vary a great
deal. It is important to remember that
• the higher the tyre pressure is, the lower the wear,
rolling resistance and the risk of breakdown are.
• The lower the pressure in the tyre is, the greater
the comfort and grip that the tyre offers is.
In the case of pedelecs used on the road, the rule
is the greater the tyre pressure is, the lower the
tyre rolling resistance is. The risk of breakdown is
also lower when the pressure is high.
A permanently excessively low tyre pressure
often leads to premature wear in the tyre.
Cracking in the side wall is a typical consequence
of very low tyre pressure. Abrasion is also
unnecessarily high.
On the other hand, a tyre can absorb road impacts
more effectively at a low pressure.
As a general rule, wide tyres are operated at a
lower tyre pressure. They provide the option of
exploiting the advantages of the lower tyre
pressure without the serious disadvantages it
causes with regard to wear, rolling resistance and
breakdown protection.
Never exceed or go below the minimum and
maximum pressure limits indicated on the tyre.
1Pump the tyre to the recommended tyre
pressure.
2Perform a visual check on tyres.
Figure 116: Correct tyre pressure. The tyre is barely
deformed under the load of the body weight
Figure 117: Much too little tyre pressure
Tyre width
Tyre pressure in bar for body
weight
about
60 kg
about
80 kg
about
110 kg
25 mm 6.0 7.0 8.0
28 mm 5.5 6.5 7.5
32 mm 4.5 5.5 6.5
37 mm 4.0 5.0 6.0
40 mm 3.5 4.5 6.0
47 mm 3.0 4.0 5.0
50 mm 2.5 4.0 5.0
55 mm 2.0 3.0 4.0
60 mm 2.0 3.0 4.0
Table 37: Recommended tyre pressure for Schwalbe
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 104
Operation
6.5.9 Brake
The brake lever grip distance can be adjusted to
ensure that it can be reached more easily. The
pressure point can also be adjusted to the rider's
preferences.
6.5.9.1 Brake handle position
Having the brake handle in the correct position
prevents the rider from stretching their wrist too
far. Moreover, the brake can also be operated
without any discomfort and without changing the
handle position or releasing the handle.
Apply the brake lever with the third finger phalanx
to brake gently in bursts.
The setting for the middle finger is used for riders
who brake with their middle finger or with two
fingers.
1Position your hand on the handle in such a way
that the outer heel of the hand is flush with the
end of the handlebar.
2Extend the index finger (about 15°).
Figure 118: Brake handle position
3Push brake lever outwards until the third finger
phalanx sits in the brake lever recessed grip.
6.5.9.2 Brake handle tilt angle
The nerves that pass through the carpal tunnel
are connected to the thumb and the index and
middle fingers. An excessively steep or
excessively flat brake angle will cause the wrist to
bend, thus narrowing the carpal tunnel. This can
cause numbness and tingling in the thumb and
index and middle fingers.
1Calculate the difference between the height of
the handlebars and the saddle height to
determine the saddle-handlebar height
difference.
Figure 119: Example of 4 different handlebar heights (A,
B, C and D) and the saddle height (E)
Adjust the angle of the brake levers so that they
form a natural extension of the forearm.
15°
Calculation Saddle-handlebar height
difference [mm]
A – E >10
B – E 0…10
C – E0 …-10
D – E <-10
Table 38: Examples of saddle-handlebar height difference
A
B
C
D
E
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 105
Operation
2Set the brake lever angle as indicated in the
table.
Figure 120: Brake angle
6.5.9.3 Determining the grip distance
1Measure hand size using the grip distance
gauge.
2Adjust the grip distance at the pressure point
based on the hand size.
Figure 121: Brake lever position
Saddle-handlebar height
difference (mm) Brake angle
>10 20°…25°
0…10 25°…30°
0…-10 30°…35°
< -10 35°…45°
Hand size Grip distance (cm)
S2
M3
L4
20 – 25° > 10 cm
25 – 30° 0 – 10 cm
30 – 35° 0 – 10 cm
35 – 45° > 10 cm
E
321
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 106
Operation
6.5.9.4 Grip distance on a SHIMANO ST-EF41 brake lever
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
The brake lever position can be adjusted to the
rider's requirements. Such adjustment does not
affect the pressure point or the position of the
brake linings.
Turn setting screw anti-clockwise towards
minus (–).
The brake lever moves closer to the handlebar
grip.
Turn setting screw clockwise towards plus (+).
The brake lever moves away from the
handlebar grip.
Figure 122: Setting screw position (1)
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 107
Operation
6.5.9.5 Grip distance on a SHIMANO ST-EF41 brake lever
Only applies to pedelecs with brakes:
BL-M4100
BL-M7100
BL-M8100
BL-MT200
BL-MT201
BL-MT400
BL-MT401
BL-MT402
BL-T6000
GRX ST-RX600
M7100
M8100
RS785
The brake lever position can be adjusted to the
rider's requirements. Contact your specialist
dealer.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 108
Operation
6.5.9.6 Retracting the brake linings
Disc brakes require wearing-in time. The braking
force increases over time. The braking force is
increased during break-in time. This is also the case
when the brake pads or brake discs are replaced.
1Accelerate pedelec to 25 km/h.
2Brake pedelec until it comes to a halt.
3Repeat process 30 to 50 times.
The disc brake is retracted and provides optimal
braking power.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 109
Operation
6.5.10 Suspension
A pedelec’s fork suspension and rear frame
damper suspension can be adjusted to the rider's
weight in up to six increments, depending on the
suspension system.
Follow the the correct order for adjustment.
6.5.11 Fork sag
Settings on the chassis change riding
performance significantly. The rider needs to get
used to the pedelec and break it in to prevent
accidents.
The sag depends on the position and rider’s
weight and should be between 10% and 30% of
the maximum fork deflection, depending on
preferences and on how the pedelec is used.
Greater sag (20%…30%)
A greater sag increases sensitivity to bumps, thus
producing greater suspension motion. A greater
sensitivity to bumps ensures more comfortable
ride performance and is used on bicycles with a
longer deflection.
Decreased sag (10%...20%)
A decreased sag reduces sensitivity to bumps,
thus producing less suspension motion. A lower
sensitivity to bumps ensures a firmer, more
efficient ride and is generally used on bicycles
with a longer deflection.
The adjustment shown here represents a basic
setting. The rider should change the basic setting
to suit the surface and their preferences.
It is advisable to make a note of the basic settings.
These can then be used as a starting point for
subsequent optimised settings and as a
safeguard against unintentional changes.
For pedelecs with components only
Sequence Adjustment Section Suspension fork Rear frame
damper
1 Adjust the suspension fork sag 6.3.13 x
2 Adjust the rear frame damper sag 6.3.14 x
3 Adjust suspension fork rebound damper 6.3.15 x
4 Adjust rear frame damper rebound damper 6.3.16 x
5 Adjust the rear frame damper compression adjuster 6.3.17 x
6 The fork compression adjuster is adjusted to the terrain
while riding. 6.11 x
Table 39: Order for adjusting the suspension
Crash caused by incorrectly set suspension
If the suspension is set incorrectly, the fork may
become damaged, meaning problems may occur
when steering. This will cause a crash with
injuries.
Never ride the bicycle without air in the air
suspension fork.
Never use the pedelec without adjusting the
suspension fork to the rider’s weight.
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 110
Operation
6.5.11.1 Adjusting the Suntour fork steel suspension
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1You will find the sag setting wheel (1) beneath
the plastic cover on the crown. Remove the
plastic cover.
Figure 123: Sag setting wheel (1) on the suspension fork crown
Turn the sag setting wheel clockwise to
increase the spring pre-tensioning.
Turn the sag setting wheel anti-clockwise to
decrease the spring pre-tensioning.
You will have made the ideal setting when the
shock absorber deflects 3 mm when subject to
body weight.
3Replace the plastic cover on the crown after
making the setting.
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 111
Operation
6.5.11.2 Adjusting the Suntour fork air suspension
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
The air valve is located beneath the air valve
cap on the crown. Twist off the air valve cap.
Figure 124: Screw caps in different designs
1Attach a high-pressure damper pump to the air
valve.
2Pump air suspension fork to the required
pressure. Observe the levels in the Suntour
filling pressure table. Never exceed the
recommended maximum tyre pressure.
3Detach high-pressure damper pump.
4Measure the distance between the crown and
the dust seal. This distance is total deflection of
the fork.
5Push a cable tie attached temporarily
downwards against the dust seal.
6Put on your normal cycling clothing, including
baggage.
7Sit on the pedelec in your usual riding position
and support yourself against an object, such as
a wall or tree.
8Get off the pedelec without allowing it to
deflect.
9Measure distance between the dust seal and
the cable tie.
This measurement is the sag. The
recommended value is between 15% (hard)
and 30% (soft) of the total fork deflection.
10 Increase or reduce air pressure until you have
reached the desired sag.
11 If the sag is correct, turn the air valve cap
clockwise.
12 If you are unable to achieve the required sag,
an internal adjustment may be needed.
Contact specialist dealer.
Recommended air pressure (psi)
Body weight AION35
Mobie 45
Axon34
XCR34
XCR32
Mobie 45 NCX XCR24 XCM-Jr.
<55 kg 35…50 40…55 40…55 40…55 40…55 40…55
55…65 kg 50…60 55…65 55…65 55…65 – –
65…75 kg 60…70 65…75 65…75 65…75 – –
85…95 kg 85…100 85…100 85…100 85…95 – –
> 100 kg +105 +100 +100 +100 – –
Maximum air
pressure 120 145 130 180 100 100
Table 40: Suntour filling pressure table for air forks
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 112
Operation
6.5.11.3 ROCKSHOX Paragon Silver coil spring
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1Put on your normal cycling clothing, including
baggage. Ask someone to hold the bicycle.
Stand on the pedals while wearing cycling
clothing. Allow the damper to deflect three
times. Sit or stand on the bicycle in a normal
riding position.
2Ask your helper to push the O-ring downwards
until it reaches the top of the dust wiper seal.
Figure 125: Moving the O-ring on the suspension fork
3Get off the pedelec without allowing it to
deflect.
4Note distance between dust wiper and the O-
ring. This distance is the sag.
Figure 126: Sag (1)
5Check the sag.
Figure 127: Mandatory sag range (green) and prohibited
sag range (red)
6If the desired sag is not achieved, the spring
preload must be adjusted internally and/or the
coil spring replaced. Contact specialist dealer.
1
Setting Sag
Prohibited >30%
High sensitivity 20–30%
Low sensitivity 10–20%
Prohibited <10
Table 41: Recommended sag
Adjusting preload internally
Only your specialist dealer may make an
internal adjustment to the preload.
Preloading the coil spring on ROCKSHOX
Paragon forks is an internal adjustment that
compresses or decompresses the spring without
changing the deflection.
The coil spring can be preloaded 5 mm or 10 mm
using the internal preload spacer.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 113
Operation
7Take off the cover cap to remove or reposition
the preload spacer.
On a new vehicle, the 5-mm preload position of
the preload spacer is positioned as
standard (1).
.
Figure 128: Screwing and unscrewing the preload
adjustment ring
Remove the preload spacer to reduce the
preload and increase the sag (2).
Move the preload spacer to the 10-mm preload
position to increase preload and reduce the
sag (3).
Figure 129: Screwing and unscrewing the preload
adjustment ring
8Check the sag.
1
23
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 114
Operation
6.5.11.4 Adjusting the RockShox coil spring with an external preload adjuster
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1Turn the preload adjustment ring anti-
clockwise until it locks into position
anticlockwise.
The lowest, i.e. softest spring preload is set.
Figure 130: Screwing (1) and unscrewing (2) the preload
adjustment ring.
2Put on normal cycling clothing. Ask someone
to hold the bicycle.
3Stand on the pedals. Allow the damper to
deflect three times. Sit or stand on the bicycle
in a normal riding position.
4Ask your helper to push the O-ring downwards
until it reaches the top of the dust wiper seal.
Figure 131: Moving the O-ring on the suspension fork
5Get off the pedelec without allowing it to
deflect.
6Note distance between dust wiper and the O-
ring. This distance is the sag.
Figure 132: Sag (1)
7If the desired sag is not achieved, the preload
adjustment ring must be unscrewed bit by bit.
12
Setting Sag
Prohibited >30%
High sensitivity 20–30%
Low sensitivity 10–20%
Prohibited <10
Table 42: Recommended sag
Figure 133: Mandatory sag range (green) and prohibited
sag range (red)
8The coil spring must be replaced if the desired
sag cannot be achieved by twisting the preload
adjustment ring. Contact your specialist dealer.
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 115
Operation
6.5.11.5 Adjusting the ROCKSHOX fork coil spring with spacer for pre-tensioning
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1Put on normal cycling clothing (including
baggage).
2Ask someone to hold the bicycle.
3Stand on the pedals. Allow the damper to
deflect three times. Sit or stand on the pedelec
in a normal riding position.
4Ask your helper to push the O-ring downwards
until it reaches the top of the dust wiper seal.
Figure 134: Moving the O-ring on the suspension fork
5Get off the pedelec without allowing it to
deflect.
6Note distance between dust wiper and the O-
ring. This distance is the sag.
Figure 135: Sag (1)
7Check the sag.
8If the desired sag is not achieved, the spring
preload must be adjusted internally and/or the
coil spring replaced. Contact specialist dealer.
1
Setting Sag
Prohibited >30%
High sensitivity 20–30%
Low sensitivity 10–20%
Prohibited <10
Table 43: Recommended sag
Figure 136: Mandatory sag range (green) and prohibited
sag range (red)
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 116
Operation
9 Adjusting preload internally
Only your specialist dealer may make an
internal adjustment to the preload.
Preload spacers compress or decompress the
spring without changing deflection.
Figure 137: Screwing and unscrewing the preload
adjustment ring
The coil spring can be preloaded with the
maximum number of preload spacers specified for
the fork model in question.
The coil spring can be preloaded with the
maximum number of preload spacers specified for
the fork model in question.
Remove spacers to reduce preload and
increase the sag.
Fit spacers to increase preload and decrease
sag.
You will find instructions on adjusting the preload
internally in the RockShox maintenance
instructions.
10 Check the sag.
The spring preload setting can be used to finely
adjust the sag; However, the preload does not
change spring stiffness and is not suitable to
substitute the correct compression spring rate.
If the desired sag is not achieved with the
maximum number of spacers, you must
replace the coil spring with a harder spring.
If the desired sag cannot be achieved without
a preload spacer, you must replace the coil
spring with a softer spring.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 117
Operation
6.5.12 Adjust the rear frame damper sag
Settings on the chassis change ride performance
significantly. The rider needs to get used to the
pedelec and break it in to prevent accidents.
Greater sag (20%–30%)
A greater sag increases sensitivity to bumps, thus
producing greater suspension motion. A greater
sensitivity to bumps ensures more comfortable
ride performance and is used on pedelecs with a
longer deflection.
Decreased sag (10%– 20%)
A decreased sag reduces sensitivity to bumps,
thus producing less suspension motion. A lower
sensitivity to bumps ensures a firmer, more
efficient ride performance and is generally used
on pedelecs with a shorter deflection.
The adjustment shown here represents a basic
setting. The rider should change the basic setting
to suit the surface and their preferences.
It is advisable to make a note of the basic settings.
These can then be used a starting point for
subsequent optimised settings and as a
safeguard against unintentional changes.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 118
Operation
6.5.12.1 Adjusting the Suntour rear frame damper
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Every rear frame damper has a specific delivery
air pressure ex works. These levels are starting
points. These settings can be changed based
on riding skills, trail conditions, frame design
and personal preferences.
After setting up the rear wheel damper, check the
sag to ensure the recommended sag settings are
used.
The fork sag is adjusted.
When adjusting the sag, ensure that the
compression and rebound adjuster is in an open
position, i.e. the lockout lever is in the OPEN
position.
1Remove the valve cap from the air valve.
2Attach a fork/damper pump to the valve.
3Pump the damper to the required pressure.
Never exceed the recommended maximum air
pressure.
4Detach high-pressure damper pump.
5Measure the distance between the air chamber
seal and the end of the rear frame damper.
This distance is the total rear frame damper
deflection.
6Use the O-ring or a cable tie on the damper
body to gauge the sag correctly.
7Put on your normal cycling clothing, including
baggage.
8Sit on the pedelec in your usual riding position
and support yourself against an object, such as
a wall or tree.
9Push the O-ring or cable tie downwards
against the air chamber seal.
10 Get off the pedelec without the suspension fork
deflecting.
11 Measure the distance between the air chamber
seal and the O-ring. This measurement is the
sag. The recommended value is between 25%
(hard) and 30% (soft) of the total rear frame
damper deflection.
12 Increase or reduce the air pressure until you
have reached the desired sag.
If the sag is correct, fasten the valve cap onto
the valve.
Recommended air pressure (psi)
Body weight Triair EDGE-TT EDGE RAIDON
Main body Air reservoir Main body Main body Main body
Air pressure
Factory reset 180 200 110 110 110
Maximum air
pressure 300 240 300 300 300
Table 44: Suntour filling pressure table for the rear frame damper
Notice
The damper can be permanently damaged if the
required air pressure in the rear frame damper is
exceeded or not reached.
Do not exceed the maximum air pressure of
300 psi (20 bar).
Deflection Sag
30–45 15–25
50–75 20–25
Table 45: Recommended sag for the rear frame damper
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 119
Operation
6.5.12.2 Adjusting the RockShox rear frame damper
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
The fork sag is adjusted.
When adjusting the sag, ensure that all dampers
are in the open position, i.e. turned anti-clockwise
until they stop.
Figure 138: Opening the rebound damper (1) and
compression adjuster (2)
1Release air completely from rear frame
damper.
2Pressurise the air spring chamber to 100 PSI
(6.9 bar) with a high-pressure damper pump.
3Detach high-pressure damper pump.
4Fully deflect rear frame damper five times to
compensate the positive and negative air
suspension.
5Use a high-pressure damper pump to fill the
rear frame damper to the pressure
corresponding to the total weight of the person
riding, including clothing and baggage.
6Deflect rear frame damper to compensate the
air pressure.
7Put on normal cycling clothing (including
baggage).
8Ask someone to hold the bicycle. Stand on the
pedals.
9Deflect rear frame damper fully gently two or
three times.
10 Ask your helper to push the O-ring against the
wiper seal.
Figure 139: Moving the O-ring on the rear frame damper
Notice
If the air pressure in the rear frame damper is
exceeded or undershot, the damper can be
permanently damaged. The details are on the
rear frame damper.
1
2
Weight Air pressure
Kilogram Pound (lbs) Pound per
square inch Bar
55 121 121 8.3
60 132 132 9.1
65 143 143 9.9
70 154 154 10.6
75 165 165 11.4
80 176 176 12.1
85 187 187 12.9
90 198 198 13.7
95 209 209 14.4
100 220 220 15.7
110 242 242 16.7
Table 46: Filling pressure table for ROCKSHOX rear frame
dampers
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 120
Operation
11 Read the sag value on the scale.
The optimum sag percentage is 25%. The sag
level may be adjusted by ± 5%, depending on
the rider's preferences (20% to 30%).
12 The air pressure must be adjusted if the sag
level is not reached.
Increase the air pressure to reduce the sag.
Decrease the air pressure to increase the sag.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 121
Operation
6.5.13 Fork rebound damping
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Rebound damping in the suspension fork and the
rear frame damper determines the speed at which
the rear frame damper rebounds after being
subjected to load. Rebound damping controls the
suspension fork extension and rebound speed,
which, in turn, has an impact on traction and
control.
Rebound damping can be adjusted to body
weight, spring stiffness, deflection, the terrain and
the rider's preferences.
If the air pressure or spring stiffness increases,
the extension and rebound speeds also increase.
Rebound damping needs to be increased to
achieve an optimal setting if the air pressure or
spring stiffness are increased.
The damper rebounds at a controlled speed if the
fork is optimally adjusted. The wheel stays in
contact with the ground when passing over bumps
(blue line).
The fork head, handlebars and body follow terrain
(green line) when riding over bumps. The
suspension motion is predictable and controlled.
Figure 140: Optimum fork ride performance
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 122
Operation
6.5.13.1 Adjusting the Suntour fork rebound damping
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Figure 141: Example of Suntour rebound screw (1)
The fork sag is adjusted.
1Turn the rebound screw in a clockwise
direction to the closed position until it stops.
2Turn the rebound screw slightly in an anti-
clockwise direction.
Adjust the rebound damping in such a way that
the fork rebounds quickly, but without
bottoming out upwards.
Bottoming out refers to when the fork rebounds
too quickly and stops moving abruptly once it
has reached the full rebound distance. You can
hear and feel a slight impact when this
happens.
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 123
Operation
6.5.13.2 Adjusting the RockShox suspension fork
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Figure 142: Adjusting the RockShox rebound
The fork sag is adjusted.
Turn the rebound screw clockwise damper
towards the tortoise symbol.
The rebound speed is decreased (slower
return).
Turn the rebound screw anti-clockwise towards
the hare symbol.
The rebound speed is increased (faster
return).
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 124
Operation
6.5.14 Adjusting the rear frame damper rebound damper
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
The rear frame damper rebounds at a controlled
speed if it is optimally adjusted. The rear wheel
does not bounce off rough surfaces or the ground;
it stays in contact with the ground instead
(blue line).
The saddle is raised slightly if the bump is
compensated and gently sinks downwards when
the suspension deflects as soon as the wheel
touches the ground after the bump. The rear
frame damper rebounds in a controlled way, so
that the rider remains sitting in a horizontal
position when the next bump is absorbed. The
suspension motion is predictable and controlled.
The rider is not thrown upwards or forwards
(green line).
The rebound adjuster setting depends on the air
pressure setting. A higher sag requires lower
rebound damping.
Figure 143: Optimum rear frame damper riding performance
The suspension rebound speed affects the
wheel's contact with the ground, which, in turn,
has an influence on control and efficiency. The
damper should rebound fast enough to sustain
traction without producing an erratic or bumpy
sensation. If rebound damping is too tight, the
damper is unable to rebound fast enough before
the next impact.
Adjust the rebound damping in such a way that the
rear frame damper rebounds quickly, but without
bottoming out upwards. Bottoming out refers to
when the rear frame damper rebounds too quickly
and stops moving abruptly once it has reached the
full rebound distance. You can hear and feel a
slight impact when this happens.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 125
Operation
6.5.14.1 Adjusting the RockShox rear frame damper
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Figure 144: Position and shape of the rebound adjuster (red) depends on the model
The sag in the rear frame damper is adjusted.
Turn rebound adjuster clockwise.
The rebound damping is increased.
Turn rebound adjuster anti-clockwise.
The rebound damping is reduced.
2.5
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 126
Operation
6.5.15 Compression adjuster on rear frame damper
When optimally adjusted, the rear frame damper deflects quickly and unhindered when the bike hits bumps
and absorbs a bump. Traction is retained (blue line).
The saddle rises slightly when absorbing a bump (green line).
Compression adjuster set to hard
• Allows the rear frame damper to move higher in
the deflection range. This makes it easier to
improve efficiency and maintain momentum when
pedalling or riding over uniformly hilly terrain and
around bends.
• Deflection feels somewhat harder on bumpy
terrain.
Compression adjuster set to soft
• Allows the damper to deflect quickly and easily.
This makes it easier to maintain speed and
momentum when riding over bumpy terrain.
• Deflection feels somewhat less hard on bumpy
terrain.
Figure 145: Optimum rear frame damper ride performance over bumps
Threshold
The damping threshold prevents deflection until a
medium impact or downward force occurs.
Threshold mode increases drive efficiency over
level terrain.
The threshold setting can be used to improve
pedalling efficiency over flat, hilly, level or slightly
rugged terrain. In threshold mode, higher pedelec
speeds lead to greater impact force when a
pedelec hits a bump, causing the fork to deflect,
and the bump is absorbed.
• When the compression adjuster is in the open
position, the rear frame damper deflects quickly
and unhindered through its entire deflection
range.
• When the compression adjuster is in the
threshold position, the rear frame damper
counteracts deflection until a medium impact or
downward force occurs.
• When the compression adjuster is in the blocked
position, the rear frame damper counteracts
deflection throughout its deflection range until a
strong impact or downward force occurs.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 127
Operation
6.5.15.1 Adjusting the Suntour compression adjuster
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Figure 146: Suntour compression adjuster (1) on the rear
frame damper
1Set the compression adjuster to the middle
position.
2Ride the pedelec over a small obstacle.
Turn compression adjuster anti-clockwise.
The damping and compression hardness is
reduced. The deflection stroke speed is
increased.
Turn compression adjuster clockwise.
The damping and compression hardness is
increased. The deflection stroke speed is
reduced.
3The ideal setting for the rebound damper has
been achieved when the rebound movement of
the rear wheel feels comparable to that of the
front wheel.
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 128
Operation
6.5.15.2 Adjusting the RockShox compression adjuster
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Figure 147: Position and shape of the compression adjuster (blue) depends on the model
1Set the compression adjuster to the middle
position.
2Ride the pedelec over a small obstacle.
Turn compression adjuster clockwise.
The damping and compression hardness is
increased. The deflection stroke speed is
reduced.
Turn compression adjuster anti-clockwise.
The damping and compression hardness is
reduced. The deflection stroke speed is
increased.
3The ideal setting for the rebound damper has
been achieved when the rebound movement of
the rear wheel feels comparable to that of the
front wheel.
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 129
Operation
6.5.15.3 Adjusting the RockShox threshold
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Figure 148: The lever’s open position (1) and threshold
position (2)
Place threshold lever in the threshold
position (2).
The threshold function is switched on.
Place threshold lever in the open position (1).
The threshold function is switched off. The
damper can deflect quickly and unhindered.
Figure 149: Changing compression adjuster to a harder
setting
To increase sensitivity to small bumps, turn
compression adjuster anti-clockwise to
decrease damping and hardness and increase
the deflection speed.
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 130
Operation
6.5.16 Lighting
Example 1
If the front light is positioned too high, oncoming traffic will be dazzled. This can cause a serious accident
with fatalities.
Example 2
Positioning the front light correctly can ensure that oncoming traffic is not dazzled and no-one is put at risk.
Example 3
If the front light is positioned too low, the space ahead is not illuminated to an optimum extent and the
rider's vision is reduced in the dark.
Figure 150: Light positioned too high (1), correctly (2) and too low (3)
6.5.16.1 Adjusting the lights
1Position the pedelec so that its front is facing a
wall.
2Mark the height of the front light (1) on the wall
with chalk.
3Mark half the height of the front light (2) on the
wall with chalk.
Figure 151: Front light height (1) and half the headlight height (2)
1
2
3
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 131
Operation
4Place pedelec 5 m from the wall.
5Stand the pedelec up straight. Hold the
handlebars straight with both hands. Do not
use the kickstand.
6Switch on riding light.
.
Figure 152: Light positioned too high (1), correctly (2) and too low (3)
7Check the position of the light beam.
(I) if the upper edge of the light beam is above the front light height mark (1), the light will dazzle. The
front light must be positioned lower.
(II) If the mid-point of the light beam is on or slightly below the mark showing half the front light (2), the
light is optimally positioned.
(III) It the light beam is in front of the wall, move front light up.
I
II
III
1
2
1
2
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 132
Operation
6.5.17 On-board computer
The on-board computer is operated using four
buttons on its casing.
.
Figure 153: BOSCH Purion on-board computer layout
6.5.17.1 Changing the tachometer unit
The displayed values can be changed from
kilometres to miles.
1Keep minus button pressed down.
2Press On-Off button (on-board computer)
briefly.
All the values are displayed in miles.
6.5.17.2 Adjust display screen brightness
The display must be switched off.
1Keep the plus and minus buttons pressed
down at the same time.
2Press the On-Off button (display) briefly.
3Use the plus button or minus button to adjust
the display screen brightness in such a way
that you can see text and icons sufficiently
clearly.
6.5.17.3 Displaying versions and type numbers
You can retrieve the sub-system versions and
their type part numbers for maintenance purposes
if the sub-systems provide this type of information
(depends on the sub-system).
The drive system must be switched off.
1Keep the plus and minus buttons pressed
down at the same time.
2Press On-Off button (on-board computer)
briefly.
The version or type number will be displayed
as moving text.
Symbol Use
1WALK Push assist button
2 USB port
3On-Off button (display)
4 Display
5+Plus button
6–Minus button
Table 47: Operating elements overview
Action Button Duration
Changing the tachometer
unit
– 1. Hold
2. brief (< 1 s)
Adjust display screen
brightness
– +
– or +
1. Hold
2. brief (< 1 s)
3. brief (< 1 s)
Get versions
– + 1. Hold
2. brief (< 1 s)
Table 48: Overview for adjusting on-board computer
WALK
WALK
WALK
W
AL
W
W
W
W
W
W
A
A
L
K
K
K
K
K
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
WWWW
WW
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
WW
W
W
W
W
A
A
WW
W
W
A
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
A
WW
AAAA
AA
A
AA
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
LLLL
LL
L
AA
A
A
A
A
L
L
LL
L
L
L
L
K
KKKK
KK
K
K
K
K
K
KK
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
1
23
4
5
6
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 133
Operation
6.6 Accessories
We recommend a parking stand into which either
the front wheel or rear wheel can be inserted
securely for pedelecs which do not have a
kickstand. The following accessories are
recommended:
6.6.1 Child seat
The specialist dealer will advise you on choosing
a suitable child seat system for the child and the
pedelec.
The specialist dealer must install the child seat the
first time to ensure that it is safely fitted.
When installing a child seat, the specialist dealer
makes sure that the seat and the fastening
mechanism for the seat are suitable for the
pedelec and that all components are installed and
firmly fastened. They will also ensure that shift
cables, brake cables, hydraulic lines and electrical
cables are adjusted as necessary, the rider has
optimum freedom of movement and the pedelec’s
maximum permitted total weight is complied with.
The specialist dealer will provide instruction on
how to handle the pedelec and the child seat.
Description Article number
Protective cover for electrical
components 080-41000 ff
Panniers,
system component* 080-40946
Rear wheel basket,
system component* 051-20603
Bicycle box,
system component* 080-40947
Parking stand
universal stand XX-TWO14B
Table 49: Accessories
Crash caused by incorrect child seat
The pannier rack and down tube are unsuitable
for mounting child seats and may break. Such an
incorrect position may cause a crash with serious
injuries for the rider or child.
Never attach a child seat to the saddle,
handlebars or down tube.
Crash caused by improper handling
When using child seats, the pedelec's handling
characteristics and stability change considerably.
This can cause a loss of control, a crash and
injuries.
You should practice how to use the child seat
safely before using the pedelec in public
spaces.
WARNING
!
CAUTION
!
Risk of crushing due to exposed springs
The child may crush his/her fingers on exposed
springs or open mechanical parts of the saddle or
the seat post.
Never install saddles with exposed springs if a
child seat is being used.
Never install seat posts with suspension with
open mechanical parts or exposed springs if a
child seat is being used.
Notice
Observe the legal regulations on the use of
child seats.
Observe the operating and safety instructions
for the child seat system.
Never exceed the maximum permitted total
weight.
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 134
Operation
6.6.2 Trailer
A pedelec which is approved for towing a trailer
will bear an appropriate adhesive label. You may
only use trailers with a tongue load and weight
which do not exceed the permitted values.
Figure 154: Trailer sign
The specialist dealer will advise on choosing a
suitable trailer system for the pedelec. The
specialist dealer must install the trailer the first
time to ensure that it is fitted safely.
6.6.2.1 Approval for trailer with Enviolo hub
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Only compatible bicycle trailers are approved for
ENVIOLO hub gears.
KETTLER
KETTLER QUADRIGA child trailer.
BURLY
CROOZER
THULE
Crash caused by brake failure
The braking distance may be longer if the trailer
is carrying excessive load. The long braking
distance can cause a crash or an accident and
injuries.
Never exceed the specified trailer load.
Notice
The operating and safety instructions for the
trailer system must be observed.
The statutory regulations on the use of bicycle
trailers must be observed.
Only use type-approved coupling systems.
CAUTION
!
Trailer Adapter
Minnow Bee
Item no. 960038
Honey Bee
Encore
solo
Cub
D’Lite
Normad
Flatbed
Tail Wagon
Trailer Adapter
Croozer Kid
Item no. 122003516,
XL: +10 mm Item no. 122003716
Item no. 12200715
Croozer axle nut adapter with Thule
coupling
Croozer Kid Plus
Croozer Cargo
Croozer Dog
Trailer Adapter
Thule Chariot Lite
Item no. 20100798
Thule Chariot Cab
Thule Chariot Cross
Thule Chariot Sport
Thule Coaster XT
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 135
Operation
6.6.2.2 Approval for trailer with ROHLOFF hub
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
ROHLOFF Speedhub 500/14
As a basic rule, it is permitted to use a trailer
in combination with the ROHLOFF
SPEEDHUB 500/14.
There must be no component contact with the
cover of the ROHLOFF E-14 gear shift unit
caused by pressure or tension at any time during
assembly or when riding with the trailer under any
circumstances.
Collision causing possible damage to the
ROHLOFF E-14 gear shift unit can be avoided
with suitable washers or special axle adapters
(spacers or polygon) from the coupling
manufacturer concerned.
Speedhub with A-12
6.6.3 Mobile holder
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
A holder for SP Connect mobile case is fitted to
the stem.
Observe the operating instructions for the mobile
and the SP Connect mobile case.
Use on tarmacked roads only.
Protect mobile from theft.
To attach: insert the SP Connect mobile case
in the holder and turn 90° to the right.
To release: turn the SP Connect mobile case
90° to the left and remove.
6.6.4 Tubeless and airless tyres
Bicycle riding without tubes reduces the risk of
tyre punctures or even avoids them completely.
The specialist dealer will advise on choosing a
suitable tyre system for the pedelec.
A specialist dealer must carry out conversion to
tubeless or airless tyres for safety reasons.
6.6.5 Suspension fork coil spring
If the desired suspension fork sag cannot be
achieved after adjustment, the coil spring
assembly must be replaced with a softer or harder
spring.
Fit a softer coil spring assembly group to
increase the sag.
Fit a harder coil spring assembly group to
decrease the sag.
6.6.6 Pannier rack
The specialist dealer will advise on choosing a
suitable pannier rack.
The specialist dealer must install the pannier rack
the first time to ensure that it is safely fitted.
When installing a pannier rack, the specialist
dealer makes sure that the fastening mechanism
is suitable for the pedelec and that all components
are installed and firmly fastened. They will also
ensure that shift cables, brake cables, hydraulic
lines and electrical cables are adjusted as
necessary, the rider has optimum freedom of
movement and the pedelec's maximum permitted
total weight is not exceeded.
The specialist dealer will provide instruction on
how to handle the pedelec and the pannier rack.
6.6.7 Panniers and cargo boxes
Use a paint protection film when attaching
panniers. This will reduce abrasion on paint
and wear on components.
Risk of an accident
The A-12 attachment screw has a very low screw-
in depth. The screw or the thread in the axle plate
can be damaged or ripped out if a trailer hitch is
fitted directly onto the axle or the A-12 attachment
screw. This may cause an accident with injuries.
Never fit a trailer hitch directly on the axle and
the A-12 attachment screw to a ROHLOFF
Speedhub with an A-12 axle system in a
12 mm quick release axle frame.
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 136
Operation
6.7 Personal protective equipment and accessories for road safety
Seeing and being seen is crucial in road traffic.
The following requirements must be met for riding
a road-safe vehicle on public roads.
Figure 155: Road safety
1The helmet must have a reflective strip or a
light in a clearly visible colour.
2 Cycle clothing is essential at all times of year.
Clothing should be retroreflective or as light as
possible. Fluorescent materials are also
suitable. High-visibility jackets and straps on
your upper body ensure even greater safety.
Never wear a skirt. Always wear trousers which
reach down to your ankles instead.
3The large red reflector with a “Z” registration
mark and the red rear light must be clean. The
rear light is attached high enough so that cars
can see it (minimum height 25 cm). The rear
light must work.
4The two reflectors on the two non-slip
pedals must be clean.
5The yellow spoke reflectors on both wheels
or the white, fluorescent surface on both
wheels must be clean.
6The white front light must work and must be
positioned so that it does not dazzle other road
users. If the white reflector is not integrated
into the front light, it must be clean at all times.
7The two separate brakes on the pedelec must
work at all times.
8The clear sounding bell must be fitted and
must work.
6.8 Before each ride
Check pedelec before each ride; see
section 7.1.
Be alert to any unusual noises, vibrations or
odours while riding. Be alert to any unusual
operating sensations when braking, pedalling
or steering. This indicates material fatigue.
Take pedelec out of service if there are any
deviations from the “Before each ride” check
list or any unusual behaviour. Contact your
specialist dealer.
1
2
7
6
3
4
5
8
Check list before each ride
Check everything is sufficiently
clean. See section 7.2
Check guards. See section 7.1.1
Check battery to ensure it is firmly
in place. See section 6.7.3
Check lights. See section 7.1.13
Check brake. See section 7.1.14
Check suspension seat post. See section 7.1.9
Check pannier rack. See section 7.1.5
Check bell. See section 7.1.10
Check handles. See section 7.1.11
Check rear frame damper. See section 7.1.4
Check frame. See section 7.1.2
Check wheel concentricity. See section 7.1.7
Check quick releases. See section 7.1.8
Check mudguards. See section 7.1.6
Check USB cover. See section 7.1.12
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 137
Operation
6.9 Straightening the quickly
adjustable stem
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1Open stem clamping lever.
Figure 156: Example of All Up with open stem clamping
lever
2Pull handlebars into the highest possible
position.
Figure 157: Example of All Up pulled into highest possible
position
3Turn handlebars 90° anti-clockwise so that
they are straight.
Figure 158: Example of All Up in straight position
4Place handlebars at required height
5Close stem clamping lever.
6.10 Using the pannier rack
Distribute the baggage as evenly as possible
between the left- and right-hand side.
We recommend the use of panniers and
baggage baskets.
Crash caused by loaded pannier rack
The pedelec is handled differently with a loaded
pannier rack, in particular when the rider needs to
steer and brake. This can lead to a loss of control.
This may cause a crash with injuries.
You should practice how to use a loaded
pannier rack safely before using the pedelec in
public spaces.
Crushing the fingers in the spring flap
The spring flap on the pannier rack operates with
a high clamping force. There is a risk of crushing
the fingers.
Never allow the spring flap to snap shut in an
uncontrolled manner.
Be careful where you position your fingers
when closing the spring flap.
Crash caused by unsecured baggage
Loose or unsecured objects on the pannier rack,
e.g. belts, may become caught in the rear wheel.
This may cause a crash with injuries.
Objects which are fastened to the pannier rack
may cover the reflectors and the riding light. Other
users may not see the pedelec on public roads as
a result. This may cause a crash with injuries.
Secure any objects which are attached to the
pannier rack sufficiently.
Objects fastened to the pannier rack must
never cover the reflectors, the front lamp or the
rear light.
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 138
Operation
l.
Figure 159: The maximum load bearing (1) capacity is
indicated on the pannier rack.
Never exceed the maximum permitted total
weight when packing the pannier.
Never (1) exceed the maximum load bearing
capacity of the pannier rack.
Never modify the pannier rack.
6.11 Raising the kickstand
Use your foot to raise kickstand completely
before setting off.
6.12 Using the saddle
Do not wear studded jeans as these can
damage the saddle covering.
Wear dark clothes for your first few rides as
new leather saddles can stain clothing.
6.12.1 Using the leather saddle
Sunlight and UV light damage the colour and can
cause the leather to dry out and fade.
Do not expose the pedelec to the sun for longer
periods of time.
Moisture may cause the leather to detach from
material beneath and mould can form.
If the leather handles get wet, dry handles
completely.
6.13 Using the pedals
The ball of the foot is placed on the pedal when
riding and pedalling.
Figure 160: Correct (1) and incorrect (2) foot position on
the pedal
6.14 Using the multifunctional
handlebars or bar ends
Vary handle position to avoid overstraining and
tiring the hands.
6.14.1 Using leather handles
Sweat and grease from the skin are two of the
greatest enemies of leather. They penetrate the
surface of leather and cause it to disintegrate
more quickly, meaning the leather can soften and
abrade.
Wear gloves.
Sunlight and UV light damage the colour and can
cause the leather to dry out and fade.
Do not expose the pedelec to the sun for longer
periods of time.
Moisture may cause the leather to detach from
material beneath and mould can form.
If the leather handles get wet, dry handles
completely.
6.15 Using the bell
1Press the bell button downwards.
2Let button spring back.
1
1
2
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 139
Operation
6.16 Using the battery
Switch off the battery and the drive system before
removing or inserting the battery.
6.16.1 Frame battery
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
6.16.1.1 Removing the frame battery
Figure 161: Removing and inserting the frame battery
1Open battery lock with battery key (1).
2Tip the battery out of the top section of the
frame battery mount.
3Pull from the frame battery mount (2).
6.16.1.2 Inserting the frame battery
1Place the battery on the contacts in the lower
section of the frame battery mount (3).
2Remove the battery key from the battery lock
(4).
3Tip the battery into the top section of the frame
battery mount until it will go no further.
There is an audible clicking noise.
4Check the battery to make sure it is firmly in
place.
6.16.2 Pannier rack battery
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
6.16.2.1 Removing the pannier rack battery
Figure 162: Removing (2) and inserting (3) the pannier
rack battery
1Open battery lock with battery key (1).
2Pull the pannier rack battery backwards and
out of its mount (2).
3Remove the battery key from the battery lock
(1).
6.16.2.2 Inserting the pannier rack battery
1Insert battery into the pannier rack battery
mount with the contacts facing the front until it
clicks into place (3).
2Check the battery to make sure it is firmly in
place.
(2)
7°
(1)
(3)
(4)
(1) (2)
(3)
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 140
Operation
6.16.3 Integrated battery
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
6.16.3.1 Removing the integrated battery
Figure 163: Removing the integrated battery
1Open battery lock with battery key (1).
The battery is released and falls into the
retainer guard (2).
2Hold the battery in your hand from below. Use
the other hand to push on the retainer guard
from above (3).
The battery is released and falls into the hand
(4).
3Remove the battery from the frame.
4Remove the battery key from the battery lock.
6.16.3.2 Inserting the integrated battery
Figure 164: Inserting the integrated battery
1Place the battery into the integrated battery
lower mount with the contacts facing the
front (1).
2Flip the battery upwards so that the battery is
held by the retainer guard (2).
3Push the battery upwards (3).
There is an audible clicking noise.
4Check battery to ensure it is firmly in place.
5Lock the battery with the battery key;
otherwise, the battery may fall out of the mount
when you open the see (4).
6Remove the battery key from the battery lock.
7Check the battery to ensure it is firmly in place
before each ride.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 141
Operation
6.16.4 Charging the battery
The ambient temperature during the charging
process must be within the range from 0 °C to
40 °C.
The battery can remain on the pedelec or can be
removed for charging.
Interrupting the charging process does not
damage the battery.
1Remove the cable connection cover if
necessary.
2Connect the mains plug of the charger to a
normal domestic, grounded socket.
3Connect the charging cable to the battery's
charging port.
The charging process starts automatically.
The battery level indicator shows the charge
level during charging. When the drive system is
switched on, the on-board computer displays
the charging process.
The charging process is complete when the
LEDs on the charge level indicator (battery) go
out.
4Once charging is complete, disconnect the
battery from the charger.
5Disconnect the charger from the mains.
6.16.5 Charging the dual battery
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
6.16.5.1 Charging process when two batteries
are used
If two batteries are attached to a pedelec,
charge both batteries via the non-sealed
socket.
The two batteries are charged alternately
during charging. Charging switches
automatically between the two batteries
several times. The charging time is twice as
long.
The two batteries are discharged alternately
during use.
6.16.5.2 Charging process when one battery is
used
If only one battery is inserted, only charge the
battery with an accessible charging socket.
Charge the battery with the sealed charging
socket outside its mount only.
Connection data 230 V, 50 Hz
Notice
Check that mains voltage! The power source
voltage must match the voltage indicated on
the charger nameplate. Chargers labelled
230 V may be operated at 220 V.
Notice
If an error occurs during the charging process, a
system message is displayed.
Remove the charger and battery from
operation immediately and follow the
instructions.
Notice
Charge the battery via the accessible charging
socket only.
Never open a sealed charging socket.
Charging via a pre-sealed charging socket can
cause irreparable damage.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 142
Operation
6.16.6 Using double battery model with a
single battery only
One of the charging sockets is not accessible or is
sealed with an end cap on pedelecs with two
batteries.
Figure 165: Covering open contacts with cover cap –
example: pannier rack battery
If you wish to use just one battery on a pedelec
which is designed for two batteries, cover the
contacts in the free slot with the supplied cover
cap (1); otherwise, there is a risk of a short
circuit caused by the open contacts.
6.16.7 Waking the battery
The battery switches to sleep mode to protect
itself when not used for a longer period. The LEDs
on the battery level indicator do not light up.
Press the On-Off button (battery).
The charge level indicator (battery) shows the
charge level.
(1)
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 143
Operation
6.17 Using pedelec with the electric drive system
6.17.1 Switching on the electric drive
system
A sufficiently charged battery has been inserted
into the pedelec.
The battery is firmly positioned. The battery key
has been removed.
There are three options for switching on the drive
system.
On-Off button (battery)
Press the On-Off button (battery) briefly.
On-Off button (on-board computer)
Press the On-Off button (on-board computer)
briefly.
Switched-on on-board computer
If the on-board computer is already switched
on when it is inserted into its mount, the electric
drive system is switched on automatically.
After switching on, a speed of 0 KM/H is
displayed on the on-board computer. If it is not,
check whether the on-board computer is fully
engaged into position.
If the drive system is switched on, the drive is
activated as soon as the pedals are moved with
sufficient force (except if in push assist mode
or the level of assistance is "OFF").
The motor power is determined by the level of
assistance set on the on-board computer.
6.17.2 Switching off the electric drive
system
As soon as you stop pushing the pedals in normal
mode or reach a speed of 25 km/h, the drive
system switches off the assistance system. The
assistance system starts up again when you push
the pedals and your speed is less than 25 km/h.
The system switches off automatically ten minutes
after the last command. There are three options
for switching off the drive system manually.
On-Off button (on-board computer)
Press the On-Off button (on-board computer)
briefly.
On-Off button (battery)
Press the On-Off button (battery).
Removing the on-board computer
Remove the on-board computer from the
mount.
The LEDs on the charge level indicator
(battery) go out.
Crash caused by lack of readiness for braking
When it is switched on, the drive system can be
activated by the application of force on the
pedals. There is a risk of a crash if the drive is
activated unintentionally and the brake is not
reached.
Never start the electric drive system, or switch
it off immediately, if the brake cannot be
reached safely and reliably.
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 144
Operation
6.18 On-board computer
The on-board computer is operated using four
buttons on its casing.
.
Figure 166: BOSCH Purion on-board computer layout
6.18.1 Actions on the on-board computer
6.18.2 Switching on the on-board computer
Press On-Off button (on-board computer)
briefly.
The electric drive system is switched on.
6.18.3 Switching off the on-board
computer
Press On-Off button (on-board computer)
briefly.
After switching off, the drive system shuts
down.
It is not possible to switch on again
immediately. Wait a moment as necessary.
6.18.4 Using the riding light
The drive system needs to be already switched
on to turn on the riding light.
Press plus button for a long time.
The riding light is switched on. The riding light
symbol is displayed.
Press plus button for a long time.
The riding light is switched off. The riding light
symbol is not displayed.
Notice
Never use the display as a handle. The display
may become irreparably damaged if you use it
to lift the pedelec.
Remove the batteries from the display if the
pedelec is not going to be used for several
weeks.
Symbol Use
1WALK Push assist button
2 USB port
3On-Off button (on-board computer)
4 Display
5+Plus button
6–Minus button
Table 50: Operating elements overview
WALK
WALK
WALK
W
AL
W
W
W
W
W
W
A
A
L
K
K
K
K
K
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
WWWW
WW
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
WW
W
W
W
W
A
A
WW
W
W
A
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
A
WW
AAAA
AA
A
AA
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
LLLL
LL
L
AA
A
A
A
A
L
L
LL
L
L
L
L
K
KKKK
KK
K
K
K
K
K
KK
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
1
23
4
5
6
Action Button Duration
Switching on the on-board
computer Brief
Switching off the on-board
computer Brief (< 1 s)
Using the push assist system WALK
+
1. brief (< 1 s)
2. Any
Increase assistance +Brief (< 1 s)
Reduce assistance –Brief (< 1 s)
TRIP/TOTAL/RANGE
screen, assistance modes –Medium (1- 2.5 s)
Switch on riding light +Long (> 2.5 s)
Switch off riding light +Long (> 2.5 s)
Reset journey distance – &+ Medium (1- 2.5 s)
Table 51: Overview of actions on the on-board computer
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 145
Operation
6.18.5 Using the push assist system
The push assist helps move the pedelec. The
speed can be a maximum of 6 km/h in this case.
The tractive power of the push assist and its
speed can be influenced by the selection of gear.
We recommend using first gear for cycling uphill
to protect the drive.
The level of assistance OFF must not be
selected.
1Press push assist button briefly.
The push assist is activated.
2Press and hold plus button within 3 seconds.
Push assist is switched on.
3Release plus button.
Push assist is switched off.
The push assist system switches off
automatically as soon as the pedelec wheels
are blocked or the value exceeds 6 km/h.
6.18.6 Selecting the level of assistance
Press plus button briefly.
The level of assistance is increased.
Press minus button briefly.
The level of assistance is reduced.
6.18.7 Using the journey information
The displayed journey information can be
changed and partially reset.
6.18.7.1 Switching the journey information
Press minus button medium length of time.
The journey information trip distance (TRIP),
total distance travelled (TOTAL), range
(RANGE), and support modes used are shown
on the display screen.
6.18.7.2 Resetting the trip distance
Select TRIP journey information .
Press plus and minus buttons simultaneously
for a long time.
RESET is shown on the display screen.
If you continue to jiggle the plus and minus
buttons at the same time, the trip distance will
be reset to 0.
6.18.7.3 Resetting the range
Select RANGE journey information.
Press plus and minus buttons simultaneously
for a long time.
RESET is shown on the display screen.
If you continue to jiggle the plus and minus
buttons at the same time, the range will be
reset to 0.
Injury from pedals or wheels
The pedals and the drive wheel turn when the
push assist system is used. There is a risk of
injury if the pedelec wheels are not in contact with
the ground when the push assist system is used
(e.g. when carrying the pedelec up stairs or when
placing it on a bicycle rack).
Only use the push assist mode when pushing
the pedelec.
You must steer the pedelec securely with both
hands when using push assist.
Allow for enough freedom of movement for the
pedals.
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 146
Operation
6.18.8 Replacing the battery
If the on-board computer shows LOW BAT on the
display screen, the battery is flat and must be
replaced.
The recommended CR 2016 battery can be
obtained from specialist dealers.
.
Figure 167: On-board computer with attachment screw (1)
and battery compartment cover (2)
1Remove on-board computer from the
handlebars by unfastening attachment
screw (1).
2Use a suitable coin to open the battery
compartment cover (2).
3Remove used on-board computer batteries.
4Insert new CR 2016 on-board computer
batteries. Ensure correct polarity when
inserting on-board computer battery.
5Close battery compartment.
6Fasten on-board computer onto the
handlebars with attachment screw (1).
The battery has been changed.
6.18.9 Using the USB port
WALK
WALK
WALK
W
AL
W
W
W
W
W
W
A
A
A
AL
L
L
K
K
K
K
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
WWWW
WW
W
WW
W
W
WW
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
WA
WA
WW
W
W
W
W
WA
W
W
W
W
W
WW
W
WA
WW
WAWAWAWA
WAWA
WA
WW
A
A
WA
A
WA
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
LLLL
ALAL
AL
W
W
A
WA
WA
WA
L
AL
AL
AL
L
L
ALAL
AL
LK
L
L
KKKK
LKLK
LK
K
K
KK
K
K
K
K
KK
K
K
K
K
K
K
1
2
Notice
The USB port is reserved to connect diagnostics
systems. The USB port must be kept completely
closed with the protective cap at all times.
Any moisture penetrating through the USB port
may trigger a short circuit in the on-board
computer.
Regularly check the position of the rubber
cover on the USB port and adjust it as
necessary.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 147
Operation
6.19 Brake
The motor drive force is shut off during the ride as
soon as the rider is no longer pedalling. The drive
system does not switch off when braking.
In order to achieve optimum braking results, do
not pedal while braking.
6.19.1 Using the brake lever
Figure 168: Brake lever, rear (1) and front (2), SHIMANO
brake used as an example
Push the left-hand brake lever to apply the front
wheel brake.
Push the right-hand brake lever to apply the rear
wheel brake.
Turn the setting wheel in an anti-clockwise
direction to increase the rebound speed.
Turn the setting wheel in a clockwise direction
to decrease the rebound speed.
Crash caused by brake failure
Oil or lubricant on the brake disc in a disc brake
or on the rim of a rim brake can cause the brake
to fail completely. This may cause a crash with
serious injuries.
Never allow oil or lubricant to come into
contact with the brake disc or brake linings or
on the rim of a rim brake.
If the brake linings have come into contact with
oil or lubricant, contact specialist dealer to
have the components cleaned or replaced.
If the brakes are applied continuously for a long
time (e.g. while riding downhill for a long time),
the fluid in the brake system may heat up. This
may create a vapour bubble. This will cause air
bubbles or water contained in the brake system to
expand. This may suddenly make the lever travel
wider. This may cause a crash with serious
injuries.
Release the brake regularly when riding
downhill for a longer period of time.
WARNING
!
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 148
Operation
6.20 Suspension and damping
Compression adjuster set to hard
• Causes the suspension fork to move higher within
the deflection range. This improves efficiency,
maintains momentum and makes it easier to ride
over uniformly hilly terrain and around bends.
• Deflection may feel somewhat harder on rugged
terrain.
Compression adjuster set to soft
• Causes the fork to deflect quickly and easily. This
makes it easier to maintain speed and
momentum when riding over uneven rugged
terrain.
• Deflection feels somewhat less hard on rugged
terrain.
Figure 169: Optimum performance over bumps
When optimally adjusted, the fork deflects quickly
and unhindered when the bike hits bumps and
absorbs a bump. Traction is retained (blue line).
The fork responds quickly to the bump. The
headset and handlebars rise slightly when
absorbing a bump (green line).
Threshold
The damping threshold prevents deflection until a
medium impact or downward force occurs.
Threshold mode increases drive efficiency over
level terrain.
The threshold setting can be used to improve
pedalling efficiency over flat or hilly terrain. In
threshold mode, higher pedelec speeds lead to
greater impact force when a pedelec hits a bump,
causing the fork to deflect, and the bump is
absorbed.
• When the compression adjuster is in the open
position (against the stop in an anti-clockwise
direction), the suspension fork deflects quickly
and unhindered through its entire deflection
range when an impact or downward force occurs.
• When the compression adjuster is in the
threshold position, the suspension fork
counteracts deflection until a medium impact or
downward force occurs.
• When the compression adjuster is in the blocked
position (against the stop in a clockwise
direction), the suspension fork counteracts
deflection throughout its deflection range until a
strong impact or downward force occurs.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 149
Operation
6.20.1 Adjusting the Suntour compression adjuster
Figure 170: Suntour compression adjuster in open (1) and closed (2) position
Place compression adjuster in the OPEN
position.
The compression adjuster is open.
Place compression adjuster in the LOCK
position.
The compression adjuster is locked.
Position compression adjuster between
OPEN and LOCK.
This position allows you to fine-tune the
compression adjuster.
We recommend setting the compression adjuster
to the OPEN position first.
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 150
Operation
6.20.1.1 Adjusting the RockShox compression adjuster
Turn compression adjuster clockwise.
The damping and compression hardness is
increased and the deflection stroke speed is
reduced. Efficiency on hilly and flat terrain is
improved.
Figure 171: Changing compression adjuster to a harder
setting
Turn compression adjuster anti-clockwise.
The damping and compression hardness is
reduced and the deflection stroke speed is
increased. Sensitivity to small bumps is
increased.
Figure 172: Changing compression adjuster to a softer
setting
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 151
Operation
6.21 Gear shift
The selection of the appropriate gear is a
prerequisite for a physically comfortable ride and
making sure that the electric drive system
functions properly. The ideal pedalling frequency
is between 70 and 80 revolutions per minute.
Stop pedalling briefly when changing gears.
This makes it easier to switch gears and
reduces wear on the drivetrain. However, keep
the crank moving while switching gears.
6.21.1 Using the derailleur gears
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
The speed and range can be increased while
applying the same force if you select the right
gear.
Stop pedalling briefly when changing gears. This
makes it easier to switch gears and reduces wear
on the drivetrain. However, keep the crank
moving while switching gears.
Figure 173: Switching gears with lever A, using gear shift
SL-M315 as an example
Lever A switches from a smaller pinion to a larger
one. The number of pinions switched depends on
the selected position of lever A.
Place shifter A in position 1.
System shifts one pinion higher.
Place shifter A in position 2.
System shifts two pinions higher.
Figure 174: Switching gears with lever B, using gear shift
SL-M315 as an example
Lever B switches from a larger pinion to a smaller
one.
Place shifter B in position 1.
System shifts one pinion lower.
Switching gears
Select the appropriate gear with the gear shift
unit.
The gear shift switches the gear.
The shifter returns to its original position.
Clean and lubricate the rear derailleur if gear
changes block.
1
2
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 152
Operation
6.22 Parking
1Switch off drive system (see Section 6.17.2).
2After getting off, use your foot to lower the
kickstand completely before parking. Ensure
that it is stable.
3Park the pedelec carefully and check that it is
stable.
4Protect saddle with saddle cover if you park the
pedelec outside.
5Lock the pedelec with the bicycle lock.
6Remove the on-board computer (see
Section 6.18.1.1), battery (see Section 6.16.1.1,
6.16.2.1 or 6.16.3.1) and mobile phone to
protect against theft.
7Clean and service pedelec after every ride; see
Section 7.2.
Check list after each ride
6.22.1 Screwing in the All Up handlebars
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Screw in the All Up stem to save space when
parking.
1Open stem clamping lever.
Figure 175: All Up with open stem clamping lever
Notice
Heat or direct sunlight can cause the tyre pressure
to increase above the permitted maximum
pressure. This can destroy the tyres.
Never park the pedelec in the sun.
On hot days, regularly check the tyre pressure
and adjust it as necessary.
Moisture penetrating at low temperatures may
impair individual functions due to the open
structural design.
Always keep the pedelec dry and free from
frost.
If the pedelec is used at temperatures below
3 °C, the specialist dealer must perform
maintenance beforehand and prepare it for
winter use.
The pedelec's force of weight may cause the
kickstand to sink into soft ground, possibly
causing the pedelec to topple over as a result.
The pedelec must be parked on firm, level
ground only.
Cleaning
Lights and reflectors See Section 7.2.5
Brake See Section 7.2.5
Suspension fork See Section 7.2.1
Suspension seat post See Section 7.2.6
Rear frame damper See Section 7.2.7
Pedal See Section 7.2.4
Care
Suspension fork See Section 3
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 153
Operation
2Pull handlebars into highest possible position.
Figure 176: All Up pulled into highest possible position
3Turn handlebars 90° in a clockwise direction.
Figure 177: All Up screwed in
4Place handlebars at required height
5Close stem clamping lever.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 154
Cleaning, servicing and maintenance
7 Cleaning, servicing and maintenance
Clean, service and maintain pedelec as indicated on check list.
Complying with these measures is the only way to reduce wear on components, increase the operating
hours and guarantee safety.
Check list before each ride
Check everything is sufficiently
clean see Section 7.2
Check guards see Section 7.1.1
Check battery to ensure it is firmly
in place See Section 6.7.3
Check lights see Section 7.1.13
Check brake see Section 7.1.14
Check suspension seat post see Section 7.1.9
Check pannier rack see Section 7.1.5
Check bell see Section 7.1.10
Check handles see Section 7.1.11
Check rear frame damper see Section 7.1.4
Check wheel concentricity see Section 7.1.7
Check frame see Section 7.1.2
Check quick releases see Section 7.1.8
Check guards see Section 7.1.6
Check USB cover see Section 7.1.12
Check list after each ride
Clean lights see Section 7.2.1
Clean reflectors see Section 7.2.1
Clean brake see Section 7.2.5
Clean suspension fork see Section 7.2.2
Care for suspension fork see Section 3
Clean suspension seat post see Section 7.2.6
Clean rear frame damper see Section 7.2.7
Clean the pedals see Section 7.2.4
Check list for weekly tasks
Clean chain see Section 7.3.18
City, folding, cargo and children’s
bikes and bicycles for young adults
When dry:
every 10 days
In wet conditions:
every 2–6 days
Trekking and racing bikes
When dry:
every 140–200 km
In wet conditions:
every 100 km
Mountain bikes
When dry:
every 60–100 km
In wet conditions:
after every ride
Belt (every 250–300 km) see Section 7.3.17
Care for chain. See Section 7.4.16
and Section 7.4.16.1
City, folding, cargo and children’s
bikes and bicycles for young adults
When dry:
every 10 days
In wet conditions:
every 2–6 days
Trekking and racing bikes
When dry:
every 140–200 km
In wet conditions:
every 100 km
Mountain bikes
When dry:
every 60–100 km
In wet conditions:
maintain every time
Maintain all-round chain guard. see Section 7.4.16.1
Check tyre pressure (at least once
a week) see Section 7.5.1.1
Check tyres (every 10 days) see Section 7.5.1.2
eightpins seat post
Refill oil (every 20 hours) see Section 7.4.18
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 155
Cleaning, servicing and maintenance
Check list for monthly tasks
Cleaning the battery see Section 7.3.2
Clean control panel see Section 7.3.1
Clean on-board computer see Section 7.3.1
Check disc brake linings once a
month or after braking 1,000 times see Section 7.5.2.6
Check rim brake brake linings
(once a month or after braking
3000 times) see Section 7.5.1.3
Check the rim brake surface. see Section 7.5.2.6
Clean brake lever see Section 7.3.15.1
Clean brake disc see Section 7.3.16
Check brake disc see Section 7.5.2.4
Check brake Bowden cables. see Section 7.5.2.3
Clean pannier rack see Section 7.3.4
Clean handles see Section 7.3.7
Care for handles see Section 7.4.8
Check hand brake see Section 7.5.2.1
Check hydraulic system see Section 7.5.2.2
Clean cassette see Section 7.3.14
Clean chain and all-round chain
guard see Section 7.3.18.1
Clean chain wheels see Section 7.3.14
Clean leather handles see Section 7.3.7.1
Care for leather handles see Section 7.4.8.2
Clean the leather saddle see Section 7.3.9.1
Care for leather saddle see Section 7.4.10
Clean handlebars see Section 7.3.6
Cleaning the motor see Section 7.3.3
Clean hub see Section 7.3.12
Cleaning the frame see Section 7.3.4
Clean tyres see Section 7.3.10
Check back-pedal brake see Section 7.5.2.5
Clean saddle see Section 7.3.9
Clean seat post see Section 7.3.8
Care for seat post see Section 7.4.9
Clean shifter see Section 7.3.13.1
Cleaning gear shift see Section 7.3.13
Clean shift cables see Section 7.3.13
Check disc brake see Section 7.5.2.4
Clean mudguard see Section 7.3.4
Clean kickstand see Section 7.3.4
Clean spokes and spoke nipples see Section 7.3.11
Care for spoke nipples see Section 7.4.12
Clean rigid fork see Section 7.3.4
Clean transmission see Section 7.3.13
Clean front derailleur see Section 7.3.14
Clean stem see Section 7.3.5
Check list for tasks every three months
Check brake pressure point see Section 7.5.2.1
Check rim brake (100 hours trip
time or every 2,000 km) see Section 7.5.2.6
Check spokes see Section 7.5.1.3
Check list for monthly tasks
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 156
Cleaning, servicing and maintenance
Check list for tasks to do every six months (or every 1,000
km)
Check Bowden cables gear
shift see Section 7.5.10.2
Care for brake lever see Section 7.4.17.1
Care for carbon seat post see Section 7.4.9.2
Check electric cables in gear
shift see Section 7.5.10.1
Care for suspension seat post see Section 7.4.9.1
Care for rims see Section 7.4.13
Check rims see Section 7.5.1.3
Check rim hooks see Section 7.5.1.3
Care for fork see Section 7.4.2
Check gear shift see Section 7.5.10
Care for pannier rack see Section 7.4.3
Check chain see Section 7.5.8
Check derailleur gears See Section 7.5.9.1 and
Section 7.5.10.3
Check chain tension see Section 7.5.9
Check wheel see Section 7.5.1
Care for handlebars see Section 7.4.7
Check handlebars see Section 7.5.5
Check light see Section 7.5.3
Care for hub see Section 7.4.11
Check hub gear see Section 7.5.9.2
Check nipple holes see Section 7.5.1.4
Care for pedals see Section 7.4.15
Check pedal see Section 7.5.7
Care for frame see Section 7.4.1
Check belt tension see Section 7.5.9
Check saddle see Section 7.5.6
Care for shifter see Section 7.4.14.2
Care for rear derailleur
articulated shaft see Section 7.4.14.1
Care for rear derailleur jockey
wheels see Section 7.4.14.1
Care for kickstand see Section 7.4.5
Check kickstand stability see Section 7.5.15
Check steering headset see Section 8.5.6
Servicing the stem see Section 7.4.6
Checking the stem see Section 7.5.4
Yearly or every 2,000 km
Adjust hub with cone bearing see Section 8.5.6
Check nipple well (every 1,000
hours or every 2,000 km) see Section 7.5.1.5
Check list for tasks to do every six months (or every 1,000
km)
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 157
Cleaning, servicing and maintenance
Crash caused by brake failure
Oil or lubricant on the brake disc in a disc brake
or on the rim of a rim brake can cause the brake
to fail completely. This may cause a crash with
serious injuries.
Never allow oil or lubricant to come into
contact with the brake disc or brake linings or
on the rim of a rim brake.
If the brake linings have come into contact with
oil or lubricant, contact specialist dealer to
have the components cleaned or replaced.
Apply the brakes a few times to test them after
cleaning, servicing or repair.
The brake system is not designed for use on a
pedelec which is placed on its side or turned
upside down. The brake may not function
correctly as a result. This can cause a crash,
which may result in injuries.
If the pedelec is placed on its side or turned
upside down, apply the brakes a couple of
times before setting off to ensure they work as
normal.
The brake seals are unable to withstand high
pressures. Damaged brakes can fail and cause
an accident with injury.
Never clean the pedelec with a pressure
washer or compressed air.
Take great care when using a hosepipe. Never
point the water jet directly at the seal section.
WARNING
!
Crash and falling caused by unintentional
activation
There is a risk of injury if the drive system is
activated unintentionally.
Remove the battery before cleaning.
Notice
Water may enter the inside of the bearings if you
use a steam jet. This dilutes the lubricant inside,
the friction increases and, as a result, the
bearings are permanently damaged in the long
term. Water may also penetrate the electric
components and damage them permanently.
Never clean pedelec with a pressure washer,
water jet or compressed air.
Greased parts, such as the seat post, the
handlebars or the stem, may no longer be safely
and reliably clamped.
Never apply grease or oil to parts which are
clamped.
Harsh cleaning agents such as acetone,
methylene and trichloroethylene and solvents
such as thinners, alcohol and corrosion protection
can attack pedelec components and damage
them permanently.
Use approved bicycle or pedelec cleaning and
care products only.
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 158
Cleaning and servicing
7.1 Before each ride
Complying with these cleaning instructions is the
only way to reduce wear on components, increase
the operating hours and guarantee safety.
7.1.1 Checking the guards
The chain or belt guards, mudguards or the motor
cover can break off and go missing when the
pedelec is transported or parked outside.
Check that all guards are in place.
7.1.2 Checking the frame
Check frame for cracks, warping and damage
to the paintwork.
If there are any cracks, warping or damage to
the paintwork, remove the pedelec from
service. Contact specialist dealer.
7.1.3 Checking the fork
Check fork for cracks, warping, tarnished
components, leaked oil and damage to the
paintwork. Also look at hidden parts on the
underside.
If there are any cracks, warping, tarnished
components, leaked oil or damage to the
paintwork, remove the pedelec from service.
Contact specialist dealer.
7.1.4 Checking the rear frame damper
Check rear frame damper for cracks, warping,
tarnished components, leaked oil and damage
to the paintwork. Also look at hidden parts on
the underside.
If there are any cracks, warping, tarnished
components, leaked oil or damage to the
paintwork, remove the pedelec from service.
Contact specialist dealer.
7.1.5 Checking the pannier rack
1Hold onto pedelec by its frame. Hold onto
pannier rack with the other hand.
2Move the pannier rack backwards and
forwards to check that all screw connections
are firmly in place.
Tighten loose screws.
Attach loose baskets permanently with a
basket bracket or cable ties.
7.1.6 Checking the guards
1Hold onto pedelec by its frame. Hold onto
mudguard rack with the other hand.
2Move the mudguard backwards and forwards
to check that all screw connections are firmly in
place.
Tighten loose screws.
7.1.7 Checking wheel concentricity
Lift the front and rear wheels one after the
other. and spin each wheel when lifted.
If the wheel is loose or is crooked when it turns,
take pedelec out of service. Contact specialist
dealer.
7.1.8 Checking the quick releases
Check quick releases to ensure that all quick
releases are firmly in their fully closed end
position.
If a quick release is not firmly in its closed end
position, open quick release and place in its
end position.
If the quick release cannot be firmly placed in
its end position, take pedelec out of service.
Contact specialist dealer.
7.1.9 Checking the suspension seat post
Deflect and let the suspension seat post
rebound.
If you hear unusual noises when the
suspension seat post deflects and rebounds,
or it yields without any resistance, take pedelec
out of service. Contact specialist dealer.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 159
Cleaning and servicing
7.1.10 Checking the bell
1Press the bell button downwards.
2Let button spring back.
If you do not hear a clear, distinct ring of the
bell, replace bell. Contact specialist dealer.
7.1.11 Checking the handles
Check the handles are firmly in place.
Screw loose handles firmly into place.
7.1.12 Checking the USB cover
If featured, check the position of the cover on
the USB port on a regular basis and adjust if
necessary.
7.1.13 Checking the lighting
1Switch light on.
2Check that the front and rear lights come on.
If the front and rear lights do not come on, take
pedelec out of service. Contact specialist
dealer.
7.1.14 Checking the brake
1Pull both brake levers when stationary.
2Push the pedals.
If no resistance is generated in the usual brake
lever position, take pedelec out of service.
Contact specialist dealer.
If the brake is losing fluid, take pedelec out of
service. Contact specialist dealer.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 160
Cleaning and servicing
7.2 After each ride
Complying with these cleaning instructions is the
only way to reduce wear on components, increase
the operating hours and guarantee safety.
The following items should be ready for use to
clean the pedelec after each ride:
7.2.1 Cleaning the lights and reflectors
1Clean front light, rear light and reflectors with a
damp cloth.
7.2.2 Cleaning the suspension fork
1Remove dirt and deposits from the stanchions
and deflector seals with a damp cloth. Check
the stanchions for dents, scratches, staining or
leaking oil.
2Lubricate the dust seals and stanchions with a
few drops of silicone spray.
3Care for the suspension fork after cleaning.
7.2.3 Caring for the suspension fork
Treat dust seals with fork oil.
7.2.4 Cleaning the pedals
Clean pedals with a brush and soapy water.
7.2.5 Cleaning the brake
Clean dirt on the rim and brake components
with a slightly dampened cloth.
7.2.6 Cleaning the suspension seat post
Clean dirt on the articulated joints with a
slightly dampened cloth immediately after a
ride.
7.2.7 Cleaning the rear frame damper
Clean dirt on the articulated joints with a
slightly dampened cloth immediately after a
ride.
Tool Cleaning agent
Cloth Bucket Water Dish-washing
liquid
Brush Fork oil
Table 52: Required tools and cleaning agents after each ride
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 161
Cleaning and servicing
7.3 Basic cleaning
Complying with these basic cleaning instructions
is the only way to reduce wear on components,
increase the operating hours and guarantee
safety.
The following are required for basic cleaning:
Remove battery and on-board computer before
thorough cleaning.
7.3.1 On-board computer and control
panel
Carefully clean the on-board computer and
control panel with a soft, damp cloth.
7.3.2 Rechargeable battery
1Clean the battery electrical connections with a
dry cloth or paintbrush only.
2Wipe off the decorative sides with a damp
cloth.
7.3.3 Motor
Carefully clean the motor on the outside with a
soft, damp cloth.
Tool Cleaning agent
Gloves Toothbrush Water Lubricant
Cloth Paintbrush Dish-
washing
liquid
Brake
cleaner
Sponge Watering
can Degreaser Leather
cleaner
Brushes Bucket
Table 53: Required tools and cleaning agents for basic
cleaning
Notice
If water enters the on-board computer, it will be
permanently damaged.
Never immerse the on-board computer in
water.
Never use a cleaning agent.
Risk of fire and explosion due to penetration by
water
The battery is only protected from simple spray
water. Penetration by water can cause a short
circuit. The battery may self-ignite and explode.
Keep contacts dry and clean.
Never immerse the battery in water.
Notice
Never use a cleaning agent.
Notice
If water enters the motor, it will be permanently
damaged.
Never open the motor.
Never immerse the motor in water.
Never use cleaning agents.
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 162
Cleaning and servicing
7.3.4 Frame, fork, pannier rack, guards
and kickstand
1Soak the components with dish-washing
detergent if the dirt is thick and ingrained.
2After leaving it to soak for a short time, remove
the dirt and mud with a sponge, brush and
toothbrushes.
3Rinse off the components with water from a
watering can.
4Wipe away oil stains with a degreaser.
7.3.5 Stem
1Clean stem with a cloth and soapy water.
2Rinse off component with water from a
watering can.
7.3.6 Handlebars
1Clean handlebars, including handles and all
gears or twist grips, with a cloth and soapy
water.
2Rinse off component with water from a
watering can.
7.3.7 Handles
1Clean handles with sponge, water and soapy
water.
2Rinse off component with water from a
watering can.
3Care for rubber handles after cleaning (see
Section 7.4.8).
7.3.7.1 Leather handles
Leather is a natural product and has similar
properties to human skin. Regular cleaning and
care help to prevent leather dehydrating, fading or
becoming brittle or stained.
1Remove dirt with a soft, damp cloth.
2Remove stubborn stains with a leather cleaner.
3Care for leather handles after cleaning (see
Section 7.4.8.2).
7.3.8 Seat post
1Clean seat post with a cloth and soapy water.
2Rinse off component with water from a
watering can.
3Wipe away any grease or assembly paste
residue with a cloth and degreaser.
7.3.9 Saddle
1Clean the saddle with lukewarm water and a
cloth dampened with soapy water.
2Rinse off component with water from a
watering can.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 163
Cleaning and servicing
7.3.9.1 Leather saddle
Leather is a natural product and has similar
properties to human skin. Regular cleaning and
care help to prevent leather dehydrating, fading or
becoming brittle or stained.
1Remove dirt with a soft, damp cloth.
2Remove stubborn stains with a leather cleaner.
3Care for leather saddle after cleaning (see
Section 7.4.10).
7.3.10 Tyres
1Clean tyres with a sponge, a brush and soap
cleaner.
2Rinse off component with water from a
watering can.
3Remove any embedded chips and small
stones.
7.3.11 Spokes and spoke nipples
1Clean spokes from the inside to the outside
with a sponge, brush and soapy water.
2Clean rim with a sponge.
3Rinse off component with water from a
watering can.
4Care for spoke nipples after cleaning (see
Section 7.4.12).
7.3.12 Hub
1Put on protective gloves.
2Remove dirt from hub with a sponge and soapy
water.
3Rinse off component with water from a
watering can.
4Wipe off oily dirt with a degreaser and a cloth.
7.3.13 Switching elements
1Clean gear shift, shift cables and transmission
with water, a brush and dish-washing
detergent.
2Rinse off component with water from a
watering can.
7.3.13.1 Shifter
Carefully clean shifter with a damp, soft cloth.
7.3.14 Cassette, chain wheels and front
derailleur
1Put on protective gloves.
2Spray the cassette, the chain wheels and the
front derailleur with a degreasing agent.
3Clean coarse dirt with a brush after soaking for
a short time.
4Wash down all parts with dish-washing
detergent and a toothbrush.
5Rinse off component with water from a
watering can.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 164
Cleaning and servicing
7.3.15 Brake
7.3.15.1 Brake lever
Carefully clean the brake levers with a damp,
soft cloth.
7.3.16 Brake disc
1Put on protective gloves.
2Spray brake disc with brake disc cleaning
spray.
3Wipe with a cloth.
7.3.17 Belt
1Dampen a cloth with soapy water. Place the
cloth on the belt.
2Hold and apply slight pressure while slowly
turning the rear wheel, so the belt passes
through the cloth.
7.3.18 Chain
Place newspaper or paper towels underneath to
collect dirt.
1Slightly dampen a brush with dish-washing
liquid. Brush both sides of the chain.
2Dampen a cloth with soapy water. Place the
cloth on the chain.
3Hold and apply slight pressure while slowly
turning the rear wheel, so the chain passes
through the cloth.
4Wipe off oily, dirty chains thoroughly with a
cloth and degreaser.
5Care for chain after cleaning (see
Section 7.4.16).
7.3.18.1 Chain with all-round chain guard
Clean water hole on the chain guard lower
surface.
Care for chain after cleaning (see
Section 7.4.16.1).
Notice
Protect brake disc against lubricants and
grease from hands.
Notice
Never use aggressive (acid-based) cleaners,
rust removers or degreasers when cleaning
the belt.
Notice
Never use aggressive (acid-based) cleaners,
rust removers or degreasers when cleaning
the chain.
Never use gun oil or rust remover spray.
Never use chain cleaning devices or chain
cleaning baths.
Have chain with all-round guard cleaned and
cared for during maintenance.
Notice
The chain guard must be removed before
cleaning. Contact specialist dealer.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 165
Cleaning and servicing
7.4 Servicing
Complying with these servicing instructions is the
only way to reduce wear on components, increase
the operating hours and guarantee safety.
Figure 178: Diagram showing wear, operating hours (x)
vs. material erosion (y)
The service life (3) of an optimally serviced drive
chain (1) is almost three times as long with
lubrication (A) compared to a drive chain (2)
lubricated on an irregular basis.
These tools and cleaning agents are required for
servicing:
7.4.1 Frame
1Dry frame with a cloth.
2Spray frame with spray wax and leave to dry.
3Wipe away any wax residue with a cloth.
7.4.2 Fork
1Dry frame with a cloth.
2Spray care oil on frame and leave to dry.
3Wipe away any wax residue with a cloth.
Tool Cleaning agent
Cloth Toothbrush Frame wax
spray Silicone or Teflon
oil
Acid-free
lubricating
grease Fork oil
Teflon spray Spray oil
Chain oil Leather care
product
Table 54: Required tools and cleaning agents for servicing
2
y
x
1
3
A
A
A
Notice
Hard wax polish and protection wax are
particularly resistant on gloss paintwork.
These car accessory retail products are
unsuitable for matt paint finishes.
Try wax spray out on a small spot before
application.
Notice
Hard wax polish and protection wax are
particularly resistant on gloss paintwork.
These car accessory retail products are
unsuitable for matt paint finishes.
Try wax spray out on a small spot before
application.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 166
Cleaning and servicing
7.4.3 Pannier rack
1Dry pannier rack with a cloth.
2Spray pannier rack with spray wax and leave to
dry.
3Wipe pannier rack with a cloth.
4Protect chafing points on panniers with
adhesive film. Replace worn adhesive film.
5Care for coil springs with silicone spray or wax
spray from time to time.
7.4.4 Mudguard
Depending on the mudguard material’s
requirements, apply hard wax polish, metal
polish or plastic care product as per the
product instructions.
7.4.5 Servicing the kickstand
1Dry kickstand with a cloth.
2Spray kickstand rack with spray wax and leave
to dry.
3Wipe down kickstand with a cloth.
4Lubricate the kickstand joints with spray oil.
7.4.6 Stem
1Spray painted and polished metal surfaces
with wax spray and leave to dry.
2Wipe away any wax residue with a cloth.
3Apply silicone or Teflon oil to the stem shaft
tube and the quick release lever pivot point
with a cloth.
4If you have a Speedlifter Twist, also apply oil to
the unlocking bolt using the groove in the
Speedlifter body.
5Apply a little acid-free lubricant grease
between the stem quick release lever and the
sliding piece to reduce the quick release lever
operating force.
6If you have a stem with a cone clamp, apply a
new protective layer of assembly paste onto
the stem and fork steerer contact point once a
year.
7.4.7 Handlebars
1Spray painted and polished metal surfaces
with wax spray and leave to dry.
2Wipe away any wax residue with a cloth.
7.4.8 Handle
7.4.8.1 Rubber handles
1Apply talcum powder to sticky rubber handles.
Notice
Never apply talcum powder to leather or foam
handles.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 167
Cleaning and servicing
7.4.8.2 Leather handle
Standard leather care products keep leather
smooth and resistant, brighten its appearance and
improve or replace stain protection.
1Try leather care product out on a less visible
spot before use.
2Care for leather handles with a leather care
product.
7.4.9 Seat post
1Carefully preserve screw connections with wax
spray. In doing so, ensure that no wax is
applied to the metal contact surfaces.
2Replace the assembly paste protective layer
on the metal contact surfaces on the seat post
and seat tube every year.
7.4.9.1 Suspension seat post
1Lubricate articulated joints with spray oil.
2Deflect and let the suspension seat post
rebound five times. Remove any surplus
lubricant with a clean cloth.
7.4.9.2 Carbon seat post
1Take out the carbon seat post.
2Remove old assembly paste with a cloth.
3Apply new assembly paste with a cloth.
4Re-insert the carbon seat post.
7.4.10 Leather saddle
Standard leather care products keep leather
smooth and resistant, brighten its appearance and
improve or replace stain protection.
1Try leather care product out on a less visible
spot before use.
2Care for leather saddle from below with a
leather care product. Only care for the top of
leather saddles with a leather care product if
they are badly worn and dried-out.
3Avoid wearing light-coloured trousers after
care due to staining.
7.4.11 Hub
1Apply wax spray especially around the spoke
holes. In doing so, ensure that no wax is
applied to brake parts.
2Treat rubber seals with a cloth with one or two
drops of silicone spray. Never use oil if you
have disc brakes.
7.4.12 Spoke nipples
1Apply wax spray onto the spoke nipples from
the rim side.
2Treat heavily corroded spoke nipples with a
drop of penetrating of special care oil.
7.4.13 Rim
Care for chrome rims, stainless steel rims and
polished aluminium with chrome or metal
polish. Never care for the brake surface with
polish.
Notice
If carbon seat posts are used in an aluminium
frame without protective assembly paste, rain and
puddle water can cause contact corrosion. It may
then take a great deal of force to remove the seat
post. The carbon seat post may break as a result.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 168
Cleaning and servicing
7.4.14 Gear shift
7.4.14.1 Rear derailleur articulated shafts and
jockey wheels
Treat front and rear derailleur articulated
shafts and jockey wheels with Teflon spray.
7.4.14.2 Shifter
Lubricate articulated joints and mechanical
parts which are accessible from outside with a
few drops of spray oil or precision mechanics
oil.
7.4.15 Pedal
1Treat pedals with spray oil. In doing so, ensure
that no lubricant is applied to the pedal
surfaces.
2Lubricate seals and mechanical parts sparingly
with a few drops of oil.
3Remove any surplus lubricant with a clean
cloth.
4Spray metal foot rests with silicone spray.
7.4.16 Caring for the chain
Place newspaper or paper towels underneath to
collect chain oil.
1Lift rear wheel.
2Turn the crank briskly in an anti-clockwise
direction.
3Use slight finger pressure to the chain oil bottle
to apply a wafer-thin thread of oil to the chain
links. The faster the crank is turned, the thinner
the threads of oil will be.
Figure 179: Lubricating the chain
4Remove excessive chain oil with a cloth. If you
apply too much oil, it will make the chain all the
dirtier at a later point in time.
5Leave chain oil to penetrate into the chain links
for a few hours or overnight.
7.4.16.1 Caring for the chain and all-round chain
guard
Place newspaper or paper towels underneath to
collect chain oil.
1Lift rear wheel.
2Turn the crank briskly in an anti-clockwise
direction.
3Use slight finger pressure to the chain oil bottle
to apply a wafer-thin thread of oil onto the
chain links through the oil hole on the upper
surface of the chain guard. The faster the crank
is turned, the thinner the threads of oil will be.
4Remove excessive chain oil with a cloth. If you
apply too much oil, it will make the chain all the
dirtier at a later point in time.
5Leave chain oil to penetrate into the chain links
for a few hours or overnight.
Notice
Never treat shifters with degreaser or
penetrating oil spray.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 169
Cleaning and servicing
7.4.17 Caring for the brake
7.4.17.1 Caring for the brake
Lubricate articulated joints and mechanical
parts which are accessible from outside with a
few drops of spray oil or precision mechanics
oil.
7.4.18 Lubricating the eightpins seat post
tube
Use a 2.5 ml syringe to carefully fill eightpins
Fluid V3 very slowly into the lubricating nipple
on the outer tube.
Figure 180: Lubricating the seat post tube
Notice
Never treat brake levers with degreaser or
penetrating oil spray.
Notice
Fill a maximum of 2.5 ml since otherwise the
reservoir inside will overflow and the oil will
spill into the frame.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 170
Cleaning and servicing
7.5 Maintenance
The following tools are required for maintenance:
7.5.1 Wheel
1Hold pedelec.
2Hold onto the front or rear wheel and try to
move the wheel sideways. In doing so, check
to see if the wheel nuts or quick releases move.
If the wheel, the wheel nut or quick release
moves sideways, take pedelec out of service.
Contact specialist dealer.
3Lift pedelec slightly. Turn front or rear wheel. In
doing so, check whether the wheel deflects
sideways or outwards.
If the wheel deflects sideways or outwards,
take pedelec out of service. Contact specialist
dealer.
7.5.1.1 Checking the tyre pressure
Tyres are wear parts and wear away due to
fatigue, storage, environmental influences or
mechanical impacts. Only optimum tyre pressure
will guarantee effective protection against
punctures, lower rolling resistance, a longer
service life and greater safety.
Air loss
Even the most airtight tube will lose pressure on a
continuous basis since the air pressures in a
pedelec tyre are significantly higher and the wall
thicknesses significantly finer than in a car tyre.
Pressure loss of 1 bar per month can be regarded
as normal. During this process, the pressure loss
is significantly faster at high pressures and
significantly slower at low pressures.
Checking tyre pressure
The permitted pressure range is indicated on the
side of the tyre.
Figure 181: Tyre pressure in bar (1) and psi (2)
Verify tyre pressure against the value noted in
the pedelec pass every 10 days as a minimum.
Gloves
Ring spanners
8 mm, 9 mm, 10 mm, 13 mm, 14 mm and 15 mm
Torque wrench
Working range 5–40 Nm
by.schulz handlebars:
TORX® bits: 4 mm, 5 mm and 6 mm
If not:
Hexagon bits: 4 mm, 5 mm and 6 mm
Hexagon socket spanner
2 mm, 2.5 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm, 6 mm and
8mm
Spline nut socket
T25
Cross-recess screwdriver
Slotted-head screwdriver
Table 55: Tools required for maintenance
Notice
If the tyre pressure is too low in the tyre, the tyre
does not achieve its load bearing capacity. The
tyre is not stable and may come off the rim.
If the tyre pressure is too high, the tyre may
burst.
2
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 171
Cleaning and servicing
Dunlop valve
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
The tyre pressure cannot be measured on the
simple Dunlop valve. The tyre pressure is
therefore measured in the filling hose when
pumping slowly with the bicycle pump.
It is recommendable to use a bicycle pump with a
pressure gauge.
1Unscrew and remove the valve cap.
2Undo the rim nuts.
3Connect the bicycle pump.
4Pump up the tyre slowly and pay attention to
the tyre pressure in the process.
5Correct the tyre pressure to meet the specified
value in the Pedelec pass.
6If the tyre pressure is too high, unfasten the
union nut, let air out and re-tighten the union
nut.
7Remove the bicycle pump.
8Screw the valve cap tight.
9Screw the rim nut gently against the rim with
the tips of your fingers.
Correct tyre pressure if necessary (see
Section 6.5.8).
Schrader valve
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
It is recommended to use the air pump at a filling
station. Older and easy bicycle pumps are
unsuitable for filling tyres via a Schrader valve.
1Unscrew and remove the valve cap.
1Undo the rim nuts.
2Attach the bicycle pump.
3Pump up the tyre slowly and pay attention to
the tyre pressure in the process.
The tyre pressure has been adjusted as per the
specifications.
4Remove the bicycle pump.
5Screw the valve cap tight.
6Screw the rim nut gently against the rim with
the tips of your fingers.
Correct tyre pressure if necessary (see
Section 6.5.8).
Presta valve
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
It is recommendable to use a bicycle pump with a
pressure gauge. The operating instructions for
the bicycle pump must be adhered to.
1Unscrew and remove the valve cap.
2Open the knurled nut around four turns.
3Carefully apply the bicycle pump so that the
valve insert is not bent.
4Pump up the tyre slowly and pay attention to
the tyre pressure in the process.
5Correct the tyre pressure as per the
specifications on the tyre.
6Remove the bicycle pump.
7Tighten the knurled nut with your fingers.
8Screw the valve cap tight.
9Screw the knurled nut gently against the rim
with the tips of your fingers.
Correct tyre pressure if necessary (see
Section 6.5.8).
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 172
Cleaning and servicing
7.5.1.2 Checking the tyres
The tread is far less important for bicycle tyres
than it is for car tyres, for example. Consequently,
tyres can still be used with a worn tread with the
exception of tyres on mountain bikes.
1Check the tread wear. The tyre is worn if the
anti-puncture protection or the carcass cords
are visible.
Since resistance to punctures also depends on
the thickness of the tread, it may make sense
to change the tyre at an earlier stage.
Figure 182: Tyre without tread which can still be used (1)
and tyre with puncture protection showing through (2),
which needs to be replaced
2Check the side walls for wear. If there are any
cracks or tears, the tyre must be replaced.
Figure 183: Examples of fatigue cracks (1) and ageing
cracks (2)
Replacing a wheel requires considerable
mechanical expertise. If a tyre is worn, it needs
to be replaced at a specialist dealer's.
1
2
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 173
Cleaning and servicing
7.5.1.3 Checking the rims
Rims are wear parts and wear away due to
fatigue, mechanical impacts, environmental
influences or due to braking if rim brakes are
used.
Check the rim well for wear.
The rims of a rim brake with invisible wear
indicator are worn as soon as the wear
indicator becomes visible in the area of the rim
joint.
The rims with visible wear indicator are worn as
soon as the black, all-round groove on the pad
friction surface is no longer visible. We
recommend that you also replace the rims with
every second brake lining replacement.
We recommend that you also replace the rims
at the same time as every second brake lining
replacement.
7.5.1.4 Checking the nipple holes
Nipples cause fatigue and stress on the edge of
the nipple hole.
Check whether there are cracks on the edge of
the nipple hole.
If there are cracks on the edge of the nipple hole,
contact your specialist dealer.
7.5.1.5 Checking the nipple well
The nipple holes can weaken the tyre bed.
Check to see if cracks are emerging from the
nipple holes.
If there are cracks radiating from the nipple
hole, contact your specialist dealer.
7.5.1.6 Checking the rim hooks
Mechanical impacts can warp the rim hooks.
There is no longer a guarantee that a tyre can be
fitted safely if this is the case.
Check for twisted rim hooks.
Replace rims with twisted rim hooks. Never
repair the rim with pliers and bend the hook
back.
7.5.1.7 Checking the spokes
Press spokes slightly together with your thumb
and index finger. Check to ensure that the
tension is the same for all spokes.
Contact your specialist dealer if the spokes are
loose or are tensioned differently.
Crash caused by a worn rim
A worn rim can break and block the wheel. This
may cause a crash with serious injuries.
Check rim wear on a regular basis.
Take pedelec out of service if the rim has any
cracks or warping. Contact specialist dealer.
WARNING
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 174
Cleaning and servicing
7.5.2 Checking the brake system
The maintenance interval for the brake depends
on how often it is used and the weather
conditions. If the pedelec is used under extreme
conditions such as rain, dirt or high mileage,
maintenance must be performed more frequently.
7.5.2.1 Checking the hand brake
1Check whether all screws in the handbrake are
firmly in place.
Tighten loose screws.
2Check whether the brake lever is torsionally
rigid on the handlebars.
Tighten loose screws.
3Check that there is a gap of at least 1 cm
between the handbrake lever and the handle
when the brake lever is fully applied.
Adjust the grip distance if the gap is too narrow
(see Section 6.5.9.6, Section 6.5.9.4 or Section
6.5.9.5).
4Check the braking effect by pedalling while
pulling the brake lever.
If the braking power is too weak, adjust the
brake pressure point (see Section 6.5.9.4).
Contact your specialist dealer if the pressure
point cannot be reached.
7.5.2.2 Checking the hydraulic system
1Push the brake lever and check whether any
brake fluid leaks out of the lines, connections
or on the brake linings.
If any brake fluid leaks from anywhere, take
pedelec out of service. Contact specialist
dealer.
2Push brake lever and hold several times.
If you are unable to clearly detect the pressure
point and it changes, the brake needs to be
bled. Contact specialist dealer.
7.5.2.3 Checking the Bowden cables
1Pull on the brake lever several times. Check
whether the Bowden cables get stuck or they
make scraping noises.
2Check the physical condition of the Bowden
cables for visible damage and check to see if
wire strands are broken.
Have defective Bowden cables replaced.
Contact specialist dealer.
Crash caused by brake failure
Worn brake discs and brake linings and a lack of
hydraulic fluid in the brake line reduce the braking
power. This may cause a crash with serious
injuries.
Check brake disc, brake linings and the
hydraulic brake system regularly. Contact
specialist dealer.
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 175
Cleaning and servicing
7.5.2.4 Checking the disc brake
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Checking the brake linings
Check that the brake linings are no less than
1.8 mm wide at any point and there are no less
than 2.5 mm between the brake lining and
supporting plate.
Figure 184: Checking the brake lining when fitted with the
help of the transport safety wear gauge
1Check brake linings for damage and thick dirt.
Have damaged or very dirty brake linings
replaced. Contact specialist dealer.
2Push brake lever and hold.
3In doing so, check whether the transport safety
wear gauge can fit between the brake lining
supporting plates.
If the transport safety wear gauge fits between
the supporting plates, the brake linings have
not reached their wear limit. Contact your
specialist dealer if they are worn.
Checking the brake discs
Put on gloves as the brake disc is very sharp.
1Take hold of brake disc and joggle it gently to
check whether the brake disc is positioned
against the wheel free of backlash.
2Check that the brake linings move uniformly
and symmetrically back towards the brake disc
when you pull and release the brake lever.
If the brake disc can be moved or the brake
linings move erratically, contact your specialist
dealer.
3Check that the brake disc is no less than
1.8 mm thick at any point.
If the brake disc is under the wear limit and is
less than 1.8 mm thick, the brake disc must be
replaced. Contact specialist dealer.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 176
Cleaning and servicing
7.5.2.5 Checking the back-pedal brake
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
There are sharp corners and edges on the back-
pedal brake. Wear gloves.
1Hold and check counter support to ensure it is
firmly attached to rear frame down tube.
Tighten screw into the counter support if it is
loose.
2Carry out brake test. Listen for noises while
doing so.
If braking with the backpedal makes noises,
contact specialist dealer.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 177
Cleaning and servicing
7.5.2.6 Checking the rim brake
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Checking the brake linings
We recommend that you also replace the rims
at the same time as every second brake lining
replacement.
1Check whether the brake linings are worn
evenly on both sides of the rim.
2Check whether the brake linings are worn to
one side.
If the brake linings are worn unevenly or worn
to one side, contact your specialist dealer.
3Check whether the brake lining wear limit has
been reached.
If the brake linings have reached their wear
limit, they need to be changed. Contact
specialist dealer.
4Check whether the brake linings can be
twisted.
If the brake linings twist, the brake lining
bracket is defective and must be replaced.
Contact specialist dealer.
5Check that the brake linings move uniformly
and symmetrically towards the rim when you
pull and release the brake lever.
If the brake linings move unevenly, contact
your specialist dealer.
Checking the rim braking surface for wear
The side wall is more prone to wear in rim brakes.
The wear depends on the stress loads during
rides. Dirt between the brake lining and rim and
strong braking forces can have an impact on the
service life.
The rim must be replaced if the wall is less than
0.9 mm thick. If deep grooves are visible, rim
hooks will warp towards the outside or the braking
power will change, contact your specialist dealer
as soon as possible.
Replacing a rim requires considerable
mechanical expertise. Only a specialist dealer
should carry out this task.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 178
Cleaning and servicing
7.5.3 Checking the lighting
1Check the cable connections on the front and
rear lights for damage and corrosion and
ensure they are firmly in position.
If cable connections are damaged or corroded,
or are not firmly in positioned. take pedelec out
of service. Contact specialist dealer.
2Switch light on.
3Check that the front and rear lights come on.
If the front or rear lights do not come on, take
pedelec out of service. Contact specialist
dealer.
4Place pedelec 5 m from the wall.
5Stand the pedelec up straight. Hold the
handlebars straight with both hands. Do not
use the kickstand.
.
Figure 185: Light positioned too high (1), correctly (2) and too low (3)
6Check the position of the light beam.
If the light is positioned too high or too low,
adjust riding light (see Section 6.5.16).
I
II
III
1
2
1
2
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 179
Cleaning and servicing
7.5.4 Checking the stem
The stem and quick release system must be
inspected at regular intervals. The specialist
dealer should adjust them if they require
adjustment.
If the hexagon socket head screw is also
loosened, the headset backlash also needs to
be adjusted. Medium-strength thread locker,
such as Loctite blue, then needs to be applied
to the loosened screws and the screws
tightened as per specifications.
Check metal contact surfaces on cone, stem
clamping screw and fork steerer for corrosion.
Take pedelec out of service if there is any wear
or signs of corrosion. Contact specialist dealer.
7.5.5 Check the handlebars
1Take hold of handlebars with both hands on the
handles.
2Move handlebars up and down and press to tilt.
If the handlebars move, contact specialist
dealer.
3Place front wheel in position where it can't
move sideways (e.g. in a bike stand).
4Hold handlebars firmly with both hands.
5Check if the handlebars are able to twist
against the front wheel.
If the handlebars can move, contact your
specialist dealer.
7.5.6 Checking the saddle
1Hold saddle firmly.
2Check whether the saddle twists, tilts or can be
pushed in one direction or other.
If the saddle twists, tilts or can be pushed in
one direction or other, adjust the saddle (see
Section xxx).
Contact your specialist dealer if the saddle
cannot be fixed into position.
7.5.7 Checking the seat post
1Take seat post out of the frame.
2Check seat post for cracks and corrosion.
3Reinsert seat post.
4Check pedal.
5Hold pedal and try to move it sideways toward
the inside or outside. In doing so, observe
whether the crank arm or bearing move
sideways.
If the pedal, crank arm or crank bearing moves
sideways, fasten screw on the pedal crank
rear.
6Hold pedal and try to move it upwards and
downwards vertically. In doing so, observe
whether the pedal, crank arm or crank bearing
moves vertically.
If the pedal, crank arm or crank bearing moves
vertically, fasten screw.
7.5.8 Checking the chain
Check chain for rust or warping.
Replace a rusted chain since it will not be able
to withstand the tensile loads from the drive.
Contact your specialist retailer.
7.5.9 Checking the chain and belt tension
7If a hub gear is fitted, the rear wheel must be
pushed backwards and forwards to tighten the
chain. Contact specialist dealer.
Notice
Excessive chain tension increases wear. If the
chain tension is too low, there is a risk that the
chain will slip off the chain wheels.
Check the chain tension once a month.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 180
Cleaning and servicing
7.5.9.1 Checking the derailleur gears
The chain is tensioned by the rear derailleur in
pedelecs with derailleur gears.
1Place the pedelec on stand.
2Check to see if the chain is sagging (visual
inspection).
3Gently press the rear derailleur forwards to
check whether it moves and whether it goes
back into position by itself.
If the chain is sagging or the rear derailleur
does not go back into position by itself, contact
your specialist dealer.
7.5.9.2 Checking the hub gear
In the case of pedelecs with a hub gear or back-
pedal brake, the chain or the belt is tensioned by
a eccentric bearing in the bottom bracket axle.
Special tools and specialist knowledge are
required to tension the chain. Contact specialist
dealer.
Remove the chain guard on pedelecs with a
circumferential chain guard.
1Place the pedelec on stand.
2Check the chain and belt tension in three or
four positions, turning the crank a full
revolution.
Figure 186: Checking the chain tension
If the chain or the belt can be pushed more than
2 cm, the chain will need to be re-tensioned.
Contact specialist dealer.
If the chain or belt can only be pushed up and
down less than 1 cm, you will need to the chain
or belt slightly. Contact specialist dealer.
The ideal chain and belt tension has been
achieved if the chain can be pushed between a
maximum of 10 and 15 mm in the middle
between the pinion and the toothed wheel. The
crank must also turn without resistance.
7.5.10 Checking the gear shift
1Check whether all gear shift components are
free of damage.
2Contact your specialist dealer if components
are damaged.
3Place the pedelec on stand.
4Turn the pedal crank clockwise.
5Switch through all speeds.
6Check that pedelec can switch through all
speeds without making unusual noises.
7Adjust the gear shift if gears can not be
changed correctly.
7.5.10.1 Electric gear shift
1Check the cable connections for damage and
corrosion and ensure they are firmly in
position.
If cable connections are loose, damaged or
corroded, contact your specialist dealer.
7.5.10.2 Mechanical gear shift
1Change gear a number of times. Check
whether the Bowden cables get stuck or they
make scraping noises.
2Check the physical condition of the Bowden
cables for visible damage and check to see if
wire strands are broken.
Have defective Bowden cables replaced.
Contact specialist dealer.
7.5.10.3 Checking the derailleur gears
1Check that there is clearance between the
chain tensioner and spokes.
If there is no clearance or the chain scrapes
against the spokes or tyres, contact your
specialist dealer.
2Check that there is clearance between the
chain or rear derailleur and spokes.
If there is no clearance or the chain scrapes
against the spokes, contact your specialist
dealer.
10-15 mm
10-15 mm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 181
Cleaning and servicing
7.5.11 Adjusting gear shift
7.5.11.1 ROHLOFF hub
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1Check whether the shift cable tension is set in
such a way that there is a perceptible play of
around 5 mm when the shift handle is turned.
2Adjust the shift cable tension by turning the
tension adjuster.
Unscrew the tension adjuster to increase the
shift cable tension.
Tighten the tension adjuster to decrease the
shift cable tension.
Figure 187: The tension adjuster on Rohloff hub versions
with internal switch control is located on the tension
counter support
Figure 188: The tension adjuster on Rohloff hub versions
with external switch control is located on the cable box
positioned on the left-hand side
3If the marking and numbers on the shift handle
to no longer coincide after the gear shift is
adjusted, tighten one of the tension adjusters
and screw out the other tension adjuster to the
same extent.
7.5.12 Bowden-cable-operated gear shift,
single-cable
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Adjust the play on the adjusting sleeves on the
shifter housing to ensure a smooth gear shift.
Figure 189: Adjusting sleeve (1) for the single-cable,
Bowden--cable-operated gear shift with shifter
housing (2), example
7.5.13 Bowden-cable-operated gear shift,
dual-cable
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
For a smooth gear shift, set the adjusting
sleeves underneath the chain stay on the
frame.
The shift cable has around 1 mm play when it
is pulled out gently.
Figure 190: Adjusting sleeves (2) on two alternative
versions (A and B) of a dual-cable, Bowden-cable-
operated gear shift on the chain stay (1)
2
1
1
A
B
1
2
2
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 182
Cleaning and servicing
7.5.14 Bowden-cable-operated twist grip,
dual-cable
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
For a smooth gear shift, set the adjusting
sleeves on the shifter housing.
There is noticeable play of 2 to 5 mm (1/2 gear)
when you turn the twist grip.
Figure 191: Twist grip with adjusting sleeves (1) and play
in the gear shift (2)
7.5.15 Checking kickstand stability
1Place the pedelec on a slight elevation of 5 cm.
2Extend kickstand.
3Jolt pedelec to check stability.
If the pedelec topples over, tighten screws or
change height of the kickstand.
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 183
Maintenance
8 Maintenance
8.1 Initial inspection
Vibrations produced while riding can cause
screws and springs that were tightened during
manufacture of the pedelec to settle or come
loose.
Arrange an appointment for the initial
inspection directly when purchasing the
pedelec.
Have the initial inspection entered and
stamped in the maintenance book.
8.2 Maintenance
You must have your specialist dealer perform
maintenance every six months as a minimum.
This is the only way to ensure that the pedelec
remains safe and fully functional.
Maintenance tasks require technical expertise,
special tools and special lubricants. The pedelec
may become damaged if the stipulated
maintenance intervals and procedures are not
carried out. This is why only specialist dealers
may carry out maintenance.
Contact your specialist dealer and arrange an
appointment.
Enter and stamp maintenance tasks in the
maintenance book.
8.3 Component-specific
maintenance tasks
High-quality components require extra
maintenance. Maintenance tasks require
technical expertise, special tools and special
lubricants. The pedelec may become damaged if
the stipulated maintenance intervals and
procedures are not carried out. This is why only
specialist dealers may carry out maintenance.
Correct maintenance on the fork not only
guarantees a long service life, but also ensures
optimal performance.
Each maintenance interval shows the maximum
cycling hours for the required type of maintenance
that the component manufacturer recommends.
Optimise performance with shorter
maintenance intervals, depending on use,
terrain and environmental conditions.
After 200 km or 4 weeks after purchase
Carrying out the initial inspection, see
Section 8.4.
every six months
Perform maintenance.
Enter any components with extra
maintenance requirements with their
corresponding maintenance intervals into the
maintenance book when the pedelec is
purchased.
Inform the buyer of the additional
maintenance schedule.
Enter and stamp maintenance tasks in the
maintenance book.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 184
Maintenance
Suspension fork maintenance intervals
Suntour suspension fork
Maintenance 1 Every 50 hours
Maintenance 2 Every 100 hours
FOX suspension fork
Maintenance Every 125 hours
or once a year
RockShox suspension fork
Maintenance of stanchions for:
Paragon™, XC™ 28, XC 30, 30™,
Judy®, Recon™, Sektor™, 35™*,
Bluto™, REBA®, SID®, RS-1™,
Revelation™, PIKE®, Lyrik™, Yari™,
BoXXer
Every 50 hours
Maintenance of spring and damper
unit for:
Paragon, XC 28, XC 30,30 (2015 and
earlier), Recon (2015 and earlier), Sektor
(2015 and earlier), Bluto (2016 and
earlier), Revelation (2017 and earlier),
REBA (2016 and earlier), SID (2016 and
earlier), RS-1 (2017 and earlier),
BoXXer (2018 and earlier)
Every 100 hours
Maintenance of spring and damper unit
for:
30 (2016+), Judy (2018+), Recon
(2016+), Sektor (2016+), 35 (2020+)*,
Revelation (2018+), Bluto (2017+), REBA
(2017+), SID (2017+), RS-1 (2018+),
PIKE (2014+), Lyrik (2016+), Yari
(2016+), BoXXer (2019+)
Every 200 hours
Maintenance intervals for suspension seat post
by.schulz suspension seat post
Maintenance After the first
250 km; every
1,500 km after
that
Suntour suspension seat post
Maintenance Every 100 hours
or once a year
eightpins suspension seat post
Clean wiper 20 hours
Clean slide bushing 40 hours
Replace slide bushing, wiper and felt strip 100 hours
Seal service for gas pressure spring 200 hours
RockShox dropper post
Venting of remote control lever and/or
maintenance of lower seat post unit for:
Reverb™ A1/A2/B1, Reverb Stealth A1/
A2/B1/C1*
Every 50 hours
Detach lower seat post, clean brass pins,
check and replace if necessary and apply
new grease for
Reverb AXS™ A1*
Every 50 hours
Venting of remote control lever and/or
maintenance of lower seat post unit for:
Reverb B1, Reverb Stealth B1/C1*,
Reverb AXS™ A1*
Every 200 hours
Complete maintenance of seat post for:
Reverb A1/A2, Reverb Stealth A1/A2 Every 200 hours
Complete maintenance of seat post for:
Reverb B1, Reverb Stealth B1 Every 400 hours
Complete maintenance of seat post for:
Reverb AXS™ A1*, Reverb Stealth C1* Every 600 hours
FOX suspension seat post
Maintenance Every 125 hours
or once a year
All other suspension seat posts
Maintenance Every 100 hours
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 185
Maintenance
Maintenance intervals for rear frame damper
RockShox rear frame damper
Service air chamber assembly Every 50 hours
Service damper and spring Every 200 hours
FOX rear frame damper
Maintenance Every 125 hours
or once a year
Suntour rear frame damper
Complete shock absorber service
including damper reassembly and air seal
replacement
Every 100 hours
Maintenance intervals for hub
SHIMANO 11-speed hub
Internal oil change and maintenance 1,000 km after
start of use,then
every 2 years or
2,000 km
All other SHIMANO gear hubs
Lubricate internal components Once a year or
every 2,000 km
ROHLOFF Speedhub 500/14
Clean cable box and grease cable drum
interior Every 500 km
Oil change Every 5,000 km
or at least once a
year
Pinion
Maintenance 1
Check drive elements and replace if
necessary
Clean cable pulley, slide surfaces and
gear box interior, epicyclic wheels, etc.
thoroughly and grease generously
Every 500 km
Maintenance 2
Replace chain rings and change oil Every 10,000 km
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 186
Maintenance
8.4 Carry out initial inspection
Vibration produced while riding can cause screws
and springs that were tightened during
manufacture of the pedelec to settle or come
loose.
Check quick release system is fixed in position.
Check all tightening torques of screws and
screw connections.
Incorrectly fastened screws may come loose due
to impact. The stem may no longer be firmly fixed
in its position as a result. This will cause a crash
with injuries.
Check the handlebars and the stem quick release
system are firmly in position after the first two
hours of riding.
Injury due to damaged brakes
Special tools and specialist knowledge are
required to repair the brakes. Incorrect or
unauthorised assembly can damage the brakes.
This may lead to an accident with serious injuries.
Only specialist dealers may carry out repairs
on brakes.
Only carry out work or changes, such as
dismantling, sanding or painting, which are
permitted and described in the brake operating
instructions.
Injury to the eyes
Problems may arise if the settings are not made
properly and you may sustain serious injuries as
a result.
Always wear safety glasses during
maintenance work.
Crash and falling caused by unintentional
activation
There is a risk of injury if the drive system is
activated unintentionally.
Remove the battery before maintenance.
Crash caused by material fatigue
If the service life of a component has expired, the
component may suddenly fail. This may cause a
crash with injuries.
Have the specialist dealer carry out basic
cleaning of the pedelec every six months,
preferably at the same time as the required
servicing work.
WARNING
!
CAUTION
!
Hazard for the environment due to toxic
substances
The brake system contains toxic and
environmentally harmful oils and lubricants. Such
fluids will contaminate if they enter the sewers or
groundwater.
Dispose of lubricants and oils left over after
repairs in an environmentally responsible way
in accordance with statutory regulations.
Notice
The motor is maintenance-free and only qualified
specialist personnel may open it.
Never open the motor.
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 187
Maintenance
8.5 Maintenance instructions
Complying with these maintenance instructions is the only way to reduce wear on components, increase
the operating hours and guarantee safety.
Diagnosis and documentation of current status
Components Fre-
quency Description Criteria Measures if rejected
Inspection Tests Maintenance Accept-
ance Rejection
Chassis
Frame
Once a
month Dirt …Section 7.3.4 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
6 months Servicing …Section 7.4.1 O.K. Untreated Wax
6 months Check for damage –
fracture, scratches Section 8.6.1 …O.K. Damage
detected Take pedelec out of
service, new frame as
specified in parts list
Carbon frame
(optional)
Once a
month Dirt Section 7.3.4 …O.K. Dirt Cleaning
6 months Servicing …Section 7.4.1 O.K. No wax Wax
6 months Damage to paint-
work Section 8.6.1.1 ... O.K. Damage to
paintwork Apply paint
6 months Damage from
impact Section 8.6.1.1 ... O.K. Damage from
impact Take pedelec out of
service, new frame as
specified in parts list
RockShox
Rear frame
damper
(optional)
6 months Check for damage,
corrosion, fracture See Rock-
Shox compo-
nent
maintenance
instructions
Maintenance as
specified by
manufacturer
Air chamber
assembly group,
damper and
spring.
O.K. Damage
detected New rear frame
damper as specified
in parts list
FOX
Rear frame
damper
(optional)
6 months Check for damage,
corrosion, fracture ... Send to FOX O.K. Damage
detected New rear frame
damper as specified
in parts list
Suntour
Rear frame
damper
(optional)
6 months Check for damage,
corrosion, fracture See Suntour
component
maintenance
instructions
Maintenance as
specified by
manufacturer
Complete shock
absorber service
including
damper reas-
sembly and air
seal replace-
O.K. Damage
detected New rear frame
damper as specified
in parts list
Steering system
Handlebars
Once a
month Cleaning ... Section 7.3.6 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
6 months Wax ... Section 7.4.7 O.K. Untreated Wax
6 months Check mount
fastening Section 7.5.5 ... O.K. Loose, rust Retighten screws;
new handlebars as
specified in parts list if
necessary
Stem
Once a
month Cleaning …Section 7.3.5 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
6 months Wax …Section 7.4.6 O.K. Untreated Wax
6 months Check mount
fastening Section 7.5.4
and Section
8.6.4
…O.K. Loose, rust Retighten screws;
new stem as specified
in parts list if neces-
sary
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 188
Maintenance
Inspection Tests Maintenance Accept-
ance Rejection
Handles
Once a
month Cleaning …Section 7.3.7 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
Once a
month Care for Section 7.4.8 …O.K. Untreated Talcum powder
before
each ride Wear; check if
fastened securely Section 7.1.11 …O.K. Missing,
wobbles Retighten screws,
new handles and
coverings as speci-
fied in parts list
Steering
headset
6 months Clean and check for
damage …Clean, lubricate
and adjust O.K. Unclean Clean and lubricate
Fork (rigid)
6 months Check for damage,
corrosion, fracture Dismount,
check, lubri-
cate, refit
…O.K. Damage
detected New fork as specified
in the parts list
Carbon fork
(optional)
6 months Check for damage,
corrosion, fracture …Maintenance as
specified by
manufacturer
Lubrication, oil
change as speci-
fied by manufac-
turer
O.K. Damage
detected New fork as specified
in the parts list
Suntour
suspension
fork
(optional)
6 months Check for damage,
corrosion, fracture …Maintenance as
specified by
manufacturer
Lubrication, oil
change as speci-
fied by manufac-
turer
O.K. Damage
detected New fork as specified
in the parts list
FOX suspen-
sion fork
(optional)
6 months Check for damage,
corrosion, fracture ... Send to FOX O.K. Damage
detected New rear frame
damper as specified
in parts list
RockShox
suspension
fork
(optional)
6 months Check for damage,
corrosion, fracture …Maintenance as
specified by
manufacturer
Lubrication, oil
change as speci-
fied by manufac-
turer
O.K. Damage
detected New fork as specified
in the parts list
Spinner
suspension
fork
(optional)
6 months Check for damage,
corrosion, fracture …Maintenance as
specified by
manufacturer
Lubrication, oil
change as speci-
fied by manufac-
turer
O.K. Damage
detected New fork as specified
in the parts list
Wheel
Wheel
before
each ride Concentricity Section 7.1.7 …O.K. Not straight Re-mount wheel
6 months Assembly Section 7.5.1 …O.K. Loose Adjust quick release
Tyres
Once a
month Cleaning Section 7.3.10 …O.K. Dirt Cleaning
once a
week Tyre pressure Section 7.5.1.1 …O.K. Tyre pressure
too low/too
high
Adjust tyre pressure
10 days Wear Section 7.3.10 …O.K. Worn profile New tyre as specified
in the parts list
Components Fre-
quency Description Criteria Measures if rejected
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 189
Maintenance
Inspection Tests Maintenance Accept-
ance Rejection
Rims
6 months Wax …Section 7.4.13 O.K. Untreated Wax
6 months Wear Section 7.5.1.3 …O.K. Defective rim New rim as specified
in the parts list
once a
month Wear on brake
surface Section 7.5.2.6 …O.K. Worn brake
surface New rim as specified
in the parts list
Spokes
Once a
month Cleaning …Section 7.3.11 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
3 months Check tension Section 7.5.1.3 …O.K. Loose, tension
varies Re-tension spokes or
new spokes as speci-
fied in parts list
6 months Check rim hooks Section 7.5.1.3 …O.K. Twisted rim
hooks New rim as specified
in the parts list
Spoke nipples
Once a
month Cleaning …Section 7.3.11 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
Once a
month Wax …Section 7.4.12 O.K. Untreated Wax
Nipple holes 6 months Check for cracks Section 7.5.1.4 …O.K. Cracks New rim as specified
in the parts list
Nipple well Once a
year Check for cracks Section 7.5.1.5 …O.K. Cracks New rim as specified
in the parts list
Hub
Once a
month Cleaning …Section 7.3.12 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
Once a
month Care for …Section 7.4.11 O.K. Untreated Treat
Hub with cone
bearing
(optional)
Once a
month Cleaning …Section 7.3.12 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
Once a
month Care for …Section 7.4.11 O.K. Untreated Treat
6 months Check mount
fastening # … O.K. Loose, rust Retighten screws;
new handlebars as
specified in parts list if
necessary
Once a
year Adjust …O.K. Not adjusted New position
Hub gear
(optional)
Once a
month Cleaning …Section 7.3.12 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
Once a
month Care for …Section 7.4.11 O.K. Untreated Treat
6 months Check mount
fastening # … O.K. Loose, rust Retighten screws;
new handlebars as
specified in parts list if
necessary
6 months Functional check Section 7.5.9.2 …incorrect
switching Readjust hub
Saddle and seat post
Saddle
Once a
month Cleaning Section 7.3.9 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
6 months Check mount
fastening Section 7.5.6 …O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Leather
saddle
(optional)
Once a
month Cleaning …Section 7.3.9.1 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
6 months Care for …Section 7.4.10 O.K. Untreated Leather wax
6 months Check mount
fastening Section 7.5.6 …O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Components Fre-
quency Description Criteria Measures if rejected
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 190
Maintenance
Inspection Tests Maintenance Accept-
ance Rejection
Seat post
Once a
month Cleaning …Section 7.3.8 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
6 months Care for …O.K. Untreated Leather wax
6 months Complete clean,
check fastening and
paint protection film
…Section 8.6.8 O.K. Loose Tighten screws, new
paint protection film
Carbon seat
post
(optional)
Once a
month Cleaning …Section 7.3.8 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
6 months Care for …Section 7.4.9.2 O.K. Untreated Assembly paste
6 months Complete clean,
check fastening and
paint protection film
…Section 8.6.8.1 O.K. Loose Tighten screws, new
paint protection film;
new seat post as
specified in parts list if
damaged
Suspension
seat post
(optional)
Once a
month Cleaning … # O.K. Dirt Cleaning
6 months Care for …Section 7.4.9.1 O.K. Untreated Oils
100
hours or 6
months
Complete clean,
check fastening and
paint protection film
Section 8.6.8 …O.K. Loose Tighten screws, new
paint protection film
by.schulz
suspension
seat post
(optional)
After the
first
250 km;
every
1500 km
after that
Complete clean,
check fastening and
paint protection film,
lubricate
Section 8.6.8.2 …O.K. Loose Tighten screws, new
paint protection film;
new seat post as
specified in parts list if
damaged
Suntour
suspension
seat post
Every
100 hours
or
once a
year
Complete clean,
check fastening and
paint protection film,
lubricate
Section 8.6.8.3 …O.K. Loose Tighten screws, new
paint protection film;
new seat post as
specified in parts list if
damaged
eightpins
NGS2
Suspension
seat post
20
hours Refill oil …Section 7.4.18 O.K. No oil Refill oil
20
hours Clean wiper O.K. Dirt Cleaning
40
hours Cleaning the slide
bushing O.K. Dirt Cleaning
100
hours Replace slide
bushing, wiper and
felt strip
O.K. No replace-
ment Replace
200
hours Seal service for gas
pressure spring O.K. No service Carry out the service
eightpins H01
Suspension
seat post
20
hours Refill oil …Section 7.4.18 O.K. No oil Refill oil
20
hours Clean wiper O.K. Dirt Cleaning
40
hours Cleaning the slide
bushing O.K. Dirt Cleaning
100
hours Replace slide
bushing, wiper and
felt strip
O.K. No replace-
ment Replace
200
hours Seal service for gas
pressure spring O.K. No service Carry out the service
Components Fre-
quency Description Criteria Measures if rejected
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 191
Maintenance
Inspection Tests Maintenance Accept-
ance Rejection
RockShox
suspension
seat post
50
hours Venting …See manufac-
turer O.K.
50
hours Cleaning …See manufac-
turer O.K.
200
hours Venting …See manufac-
turer O.K.
200
hours Complete mainte-
nance …See manufac-
turer O.K.
400
hours Complete mainte-
nance …See manufac-
turer O.K.
600
hours Complete mainte-
nance …See manufac-
turer O.K.
FOX suspen-
sion seat post
Every
125 hours
or
once a
year
Complete mainte-
nance See manufac-
turer At the manufac-
turer FOX ... ...
Safety guards
Belt or chain
guards
6 months Attachment Check mount
fastening …O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Guard 6 months Attachment Check mount
fastening …O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Motor cover 6 months Attachment Check mount
fastening …O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Brake system
Brake lever 6 months Attachment Check mount
fastening …O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Brake fluid
6 months Check fluid level Depending on
time of year …O.K. Too little Top up brake fluid;
take Pedelec out of
service if damaged;
new brake hoses
Brake linings 6 months Brake linings, brake
discs and rims Check for
damage …O.K. Damage
detected New brake linings,
brake discs and rims
Back-pedal
brake braking
armature
6 months Attachment Check mount
fastening …O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Brake system 6 months Attachment Check mount
fastening …O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Lighting system
Light cabling 6 months Connections,
correct wiring Check …O.K. Cable defec-
tive, no light New cabling
Rear light
6 months Side light Functional
check …O.K. No constant
light New rear light as
specified in parts list;
replace if necessary
Front light
6 months Side light, daytime
riding light Functional
check …O.K. No constant
light New front light as
specified in parts list;
replace if necessary
Reflectors
6 months All complete, state,
fastening Check …O.K. Damaged or
not all
complete
New reflectors
Components Fre-
quency Description Criteria Measures if rejected
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 192
Maintenance
Inspection Tests Maintenance Accept-
ance Rejection
Drive/gear shift
Chain/
cassette/
pinion/chain-
ring
6 months Check for damage Check for
damage …O.K. Damage Refasten if necessary
or replace as speci-
fied in parts list
Chain guard/
spoke guard
6 months Check for damage Check for
damage …O.K. Damage Replace as specified
in parts list
Bottom
bracket axle/
crank
6 months Check mount
fastening Check mount
fastening …O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Pedals 6 months Check mount
fastening Check mount
fastening …O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Shifter 6 months Check mount
fastening Check mount
fastening …O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Shift cables
6 months Check for damage Check for
damage …O.K. Loose and
defective Adjust shift cables;
new shift cables if
necessary
Front derail-
leur
6 months Check for damage Check for
damage …O.K. Gear shift diffi-
cult or not
possible
Adjust
Rear derail-
leur
6 months Check for damage Check for
damage …O.K. Gear shift diffi-
cult or not
possible
Adjust
Electric drive
On-board
computer
6 months Check for damage Check for
damage …O.K. No screen,
defective
screen display
Restart, test battery,
new software or new
on-board computer,
decommissioning,
Electric drive
control panel
6 months Check drive for
damage Check drive for
damage …O.K. No response Restart; contact
control panel manu-
facturer, new control
panel
Tachometer
6 months Calibration Speed meas-
urement …O.K. Pedelec travel-
ling 10 % too
fast/slow
Take pedelec out of
service until the
source of the error is
found
Cabling
6 months Visual inspection Visual inspec-
tion …O.K. Failure in
system,
damage,
kinked cables
New cabling
Recharge-
able battery
6 months First examination see Section
Assembly …O.K. Error message Contact battery manu-
facturer; take out of
service, new battery
Battery mount
6 months Firmly in position,
lock, contacts Check mount
fastening …O.K. Loose; lock
doesn't close,
no contacts
New battery mount
Motor
6 months Visual inspection
and mount Check mount
fastening …O.K. Damage, loose Refasten motor,
contact motor manu-
facturer, new motor;
take out of service
Software 6 months Check version Check soft-
ware version …In latest
version Not latest
version Import update
Components Fre-
quency Description Criteria Measures if rejected
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 193
Maintenance
Technical inspection, checking safety, test ride
Inspection Tests Maintenance Accept-
ance Rejection
Miscellaneous
Pannier rack
before
each ride Stability Section 7.1.5 …O.K. Loose Firm
Once a
month Dirt …Section 7.3.4 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
6 months Servicing …Section 7.4.3 O.K. Untreated Wax
6 months Check fastening
and paint protection
film
Section 8.5.2 …O.K. Loose Tighten screws, new
paint protection film
Kickstand
Once a
month Dirt …Section 7.3.4 O.K. Dirt Cleaning
6 months Servicing …Section 7.4.5 O.K. Untreated Wax
6 months Attachment Section 7.5.15 …O.K. Loose Retighten screws
6 months Stability Section 7.5.15 …O.K. Tips over Change kickstand
height
Bell
before
each ride Sound Functional
check
Section 7.1.10
…O.K. No ring, too
quiet, missing New bell as specified
in the parts list
Attachments
(optional)
6 months Attachment Check mount
fastening …O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Components Fre-
quency Description Criteria Measures if rejected
Components Description Criteria Measures if rejected
Assembly/inspection Tests Acceptance Rejection
Brake system 6 months Functional check O.K. No full braking; braking
distance too long Locate defective part in brake
system and correct
Gear shift under
operating load
6 months Functional check O.K. Problems when shifting
gear Readjust gear shift
Suspension
components (fork,
shock absorber,
seat post)
6 months Functional check O.K. Suspension too deep or
no longer exists Locate defective component
and correct
Electric drive
6 months Functional check O.K. Loose connection,
problems when riding,
accelerate
Locate defective part in
electric drive and correct
Lighting system 6 months Functional check O.K. No continuous light, not
bright enough Locate defective part in
lighting system and correct
Test ride 6 months Functional check No strange
noises Strange noises Locate source of noise and
correct
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 194
Maintenance
8.5.1 Servicing the frame
1Check frame for cracks, warping and damage
to the paintwork.
If there are any cracks, warping or damage to
the paintwork, remove the pedelec from
service. New frame as specified in the parts
list.
8.5.1.1 Servicing the carbon frame
You need to distinguish between scratches on
the paintwork and impacts if the carbon frame
paintwork is damaged.
Ask customer what caused the damage.
Examine damage with a magnifying glass to
see if fibres are permanently damaged.
Damage to paintwork
1Gently sand paintwork damage with 600-grit
sandpaper.
2Smooth edges.
3Apply one or two coats of repair paint.
Damage from impact
There may be damage to the laminate beneath the
paintwork in the case of impact damage. The
frame may break even under light stress.
1Take pedelec out of service.
2Send frame to a fibre composite repair
company or purchase new frame as specified
in the parts list.
8.5.2 Checking the pannier rack
Scratches, cracks and breaks may appear on the
pannier rack caused by the panniers and cargo
boxes.
1Examine pannier rack for scratches, cracks
and breaks.
Replace damaged pannier racks.
If the paint protection film is missing or has
worn away, affix a new paint protection film.
8.5.3 Servicing axle with quick release
1Undo quick release.
2Fasten quick release.
3Check the position and clamping force of the
quick release lever.
Crash caused by unfastened quick
release
A faulty or incorrectly installed quick release may
become caught in the brake disc and block the
wheel. This will cause a crash.
Install the front wheel quick release lever on
the opposite side to the brake disc.
Crash caused by faulty or incorrectly
installed quick release
The brake disc becomes very hot during
operation. Parts of the quick release may become
damaged as a result. The quick release comes
loose. This will cause a crash with injuries.
The front wheel quick release lever and the
brake disc must be situated on opposite sides.
Crash caused by incorrectly set clamping
force
Excessively high clamping force will damage the
quick release and cause it to lose its function.
Insufficient clamping force will cause a
detrimental transmission of force. The
suspension fork or the frame may break. This will
cause a crash with serious injuries.
Never fasten a quick release using a tool (e.g.
hammer or pliers).
Only use the clamping lever with the specified
set clamping force.
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 195
Maintenance
The quick release lever is flush with the lower
housing.
You should be able to see slight impression on
the palm of your hand when you close the quick
release lever.
Figure 192: Adjusting the quick release clamping force
4Use a 4 mm hexagon socket spanner to adjust
the clamping lever clamping force if required.
5Check the quick release lever position and
clamping force again.
Figure 193: Adjusting the quick release clamping force
8.5.4 Maintaining the stem
Incorrectly fastened screws may come loose due
to impact. The stem may no longer be firmly fixed
in its position as a result. This will cause a crash
with injuries.
Check the handlebars and the stem’s quick
release are firmly in position.
8.5.5 Servicing the gear hub
8.5.5.1 Adjusting the hub with cone bearing
In the case of hubs with a cone bearing, the
bearing shell fixed in the hub cone body rotates
with its larger ball bearing surfaces around the
inner bearing cone resting against the fork end.
The outer bearing shell rotating around the
stationary bearing cone is subject to considerably
more evenly distributed loads thanks to its larger
ball running surface.
1Attach a small, red colour marking on the lock
nut.
2Turn the wheel axle 40° to 90° every 1,000 to
2,000 km.
The bearing cone is subject to evenly
distributed loads.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 196
Maintenance
8.5.6 Servicing the steering headset
1Remove fork.
2Clean steering headset. If it is very dirty, flush
the bearing with cleaning agents such as WD-
40 or Karamba.
3Check steering headset for damage.
If the steering headset is damaged, replace
steering headset as specified in the parts list.
4Grease steering headset and bearing seat with
highly viscous, water-repellent grease (e.g.
Dura Ace special grease by SHIMANO).
5Re-fit fork with steering headset as per fork
instructions.
8.5.7 Servicing the fork
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1Remove fork.
2Check fork for cracks, warping and damage to
the paintwork.
If there are any cracks, warping or damage to
the paintwork, remove the pedelec from
service. New fork as specified in the parts list.
3Clean inside and exterior.
4Grease fork.
5Install fork.
Injury due to explosion
The air chamber is pressurised. If the air system
in a faulty suspension fork is maintained, it can
explode and cause serious injury.
Wear safety goggles, protective gloves and
safety clothing when assembling or carrying
out maintenance on the bicycle.
Release the air for the air chambers. Detach
all air insert fitments.
Never service or dismantle a suspension fork
if it has not completely rebounded.
Hazard for the environment due to toxic
substances
The suspension fork contains toxic and
environmentally harmful oils and lubricants. Such
fluids will contaminate if they enter the sewers or
groundwater.
Dispose of lubricants and oils left over after
repairs in an environmentally responsible way
in accordance with statutory regulations.
WARNING
!
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 197
Maintenance
8.5.7.1 Servicing the carbon suspension fork
1Remove fork.
2Check fork for cracks, warping and damage to
the paintwork.
3You need to distinguish between scratches on
the paintwork and impacts if the carbon
suspension fork paintwork is damaged.
Ask customer what caused the damage.
Examine damage with a magnifying glass to
see if fibres are permanently damaged.
Damage to paintwork
1Gently sand paintwork damage with 600-grit
sandpaper.
2Smooth edges.
3Apply one or two coats of repair paint.
Damage from impact
There may be damage to the laminate beneath the
paintwork in the case of impact damage. The fork
may break even under light stress.
Take pedelec out of service. New fork as
specified in the parts list.
The fork must be free from any defects.
4Clean inside and exterior.
5Grease fork.
6Install fork.
8.5.7.2 Servicing the suspension fork
1Remove fork.
2Check fork for cracks, warping and damage to
the paintwork.
If there are any cracks, warping or damage to
the paintwork, remove the pedelec from
service. New fork as specified in the parts list.
3Dismantle suspension fork.
4Lubricate dust seals and slide bushings.
5Check torques.
6Clean inside and exterior.
7Grease fork.
8Install fork.
9Adjust suspension fork (see Section 6.3.14).
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 198
Maintenance
8.5.8 Servicing seat post
1Remove seat post from the frame.
2Clean seat post on the inside and outside.
3Examine seat post rack for scratches, cracks
and breaks.
Replaced damaged seat post as specified in
the parts list.
If the paint protection film is missing or has
worn away, affix a new paint protection film.
4Fit seat post as per height specifications in the
pedelec pass.
8.5.8.1 Servicing the carbon seat post
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
You need to distinguish between scratches on
the paintwork and impacts if the carbon seat post
paintwork is damaged.
Ask customer what caused the damage.
Examine damage with a magnifying glass to
see if fibres are permanently damaged.
Damage to paintwork
1Gently sand paintwork damage with 600-grit
sandpaper.
2Smooth edges.
3Apply one or two coats of repair paint.
Damage from impact
There may be damage to the laminate beneath the
paintwork in the case of impact damage. The
carbon seat post may break even under light
stress.
1Take pedelec out of service.
2New carbon seat post as specified in the parts
list.
Intoxication from lubrication oil
The lubrication oil for eightpins seat posts is toxic
if touched or inhaled.
Always wear safety goggles and nitrile gloves
when working with lubrication oil.
Lubricate seat post in the open air or in a well-
ventilated room only.
Avoid skin coming into contact with lubrication
oil. Wear nitrile gloves when lubricating,
cleaning and servicing the vehicle.
Use an oil catchment tray under the section
where the seat post is serviced.
WARNING
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 199
Maintenance
8.5.8.2 by.schulz suspension seat post
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1Remove seat post from the frame.
2Remove safety and protective cover.
3Clean seat post on the inside and outside.
4Examine seat post rack for scratches, cracks
and breaks.
Replaced damaged seat post as specified in
the parts list.
If the paint protection film is missing or has
worn away, affix a new paint protection film.
5Lubricate screws in the parallel suspension.
6Reinsert seat post as per height specifications
in the pedelec pass. Check screws for correct
tightening torques.
7Put on safety and protective cover.
8.5.8.3 Suntour suspension seat post
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1Remove seat post from the frame.
2Remove safety and protective cover.
3Examine seat post rack for scratches, cracks
and breaks.
Replaced damaged seat post as specified in
the parts list.
If the paint protection film is missing or has
worn away, affix a new paint protection film.
4Undo pre-tensioning adjuster and take out
steel spring.
5Clean seat post on inside and outside.
6Grease seat post on inside with SR SUNTOUR
no. 9170-001.
7Lubricate pressure roller with bike chain oil.
Lubricate articulated joints in parallel
suspension with bike chain oil.
Figure 194: SR Suntour suspension seat post lubrication
points
8Reinsert seat post as per height specifications
in the pedelec pass.
9Check screws for correct tightening torques.
10 Put on safety and protective cover.
Tightening torque G1
M8 seat clamping screw
M5 fixing grub screws 20-24 Nm
3 Nm
Tightening torque G2
M6 seat clamping screw
M5 fixing grub screws 12-14 Nm
3 Nm
Tightening torque
Seat clamping screw
M5 fixing grub screws 15-18 Nm
3 Nm
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 200
Maintenance
8.5.8.4 eightpins NGS2 seat post
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Removing the seat post
1Use a 2.5 mm hex key to turn the height
adjustment 45° anti-clockwise and move to the
“Open position”.
Figure 195: Moving height adjustment to the “Open
position”
2Activate operating lever. Pull seat post
upwards at the same time and remove
completely.
Figure 196: Pulling the seat post out
3Activate operating lever. Hold Bowden cable
fastener and pull or tilt forwards. Remove outer
sleeve from the seat post remote control.
Figure 197: Removing the cartridge
4Use a 5 mm to undo Postpin axle and pull out.
Figure 198: Undoing the Postpin axle
5Pull cartridge from the piston rod while pushing
the outer sleeve into the frame at the same
time to help.
Figure 199: Pulling the cartridge out
6Hold the cartridge with one hand at the height
of the mechanism and pull the Bowden cable
straight down with the other.
7Hold the white actuating slide in the locking
mechanism with your thumb.
8Carefully push the Bowden cable upwards with
the other hand and detach it.
Figure 200: Detaching the Bowden cable
Figure 201: Bowden cable position
Notice
Never pull Bowden cable forwards at an angle.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 201
Maintenance
9Pull out the outer sleeve end cap from the
counter support on the Postpin interface on the
seat post.
Figure 202: Pulling the end cap out
Removing the outer sleeve and slide bushing
1Use a 3 mm hex spanner to remove
attachment screw on the outer sleeve.
2Detach outer sleeve by pulling upwards with
your hand.
3Pull slide bushing tube out of the seat tube.
Figure 203: Removing the outer sleeve and slide bushing
Caring for the outer sleeve
1Detach spring washer or outer sealing ring.
Figure 204: Removed spring washer
2Carefully remove the wiper from the groove.
Figure 205: Removing the wiper
3Use a small, sharp object to look for and
remove the end of the felt ring.
4Carefully take out the felt ring.
5Remove felt ring.
6Clean or replace felt ring.
Figure 206: Removing the felt ring
7Clean inside of outer sleeve with a cloth.
Figure 207: Cleaning the outer sleeve
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 202
Maintenance
8Carefully re-insert dry felt ring with one end in
the designated groove.
9Unfurl felt ring within the outer sleeve, so that
it lies on the groove.
10 Carefully press felt ring into the groove by
hand. Ensure that both ends are fully pressed
in and meet and that they do not overlap and
are not twisted.
Figure 208: Inserting the felt ring
11 Insert cleaned or new wiper in the upper
groove.
12 Stretch spring washer over the wiper.
Figure 209: inserting and fastening the wiper
Cleaning the slide bushing
1Clean the slide bushing tube with a damp cloth.
Figure 210: Cleaning the slide bushing tube
Increasing the air pressure
1Use 3 mm hex spanner to unscrew valve cap.
Figure 211: Unscrewing the valve cap
2Screw valve adapter into mounting interface
from below.
Figure 212: Screwing the valve adapter in
3Use compression pump to pump the cartridge
up to 24 bar.
Figure 213: Pumping the cartridge up
4Unscrew pump and valve adapter.
Notice
Do not squash. The slide bushing tube wall is
very thin.
Notice
Screwing in the valve adapter will not open the
valve. No pressure is displayed. The pressure is
displayed when you start pumping.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 203
Maintenance
5Use a 3 mm hex spanner to screw the valve lid
back on and tighten with a maximum of 0.5 Nm.
Figure 214: Fastening the cartridge valve lid
Setting the slipper clutch
1Use 3 mm hex spanner to unscrew valve cap.
Figure 215: Unscrewing the valve cap
2Secure the mounting interface against twisting
with a 24 mm open-end spanner.
Figure 216: Securing against twisting
3Set the torque to 18 Nm with a torque wrench
and a 6 mm hex bit with a shaft length of at
least 25 mm. Rotate clockwise.
.
Figure 217: Setting in a clockwise direction
4Use a 3 mm hex spanner to screw the valve lid
on and tighten with a maximum of 0.5 Nm.
Figure 218: Fastening the cartridge valve lid
Notice
The cartridge is not airtight without the valve
lid.
Notice
The cartridge is not airtight without the valve
lid.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 204
Maintenance
installing the outer sleeve and slide bushing
1Carefully push slide bushing tube into the seat
tube.
2Press outer sleeve downwards with your hand.
3Use a 3 mm hex spanner to fasten the
attachment screw on the outer sleeve.
Figure 219: Fitting the slide bushing and outer sleeve
Fitting the seat post
1Attach the outer sleeve end cap in the
counterholder on the seat post frame interface.
Figure 220: Attaching the end cap
2Use both thumbs to push white activation slider
downwards and hold with one thumb.
Figure 221: Pushing the white activation slider
downwards
3Attach Bowden cable with the nipple to the
bracket for the Bowden cable.
Figure 222: Correct and incorrect Bowden cable
4Carefully push cartridge into the seat tube. Pull
the Bowden cable out of the frame to help.
Figure 223: Fastening the cartridge valve lid
5Look at the frame interface through the hole in
the Postpin. Push the cartridge down until the
Postpin mounting interface on the seat post
reaches the Postpin interface on the frame.
6If necessary, turn the seat post slightly and
push it to the correct position so that the
Postpin axle can be inserted.
Figure 224: Fastening the cartridge valve lid
7Use a 5 mm hex spanner to screw in Postpin
axle and fasten slightly.
8Use torque spanner to tighten Postpin axle with
8Nm.
Figure 225: Fastening the Postpin axle
Notice
Never pull Bowden cable forwards at an angle.
Notice
Before continuing with installation, ensure that
the Bowden cable is fed into the middle of the
longitudinal guide. If the Bowden cable is off-
centre, it will be pinched by the tube.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 205
Maintenance
9Carefully insert slide bushing tube into the seat
tube.
Figure 226: Inserting the slide bushing tube into the seat
tube
10 Place outer sleeve on the seat tube and push
downwards firmly.
Figure 227: Attaching the outer sleeve
11 Turn the outer sleeve so that the outer sleeve
mounting hole is aligned with the fastening
hole in the frame.
12 Use a 3 mm hex spanner to fasten the M5
attachment screw into the outer sleeve.
13 Tighten screw gently with a maximum torque of
0.5 Nm.
The screw must easily screw into the outer
sleeve without any resistance. If this is not the
case, the hole in the frame is not aligned with
the mounting hole in the outer sleeve. Turn
outer sleeve into the right position.
Figure 228: Fastening the outer sleeve
14 Feed height adjustment clamp into the seat
tube.
The two height adjustment clamp guides are in
the longitudinal grooves inside the seat post.
Figure 229: Feeding the height adjustment clamp in
15 Push the seat post carefully downwards and
feed into the wiper.
Figure 230: Pushing the seat post downwards
16 Move operating lever and press seat post
downwards to the required height as per the
values in the pedelec pass.
Figure 231: Setting the seat post height
17 Turn the height adjustment mechanism 45° in
a clockwise direction and place in the “Closed
position”.
Figure 232: Closing the height adjustment
Notice
Never let the seat post tube collide with the
piston rod. There is a risk of scratches and
damage to the piston rod. This will causes loss
of air.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 206
Maintenance
8.5.8.5 eightpins H01 seat post
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
Removing the seat post
1Use a 5 mm hex spanner to unscrew the
Postpin axle.
Figure 233: Undoing the seat post
Detach Bowden cable from the on-bar remote
control on the seat post.
Detach the operating lever from the handlebars
in the case of under-bar-remote control on the
seat post. Activate operating lever. Hold
Bowden cable fastener and pull or tilt forwards.
.
Figure 234: Unfastening the remote control
2Pull seat post slowly out of the frame.
Figure 235: Removing the seat post
3Pull out the special end cap for the outer sleeve
from the bracket.
4Detach the Bowden cable head from the
hydraulic activation lever bracket.
5If necessary, operate the lever by hand to
make more space for detaching it.
Figure 236: Removing the Bowden cable
Removing the outer sleeve and slide bushing
1Use a 3 mm hex spanner to remove
attachment screw on the outer sleeve.
2Detach outer sleeve by pulling upwards with
your hand.
3Pull slide bushing tube out of the seat tube.
Figure 237: Removing the outer sleeve and slide bushing
Caring for the outer sleeve
1Push the blue wiper towards the edge.
2Detach the seal lip ring.
Figure 238: Detaching the seal lip ring
3Detach spring washer or outer sealing ring.
Figure 239: Removed spring washer
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 207
Maintenance
4Carefully remove the wiper from the groove.
Figure 240: Removing the wiper
5Use a small, sharp object to look for and
remove the end of the felt ring.
6Carefully take out the felt ring.
7Remove felt ring.
8Clean or replace felt ring.
Figure 241: Removing the felt ring
9Clean inside of outer sleeve with a cloth.
Figure 242: Cleaning the outer sleeve
10 Carefully re-insert dry felt ring with one end in
the designated groove.
11 Unfurl felt ring within the outer sleeve, so that
it lies on the groove.
12 Carefully press felt ring into the groove by
hand. Ensure that both ends are fully pressed
in and meet and that they do not overlap and
are not twisted.
Figure 243: Inserting the felt ring
13 Insert cleaned or new wiper in the upper
groove.
14 Stretch spring washer over the wiper.
Figure 244: inserting and fastening the wiper
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 208
Maintenance
Clean slide bushing
1Clean the slide bushing tube with a damp cloth.
Figure 245: Cleaning the slide bushing tube
Cleaning and lubricating the guide grooves
1Push the operating lever forwards.
Figure 246: Opening the height adjustment
2Pull seat post out with your hand until it will go
no further.
Figure 247: Pulling the seat post out
3Clean the seat post longitudinal grooves with a
damp cloth.
Figure 248: Cleaning the longitudinal groove
4Apply grease into the longitudinal groove and
on both cross-pieces.
Figure 249: Applying grease
5Push seat post together.
Figure 250: Pushing the seat post together
6Push the height adjustment operating lever
backwards.
Figure 251: Closing the height adjustment
Notice
Do not squash. The slide bushing tube wall is
very thin.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 209
Maintenance
installing the outer sleeve and slide bushing
1Carefully push slide bushing tube into the seat
tube.
2Press outer sleeve downwards with your hand.
3Use a 3 mm hex spanner to fasten the
attachment screw on the outer sleeve.
Figure 252: Fitting the slide bushing and outer sleeve
Fitting the seat post
1Attach Bowden cable head to the hydraulic
activation lever bracket.
2Push special end cap for the outer sleeve into
the holder on the mounting interface.
3Carefully push the seat post into the frame. In
doing so, ensure that the wiper and the slide
bushing do not become damaged.
Figure 253: Attaching and pushing in the seat post
4Hold the Bowden cable firmly on the
handlebars while feeding it in. Carefully pull
the end of the Bowden cable from the frame so
that the seat post slides downwards
unhindered.
Figure 254: Attaching the end cap
5Look at the frame interface through the hole in
the Postpin. Push the seat post down until the
Postpin mounting interface on the seat post
reaches the Postpin interface on the frame.
Figure 255: Hole in the Postpin interface
6If necessary, turn the seat post slightly and
push it to the correct position so that the
Postpin axle can be inserted.
7Use a 5 mm hex spanner to screw in Postpin
axle and fasten slightly.
8Straighten saddle.
9Use torque spanner to tighten Postpin axle with
8Nm.
Figure 256: Screwing the seat post into position
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 210
Maintenance
8.5.9 Rear frame damper
Only applies to pedelecs with this equipment
1Dismantle the rear frame damper.
2Clean and inspect its interior and exterior.
3Recondition air springs.
4Replace airtight seals on air springs.
5Change oil.
6Replace dust wipers.
Injury due to explosion
The air chamber is pressurised. If the air system
is serviced in a rear frame damper, it can explode
and cause serious injury.
Wear safety goggles, protective gloves and
safety clothing when assembling or carrying
out maintenance on the bicycle.
Release the air for the air chambers. Detach
all air insert fitments.
Never service or dismantle a rear frame
damper if it has not completely rebounded.
Intoxication from suspension oil
Suspension oil is poisonous to the touch, irritates
respiratory tracts and causes cancer, sterility and
mutation in germ cells.
Always wear safety goggles and nitrile gloves
when carrying suspension oil.
Never perform maintenance when you are
pregnant.
Use an oil catchment tray under the section
where the rear frame damper is being
serviced.
Intoxication from lubrication oil
The lubrication oil for eightpins seat posts is toxic
if touched or inhaled.
Always wear safety goggles and nitrile gloves
when working with lubrication oil.
Lubricate seat post in the open air or in a well-
ventilated room only.
Avoid skin coming into contact with lubrication
oil. Wear nitrile gloves when lubricating,
cleaning and servicing the vehicle.
Use an oil catchment tray under the section
where the seat post is serviced.
WARNING
!
Hazard for the environment due to toxic
substances
The rear frame damper contains toxic and
environmentally harmful oils and lubricants. Such
fluids will contaminate if they enter the sewers or
groundwater.
Dispose of lubricants and oils left over after
repairs in an environmentally responsible way
in accordance with statutory regulations.
CAUTION
!
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 211
Maintenance
8.5.9.1 FOX component-specific maintenance
FOX Service must perform maintenance on
suspension forks, rear frame dampers and
suspension seat posts.
Maintenance includes a complete inspection of
interiors/exteriors.
All dampers are reconditioned.
The airtight seals are replaced in air
suspension forks.
The air spring is reconditioned.
The oil is changed.
The dust wipers are replaced.
More information at:
www.foxracingshox.de/service
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 212
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9 Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1 Troubleshooting and fault
clearance
The components of the drive system are
constantly checked automatically. If an error is
detected, an error message appears on the on-
board computer. The drive may be shut off
automatically, depending on the type of error.
9.1.1 Drive system or on-board computer
does not start up
If the display and/or the drive system do not start
up, proceed as follows:
1Check whether the battery is switched on. If
not, start the battery.
Contact your specialist dealer if the battery
level indicator LEDs do not light up.
2If the LEDs on the battery level indicator light
up, but the drive system does not start up,
remove the battery.
3Insert the battery.
4Start the drive system.
5If the drive system won’t start, remove the
battery.
6Clean all the contacts with a soft cloth.
7Insert the battery.
8Start the drive system.
9If the drive system does not start up, remove
the battery.
10 Charge battery fully.
11 Insert the battery.
12 Start the drive system.
13 Contact your specialist dealer if the drive
system does not start up.
9.1.2 Error message
If an error message is displayed, run through the
following actions:
1Make a note of the system message. There is
a table containing all system messages in
Section 6.3.1.
2Shut off and re-start the drive system.
3If the system message is still displayed,
remove the battery and then re-insert.
4Re-start the drive system.
5If the system message is still displayed,
contact your specialist dealer.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 213
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.3 Errors in assistance function
Symptom Cause Remedy
Assistance is not
available.
Is the battery charged sufficiently? 1Check battery is charged.
2Recharge the battery if it is almost flat.
Is the system switched on? Press On-Off button (battery).
The drive system starts.
Is the level of assistance set to [OFF]?
1Set the assistance mode to a different level of assistance than
[OFF].
2Contact your specialist dealer if you still feel that the no
assistance is being supplied.
The rechargeable battery, on-board
computer or assistance switch may be
connected incorrectly, or one or more
of them may have a problem.
Contact your specialist dealer.
Are the pedals being pushed? The pedelec is not a motorbike.
Push the pedals.
Is the speed too high?
The electronic gear assistance is only active up to a maximum
speed of 25 km/h.
Check on-board computer indicators.
Is the lock function activated? Use suitable on-board computer.
The battery may become too hot
during rides at high temperatures, up
long inclines or when carrying a heavy
load for a long time.
1Switch off the drive system.
2Leave pedelec to cool down.
3Start the drive system.
The assisted journey
distance is too short.
Is the battery fully charged? 1Check charge level.
2Recharge the battery if it is almost flat.
The battery does not perform as well in
winter weather. This does not indicate a problem.
The journey distance can be shorter
depending on the road conditions, the
gear level and the entire light usage
time.
This does not indicate a problem.
The battery is a consumable.
Repeated charging and long periods of
use cause the battery to degrade (loss
of power).
If the distance covered with a fully charged battery has become
shorter, the battery may be affected.
Replace old battery with new one.
It is difficult to pedal.
Are the tyres pumped to an adequate
pressure? 1Pump up tyres.
Is the level of assistance set to [OFF]? 1Set level of assistance to [HIGH], [STD], [ECO] or [AUTO].
2Contact your specialist dealer if the pedals are still stiff.
Is the battery fully charged? 1Check charge level.
2Recharge the battery if it is almost flat.
Have you switched on the system with
your foot on the pedal?
1Switch system on again without applying pressure to the
pedal.
2Contact your specialist dealer if the pedals are still stiff.
Table 56: Error solution for assistance system
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 214
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.4 Battery errors
Symptom Cause Remedy
The battery discharges
quickly. The battery may be at the end of its
useful life.
Replace old battery with new one.
The battery cannot be
recharged.
Is the charger mains plug firmly
connected to the socket?
1Disconnect the charger mains plug and plug it in again.
2Start charging.
3If the battery still won't recharge, contact your specialist
dealer.
Is the charger plug firmly connected to
battery?
1Disconnect the charger plug and plug it in again.
2Start charging.
3If the battery still won't recharge, contact your specialist
dealer.
Is the adapter firmly connected to the
charger plug or the battery's charging
port?
1Connect the adapter firmly to the charger plug or the battery
charging port.
2Start charging.
3If the battery still won't recharge, contact your specialist
dealer.
Is the connection terminal for the
charger, charger adapter or batteries
dirty?
1Wipe with a dry cloth to clean the connection terminals.
2Start charging.
3If the battery still won't recharge, contact your specialist
dealer.
The battery does not start
charging when the
charger is connected.
The battery may be at the end of its
useful life.
Replace old battery with new one.
The battery and charger
become hot.
Has the battery or charger temperature
exceeded the operating temperature
range?
1Interrupt charging process.
2Leave battery and charger to cool down.
3Start charging.
If the battery becomes too hot to touch, there might be a
problem with the battery.
4Contact your specialist dealer.
The charger is hot. If the charger is used continuously to
charge batteries, it may become hot.
1Interrupt charging process.
2Leave charger to cool down.
3Start charging.
The LED on the charger
does not light up.
The LED on the charger will go out
when the battery is fully charged. This is not a malfunction.
Is the charger plug firmly connected to
battery?
1Check connection for any contaminants.
2Insert charger plug.
3If the battery still won't recharge, contact your specialist
dealer.
Is the battery fully charged?
1Disconnect charger mains plug.
2Insert mains plug again.
3Start charging.
4Contact your specialist dealer if the LED on the charger still
doesn't light up.
The battery cannot be
removed.
Contact your specialist dealer.
The battery cannot
be inserted.
Contact your specialist dealer.
Fluid is leaking from the
battery.
Observe all the warnings in Section 2 Safety.
Table 57: Error solution for battery
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 215
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.5 On-board computer errors
9.1.6 Lighting does not work
There is an unusual
smell.
1Remove from the battery immediately.
2Contact the fire service immediately.
3Observe all the warnings in Section 2 Safety.
Fumes are emitted from
the battery.
1Remove from the battery immediately.
2Contact the fire service immediately.
3Observe all the warnings in Section 2 Safety.
Symptom Cause Remedy
Table 57: Error solution for battery
Symptom Cause Remedy
No data is shown on the
monitor when the On-Off
button (battery) is
pressed.
The battery charge level may be
insufficient.
Charge the battery.
Is the power switched on? Press the On-Off button (battery) to switch the power on.
Is the battery charged? If the battery is fitted to the pedelec and is being charged, it
cannot be switched on. Interrupt charging process.
Is the connector fitted to the power
cable correctly?
1Check that the power cable connector has not been
disconnected.
2Contact your specialist dealer if this is not the case.
A component may be connected
which the system is unable to
recognise.
Contact your specialist dealer.
The gear level is not
shown on the display
screen.
The gear level is only shown if the
electronic gear shift is used.
1Check whether the power cable plug has been disconnected.
2Contact your specialist dealer if this is not the case.
The settings menu cannot
be opened while you are
pedalling.
The product is designed in such a way
that the settings menu cannot be
opened if the system detects that
someone is riding the pedelec. This is
not a malfunction.
1Stop the pedelec.
2Change settings when stationary only.
The time display is
flashing "0:00". The battery in the on-board computer
has come to the end of its service life.
Replace on-board computer battery.
Table 58: Display error solution
Symptom Cause Remedy
Front lamp or rear lamp
does not go on, even
when the switch is
pressed.
The basic settings in the electric drive
system have probably been configured
incorrectly.
1Take pedelec out of service immediately.
2Contact your specialist dealer.
The light is defective.
Table 59: Lighting error solution
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 216
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.7 Other errors
Symptom Cause Remedy
Two beeps will sound if a
switch is pressed but the
switch cannot be
operated.
Pressed switch mode has been
deactivated.
This is not a malfunction.
Three beeps are
sounded. A fault or warning has
occurred.
This occurs when a warning or an error is shown on the on-
board computer. Follow the instructions for the code indicated
on screen in Section 6.2 System Messages.
If an electronic gear shift
is used, pedal assistance
becomes weaker when
the gear is changed.
This is because the computer sets the
pedal assistance to the optimum level.
This is not a malfunction.
A noise can be heard
after switching.
Contact your specialist dealer.
It is normal to hear a
noise coming from the
rear wheel when cycling
as normal.
The gear shift setting may not have
been made properly.
Contact your specialist dealer.
If the pedelec is brought
to a stop the pedelec, the
gear transmission does
not switch to the position
pre-configured in the
functional feature.
You may have applied too much
pressure on the pedals.
Press on the pedals only gently to make it easier to change the
transmission.
Table 60: Other drive system errors
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 217
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.8 Suntour suspension fork
9.1.8.1 Rebound too fast
The suspension fork rebounds too quickly,
producing a "pogo stick" effect, where the wheel
lifts from the ground in an uncontrolled way. This
impairs traction and control (blue line).
Fork head and handlebars are deflected upwards
if the wheel bounces back from the ground. Body
weight may be thrown up and back in an
uncontrolled way (green line).
Figure 257: Suspension fork rebounding too quickly
Solution
Figure 258: Suntour rebound screw (1)
Turn rebound screw in a clockwise direction.
The rebound speed is decreased (slower
return).
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 218
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.8.2 Rebounding too slowly
The fork does not rebound quickly enough after
absorbing a bump. The fork also remains
deflected over subsequent bumps, which reduces
deflection and increases the hardness of impacts.
Available deflection, traction and control decrease
(blue line).
The fork remains in a deflected state, causing the
headset and handlebars to move to a lower
position. Body weight is shifted forward after the
impact (green line).
Figure 259: Suspension fork rebounding too slowly
Solution
Figure 260: Suntour rebound screw (1)
Turn rebound screw in an anti-clockwise
direction.
The rebound speed is increased (faster
return).
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 219
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.8.3 Suspension too soft on inclines
The fork deflects at a low point in the terrain. The
deflection is quickly used up, body weight shifts
forward and the pedelec loses some momentum.
Figure 261: Excessively soft suspension in the suspension fork on hilly terrain
Solution
Figure 262: Changing compression adjuster to a harder
setting
Turn compression adjuster in a clockwise
direction towards LOCK.
The damping and compression hardness are
increased and the deflection stroke speed.
Efficiency on hilly and flat terrain is improved.
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 220
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.8.4 Excessively hard damping on bumps
When the bike hits a bump, the fork deflects too
slowly and the wheel lifts up from the bump.
Traction decreases when the wheel no longer
touches the ground.
The headset and handlebars are deflected
upwards significantly, which can impair control.
Figure 263: Excessively hard damping in the suspension fork on bumps
Solution
Figure 264: Changing compression adjuster to a softer
setting
Turn compression adjuster in a clockwise
direction towards OPEN.
The damping and compression hardness
reduces and the deflection stroke speed is
reduced. Sensitivity to small bumps is
increased.
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 221
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.9 RockShox suspension fork
9.1.9.1 Rebound too fast
The suspension fork rebounds too quickly,
producing a "pogo stick" effect, where the wheel
lifts from the ground in an uncontrolled way. This
impairs traction and control (blue line).
Fork head and handlebars are deflected upwards
if the wheel bounces back from the ground. Body
weight may be thrown up and backwards in an
uncontrolled way (green line).
Figure 265: Suspension fork rebounding too quickly
Solution
Figure 266: Turning the rebound screw damper towards
tortoise symbol
Turn the rebound screw clockwise damper
towards the tortoise symbol.
The rebound speed is decreased (slower
return).
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 222
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.9.2 Rebounding too slowly
The fork does not rebound quickly enough after
absorbing a bump. The fork also remains
deflected over subsequent bumps, which reduces
deflection and increases the hardness of impacts.
Available deflection, traction and control decrease
(blue line).
The fork remains in a deflected state, causing the
headset and handlebars to move to a lower
position. Body weight is shifted forward after
impact (green line).
Figure 267: Suspension fork rebounding too slowly
Solution
Figure 268: Turning the rebound screw damper towards
hare symbol
Turn the rebound screw anti-clockwise towards
the hare symbol.
The rebound speed is increased (faster
return).
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 223
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.9.3 Suspension too soft on inclines
The fork deflects at a low point in the terrain. The
deflection is quickly used up, the rider's weight
shifts forward and the pedelec loses some
momentum.
Figure 269: Excessively soft suspension in the suspension fork on hilly terrain
Solution
Figure 270: Changing compression adjuster to a harder
setting
Turn compression adjuster clockwise.
The damping and compression hardness is
increased and the deflection stroke speed is
reduced. Efficiency on hilly and flat terrain is
improved.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 224
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.9.4 Excessively hard damping on bumps
When the bike hits a bump, the fork deflects too
slowly and the wheel lifts up from the bump.
Traction decreases when the wheel no longer
touches the ground.
The headset and handlebars are deflected
upwards significantly, which can impair control.
Figure 271: Excessively hard damping in the suspension fork on bumps
Solution
Figure 272: Changing compression adjuster to a softer
setting
Turn compression adjuster anti-clockwise.
The damping and compression hardness is
reduced and the deflection stroke speed is
increased. Sensitivity to small bumps is
increased.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 225
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.10 Rear frame damper
9.1.10.1 Rebound too fast
The rear frame damper rebounds too quickly,
producing a “pogo stick” effect or causing the bike
to bounce after the wheel hits a bump and lands
on the ground again. This impairs traction and
control due to the uncontrolled speed at which the
damper rebounds after deflecting (blue line).
Saddle and handlebars are deflected upwards
when the wheel bounces back from the ground.
The rider's body weight may be shifted upwards
and forwards if the damper fully rebounds too
quickly (green line).
Figure 273: Rear frame damper rebounding too quickly
Solution
Figure 274: Suntour rebound adjuster wheel (1) on the rear
frame damper
Turn rebound wheel towards plus.
The deflection movement is reduced.
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 226
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.10.2 Rebounding too slowly
The rear frame damper does not rebound quickly
enough after a bump has been compensated and
is not in the required initial position when the
wheel hits the next bump. The rear frame damper
remains compressed during successive bumps,
thus reducing deflection and ground contact and
increasing hardness on the next impact. The rear
wheel bounces off the second bump since the rear
frame damper does not rebound quickly enough to
make contact with the ground and return to the
initial position again. The available deflection and
traction are reduced (blue line).
The rear frame damper remains in a deflected
state after contact with the first bump. When the
rear wheel hits the second bump, the saddle
follows the path of the rear wheel instead of
remaining in a horizontal position. The available
deflection and potential absorption of bumps are
reduced, which causes instability and loss of
control during successive bumps (green line).
Figure 275: Rear frame damper rebounding too slowly
Solution
Figure 276: Suntour rebound adjuster wheel (1) on the rear
frame damper
Turn rebound wheel towards minus.
The rebound movement is increased.
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 227
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.10.3 Suspension too soft on inclines
The rear frame damper deflects deeply through
the deflection range Deflection is quickly used up,
the rider's weight shifts forward and the bicycle
loses some momentum.
Figure 277: Excessively soft suspension in the rear frame damper on hilly terrain
Solution
Figure 278: Suntour compression adjuster (1) on the rear
frame damper
Turn compression adjuster clockwise.
The damping and compression hardness is
increased and the deflection stroke speed is
reduced. Efficiency on hilly and flat terrain is
improved.
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 228
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.10.4 Excessively hard damping on bumps
When the bike hits a bump, the damper deflects
too slowly and the rear wheel lifts up from the
bump. Traction is reduced (blue line).
Saddle and rider are deflected upwards and
forwards, the rear wheel loses contact with the
ground and control is reduced (green line).
Figure 279: Excessively hard damping in the rear frame damper on bumps
Solution
Figure 280: Suntour compression adjuster (1) on the rear
frame damper
Turn compression adjuster anti-clockwise.
The damping and compression hardness is
reduced and the deflection stroke speed is
increased. Sensitivity to small bumps is
increased.
1
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 229
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.11 RockShox rear frame damper
9.1.11.1 Rebound too fast
The rear frame damper rebounds too quickly,
producing a “pogo stick” effect or causing the bike
to bounce after the wheel hits a bump and lands
on the ground again. This impairs traction and
control due to the uncontrolled speed at which the
damper rebounds after deflecting (blue line).
Saddle and handlebars are deflected upwards
when the wheel bounces back from the ground.
The rider's body weight may be shifted upwards
and forwards if the damper fully rebounds too
quickly (green line).
Figure 281: Rear frame damper rebounding too quickly
Solution
Figure 282: Position and shape of the rebound adjuster (red) depends on the model
Turn rebound adjuster clockwise.
The rebound damping is increased. The
rebound speed is reduced and traction and
control is increased.
2.5
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 230
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.11.2 Rebounding too slowly
The rear frame damper does not rebound quickly
enough after a bump has been compensated and
is not in the required initial position when the
wheel hits the next bump. The rear frame damper
remains compressed during successive bumps,
thus reducing deflection and ground contact and
increasing hardness on the next impact. The rear
wheel bounces off the second bump since the rear
frame damper does not rebound quickly enough to
make contact with the ground and return to the
initial position again. The available deflection and
traction are reduced (blue line).
The rear frame damper remains in a deflected
state after contact with the first bump. When the
rear wheel hits the second bump, the saddle
follows the path of the rear wheel instead of
remaining in a horizontal position. The available
deflection and potential absorption of bumps are
reduced, which causes instability and loss of
control during successive bumps (green line).
Figure 283: Rear frame damper rebounding too slowly
Solution
Figure 284: Position and shape of the rebound adjuster (red) depends on the model
Turn rebound adjuster anti-clockwise.
The rebound damping is reduced. The rebound
speed is increased. Performance while riding
over bumps is improved.
2.5
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 231
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.11.3 Suspension too soft on inclines
The rear frame damper deflects deeply through
the deflection range. Deflection is quickly used up,
the rider's weight shifts forward and the pedelec
loses some momentum.
Figure 285: Excessively soft suspension in the rear frame damper on hilly terrain
Solution
Figure 286: Position and shape of the compression adjuster (blue) depends on the model
Turn compression adjuster clockwise.
The damping and compression hardness is
increased and the deflection stroke speed is
reduced.
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 232
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.1.11.4 Excessively hard damping on bumps
When the bike hits a bump, the damper deflects
too slowly and the rear wheel lifts up from the
bump. Traction is reduced (blue line).
Saddle and rider are deflected upwards and
forwards, the rear wheel loses contact with the
ground and control is reduced (green line).
Figure 287: Excessively hard damping in the rear frame damper on bumps
Solution
Figure 288: Position and shape of the compression adjuster (blue) depends on the model
Turn compression adjuster anti-clockwise.
The damping and compression hardness is
reduced and the deflection stroke speed is
increased. Sensitivity to small bumps is
increased.
1
2
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 233
Troubleshooting, fault clearance and repair
9.2 Repair
Special expertise and tools are required for many
repairs. For this reason, repairs may only be
carried out at a specialist dealer. These include:
• Replacing tyres and rims
• Replacing rims, brake linings and brake discs
• Replacing and tensioning the chain.
9.2.1 Original parts and lubricants
The individual pedelec parts have been carefully
selected and matched to one other.
Only original parts and lubricants must be used for
maintenance and repair.
The constantly updated accessory approval and
parts lists are in Section 11, Documents and
Drawings.
Follow the operating instructions for the new
components.
9.2.2 Replacing the lighting
Only use components of the respective power
class for replacement.
9.2.3 Setting the front light
The front light must be set so that its light beam
shines on the road 10 m in front of the pedelec.
9.2.4 Checking tyre clearance
The tyre needs to be checked each time a
suspension fork tyre is changed to another size.
1Release pressure from the fork.
2Press fork together fully.
3Measure the gap between the top of the tyre
and the crown's lower surface. The gap must
not be less than 10 mm. If the tyre is too large,
the tyre will touch the crown's lower surface if
the fork is fully pressed together.
4Release pressure on fork and pump it up again
if it is an air suspension fork.
5Take into account the fact that the gap will be
smaller if there is a guard. Check again to
ensure that there is sufficient clearance for the
tyre.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 234
Recycling and disposal
10 Recycling and disposal
This device is marked according to the
European Directive 2012/19/EU on
waste electrical and electronic
equipment – WEEE and the European
Directive 2006/66/EC on accumulators.
The directive provides the framework for
the return and recycling of used devices across
the EU. Consumers are legally required to return
all used batteries of any type. It is forbidden to
dispose of batteries in domestic waste.
The battery manufacturer is legally obliged to take
back used and old batteries free of charge
according to Section 9 German Batteries Act. The
pedelec frame, battery, motor, on-board computer
and charger are recyclable materials. You must
dispose of and recycle them separately from the
domestic waste in compliance with applicable
statutory regulations. Separate collection and
recycling saves reserves of raw materials and
ensures that all the regulations for protection of
health and the environment are adhered to when
recycling the product and/or the battery.
Never dismantle the pedelec, battery or
charger for disposal.
The pedelec, on-board computer, the unopened
and undamaged battery and the charger can be
returned to any specialist dealer free of charge.
Further disposal options may be available,
depending on the region.
Store the individual parts of the
decommissioned pedelec in a dry place, free
from frost, where they are protected from direct
sunlight.
10.1 Removal of waste guidelines
Waste type Disposal
Non-hazardous waste
Recycling
Waste paper, cardboard Return paper collection bin, paper container, undamaged transport
packaging to suppliers
Scrap metal and aluminium Take to municipal collection points or have collected by waste disposal
companies
Tyres, tubes Tyre manufacturers’ collection points, collection forms and fax
templates available from tyre manufacturers
Otherwise, residual waste bin (grey bin)
Fibre composite components (e.g. carbon, GRP) Large carbon components such as defective frames and carbon rims
can be sent to special collection points for recycling; see www.cfk-
recycling.de/index.php?id=57
Dual system sales packaging made of plastic, metal and
composite material, lightweight packaging Collection by waste disposal firm where applicable; return transport
packaging to suppliers
Plastic waste bin (yellow bin)
CDs, DVDs Take to municipal collection points since they are made of high-grade
plastic and are easy to recycle
Otherwise, residual waste bin (grey bin)
Dispose of
Residual waste Residual waste bin (grey bin)
Biodegradable lubricants
Biodegradable oils
Biodegradable cleaning cloths daubed in oil
Residual waste bin (grey bin)
Filament lamps, halogen lamps Residual waste bin (grey bin)
Table 61: Removal of waste guidelines
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 235
Recycling and disposal
Hazardous waste
Recycling
Batteries, rechargeable batteries Return to the battery manufacturer
Electric devices:
Motor
Display
Control panel
Wiring
Take to a municipal collection point for electronic waste
Dispose of
Waste oil
Cleaning cloths daubed in oil
Lubrication oil
Gear oil
Lubricating grease
Cleaning fluids
Kerosene
White spirit
Hydraulic fluid
Brake fluid
Never mix different oil fluids. Store in original container.
Small quantities (usually <30 kg)
Take to municipal collection points for hazardous waste (e.g. mobile
toxic waste collection service)
Larger quantities (>30 kg)
Collection by waste disposal companies
Paints
Varnishes
Thinners
Take to municipal collection points for hazardous waste (e.g. mobile
toxic waste collection service)
Neon lights, energy-saving lamps Take to municipal collection points for hazardous waste (e.g. mobile
toxic waste collection service)
Waste type Disposal
Table 61: Removal of waste guidelines
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 236
11 Documents
11.1 Assembly report
Date: Frame number:
Components Description Criteria Measures if rejected
Assembly/
inspection Tests Accept-
ance Rejection
Front wheel Assembly O.K. Loose Adjust quick release
Kickstand Check mount fastening Functional check O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Tyres Tyre pressure check O.K. Tyre pressure too low/
too high Adjust tyre pressure
Frame Check for damage –
fracture, scratches O.K. Damage detected Take out of operation, new frame
Handles, coverings Check mount fastening O.K. Not provided Retighten screws, new handles
and coverings as specified in
parts list
Handlebars, stem Check mount fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws; new stem as
specified in parts list if necessary
Steering headset Check for damage Functional check O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Saddle Check mount fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Seat post Check mount fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Guard Check mount fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Pannier rack Check mount fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Attachments Check mount fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Bell Functional check O.K. No ring, too quiet, missing New bell as specified in the parts
list
Suspension elements
Fork, suspension
fork Check for damage O.K. Damage detected New fork as specified in the parts
list
Rear frame damper Check for damage O.K. Damage detected New fork as specified in the parts
list
Suspension seat post Check for damage O.K. Damage detected New fork as specified in the parts
list
Brake system
Brake lever Check mount fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Brake fluid Check fluid level O.K. Too little Refill with brake fluid; new brake
hoses if damaged
Brake linings
Check brake linings,
brake discs and rims for
damage O.K. Damage detected New brake linings, brake discs
and rims
Back-pedal brake
braking armature Check mount fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Lighting system
Rechargeable battery First examination O.K. Error message Take out of service; contact
battery manufacturer, new battery
Light cabling Connections, correct
wiring O.K. Cable defective, no light New cabling
Rear light Side light Functional check O.K. No constant light Take out of service; new rear
light as specified in parts list;
replace if necessary
Front light Side light, daytime riding
light Functional check O.K. No constant light Take out of service; new front
light as specified in parts list;
replace if necessary
Reflectors All complete, state,
fastening O.K. Damaged or not all
complete New reflectors
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 237
Technical inspection, checking safety, test ride
Drive/gear shift
Chain/cassette/
pinion/chainring Check for damage O.K. Damage Refasten if necessary or replace
as specified in parts list
Chain guard/spoke
guard Check for damage O.K. Damage Replace as specified in parts list
Bottom bracket axle/
crank Check mount fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Pedals Check mount fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Shifter Check mount fastening Functional check O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Shift cables Check for damage Functional check O.K. Loose and defective Adjust shift cables; new shift
cables if necessary
Front derailleur Check for damage Functional check O.K. Switching gears difficult or
not possible Adjust
Rear derailleur Check for damage Functional check O.K. Switching gears difficult or
not possible Adjust
Electric drive
On-board computer Check for damage Functional check O.K. No screen, defective
screen display
Restart, test battery, new software
or new on-board computer, take
out of service
Electric drive control
panel Drive Check for damage Functional check O.K. No response Restart; contact control panel
manufacturer, new control panel
Tachometer Speed measurement O.K. Pedelec travelling 10 % too
fast/slow Take pedelec out of service until
the source of the error is found
Cabling Visual inspection O.K. Failure in system, damage,
kinked cables New cabling
Battery mount Firmly in position, lock,
contacts Functional check O.K. Loose; lock doesn't close,
no contacts New battery mount
Motor Visual inspection and
mount O.K. Damage, loose Refasten motor, contact motor
manufacturer, new motor
Software Check version In latest
version Not latest version Import update
Components Description Criteria Measures if rejected
Assembly/inspection Tests Accept-
ance
Rejection
Brake system Functional check O.K. No full braking; braking
distance too long Locate defective part in brake
system and correct
Gear shift under
operating load
Functional check O.K. Problems when shifting
gear Readjust gear shift
Suspension
components (fork,
shock absorber, seat
post)
Functional check O.K. Suspension too deep or no
longer exists Locate defective component and
correct
Electric drive
Functional check O.K. Loose connection,
problems when riding,
accelerate
Locate defective part in electric
drive and correct
Lighting system Functional check O.K. No continuous light, not
bright enough Locate defective part in lighting
system and correct
Test ride No strange
noises Strange noises Locate source of noise and
correct
Date:
Fitter's name:
Final inspection by workshop manager
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 238
11.2 Maintenance log
Diagnosis and documentation of current status
Date: Frame number:
Components Frequency Description Criteria Measures if
rejected
Inspection Tests Maintenance Accept-
ance
Rejection
Front wheel 6 months Assembly O.K. Loose Adjust quick release
Kickstand 6 months Check mount
fastening Functional check O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Tyres 6 months Tyre pressure
check O.K. Tyre pressure
too low/
too high Adjust tyre pressure
Frame 6 months Check for damage –
fracture, scratches O.K. Damage
detected Take pedelec out of
service, new frame
Handles,
coverings 6 months Wear; check if
fastened securely O.K. Not provided
Retighten screws,
new handles and
coverings as
specified in parts list
Handlebars,
stem 6 months Check mount
fastening O.K. Loose
Retighten screws;
new stem as
specified in parts list
if necessary
Steering
headset 6 months Check for damage Functional check Lubricating and
adjustment O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Saddle 6 months Check mount
fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Seat post 6 months Check mount
fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Guard 6 months Check mount
fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Pannier rack 6 months Check mount
fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Attachments 6 months Check mount
fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Bell 6 months Functional check O.K. No ring, too
quiet, missing New bell as specified
in the parts list
Suspension elements
Fork,
suspension fork
To manu-
facturer's
specifica-
tions*
Check for damage,
corrosion, fracture
Maintenance as
specified by
manufacturer
Lubrication, oil change
as specified by
manufacturer
O.K. Damage
detected New fork as specified
in the parts list
Rear frame
damper
To manu-
facturer's
specifica-
tions*
Check for damage,
corrosion, fracture
Maintenance as
specified by
manufacturer
Lubrication, oil change
as specified by
manufacturer
O.K. Damage
detected New fork as specified
in the parts list
Suspension
seat post
To manu-
facturer's
specifica-
tions*
Check for damage Maintenance as
specified by
manufacturer O.K. Damage
detected New fork as specified
in the parts list
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 239
Inspection Tests Maintenance Accept-
ance
Rejection
Brake system
Brake lever 6 months Check mount
fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Brake fluid 6 months Check fluid level Depending on time of
year O.K. Too little
Top up brake fluid;
take Pedelec out of
service if damaged;
new brake hoses
Brake linings 6 months Check brake linings,
brake discs and rims
for damage O.K. Damage
detected New brake linings,
brake discs and rims
Back-pedal
brake braking
armature
6 months Check mount
fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Brake system 6 months Check mount
fastening Functional check O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Lighting system
Rechargeable
battery 6 months
First examination O.K. Error message Contact battery
manufacturer; take
out of service, new
battery
Light cabling 6 months Connections, correct
wiring O.K. Cable
defective, no
light
New cabling
Rear light 6 months Side light Functional check O.K. No constant
light New rear light as
specified in parts list;
replace if necessary
Front lamp 6 months Side light, daytime
riding light Functional check O.K. No constant
light New front light as
specified in parts list;
replace if necessary
Reflectors 6 months All complete, state,
fastening O.K. Damaged or
not all
complete
New reflectors
Drive/gear shift
Chain/cassette/
pinion/
chainring
6 months Check for damage O.K. Damage Refasten if neces-
sary or replace as
specified in parts list
Chain guard/
spoke guard 6 months Check for damage O.K. Damage Replace as specified
in parts list
Bottom bracket
axle/crank 6 months Check mount
fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Pedals 6 months Check mount
fastening O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Shifter 6 months Check mount
fastening Functional check O.K. Loose Retighten screws
Shift cables 6 months Check for damage Functional check O.K. Loose and
defective Adjust shift cables;
new shift cables if
necessary
Front derailleur 6 months Check for damage Functional check O.K. Switching
gears difficult
or not possible
Adjust
Rear derailleur 6 months Check for damage Functional check O.K. Switching
gears difficult
or not possible
Adjust
Components Frequency Description Criteria Measures if
rejected
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 240
Technical inspection, checking safety, test ride
Inspection Tests Maintenance Accept-
ance
Rejection
Electric drive
On-board
computer 6 months
Check for damage Functional check O.K. No screen,
defective
screen display
Restart, test battery,
new software or new
on-board computer;
take out of service
Electric drive
control panel 6 months
Drive Check for
damage Functional check O.K. No response Restart; contact
control panel
manufacturer, new
control panel
Tachometer 6 months
Speed
measurement O.K. Pedelec
travelling 10 %
too fast/slow
Take pedelec out of
service until the
source of the error is
found
Cabling 6 months Visual inspection O.K. Failure in sys-
tem, damage,
kinked cables
New cabling
Battery mount 6 months Firmly in position,
lock, contacts Functional check O.K. Loose; lock
doesn't close,
no contacts
New battery mount
Motor 6 months
Visual inspection and
mount O.K. Damage,
loose Refasten motor;
contact motor
manufacturer, new
motor; take out of
service
Software 6 months Check version In latest
version Not latest
version Import update
Components Frequency Description Criteria Measures if
rejected
Components Description Criteria Measures if rejected
Assembly/inspection Tests Accept-
ance
Rejection
Brake system 6 months Functional check O.K. No full braking; braking
distance too long Locate defective part in brake
system and correct
Gear shift under
operating load 6 months Functional check O.K. Problems when shifting
gear Readjust gear shift
Suspension
components (fork,
shock absorber, seat
post)
6 months Functional check O.K. Suspension too deep or no
longer exists Locate defective component and
correct
Electric drive 6 months Functional check O.K. Loose connection,
problems when riding,
accelerate
Locate defective part in electric
drive and correct
Lighting system 6 months Functional check O.K. No continuous light, not
bright enough Locate defective part in lighting
system and correct
Test ride 6 months Functional check No strange
noises Strange noises Locate source of noise and
correct
Date:
Fitter's name:
Final inspection by workshop
manager
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 241
Notes
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 242
Documents
11.3 Parts list
11.3.1 Aminga EVA 1
22-18-0076
Frame …Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, XCM DS HLO Deflection: 120 mm
Damper … …
Steering headset FSA, no.57 B-1
Handlebars Bulls, MTB Alloy Aluminium
Handles Bulls ...
Stem MTB- S with CCS slot
Saddle Bulls, Sportive Ergo ...
Seat post Bulls Aluminium, 30.9, 350 mm
Saddle clamp MONKEYLINK ...
Crank bearing FSA 165 mm
Pedals Bulls, MTB ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 10-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Deore SL-M4100 Shifter
Front derailleur ……
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M4100-10 11-42T
Chain KMC, E10S …
Belt … …
Front brake TEKTRO, HD-M276 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake TEKTRO, HD-M276 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear TEKTRO, HD-M276 …
Disc, front ... 180 mm, 6-bolt
Disc, rear ... 180 mm, 6-bolt
Wheel set ……
Rim, front/rear STYX, DDM-2 ...
Hub, front Bulls, QR ...
Hub, rear Bulls, QR ...
Spokes ... ...
Tyres STYX, Ace of Pace 57-584, 27.5 x 2.25
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo … …
Pannier rack ... …
Guard ... …
Chain guard … …
Lock ABUS ...
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 243
Documents
...not available
Stand/stand mount ... ...
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH …
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 244
Documents
11.3.2 Aminga EVA 2
22-18-0079, 22-18-0078, 22-18-0077
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, XCR 32 Boost LOR Air CTS Deflection: 120 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 SC
Handlebars STYX Aluminium
Handles Bulls ...
Stem MTB-SL with CCS slot
Saddle Bulls, Sportive Ergo ...
Seat post Bulls Aluminium, 30.9, 350 mm
Saddle clamp MONKEYLINK ...
Crank bearing FSA, 165 mm
Pedals Bulls, MTB ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 11-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Deore SL-M5100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M5100-11 11-51T
Chain KMC, E11S ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT200 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT200 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear SHIMANO, BL-MT201 DUAL CONTROL lever
Disc, front ... 180 mm, centre lock
Disc, rear ... 180 mm, centre lock
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RYDE, Disc 30 ...
Hub, front Bulls, Boost TA/QR ...
Hub, rear Bulls, Boost TA/QR ...
Spokes ... ...
Tyres Vee TIRE CO., Crown Gem 66-584, 27.5 x 2.60
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ABUS ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 245
Documents
...not available
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 246
Documents
11.3.3 Aminga EVA 3
22-18-0080
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork Bulls, Lytro 34 BLACK LOR Air CTS Boost Deflection: 120 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no. 55 R
Handlebars Bulls, MTB Alloy Aluminium
Handles Bulls ...
Stem MTBi with CCS slot
Saddle SELLE ROYAL, Vivo Ergo ...
Seat post Bulls Aluminium, 30.9, 350 mm
Saddle clamp MONKEYLINK ...
Crank bearing FSA, 165 mm
Pedals Bulls, MTB ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 12-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Deore XT SL-M6100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M6100 -12 10-51T
Chain SHIMANO, CN-M6100 ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT420 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear SHIMANO, BL-MT401 ...
Disc, front ... 203 mm, centre lock
Disc, rear ... 180 mm, centre lock
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RYDE, Disc 30 ...
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT410 Cassette hub
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Nobby Nic Performance 65-584, 27.5 x 2.60
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ABUS ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 247
Documents
...not available
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 248
Documents
11.3.4 Aminga EVA TR 1
22-18-0075, 22-18-0074
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork Bulls, Lytro 34 BLACK LOR Air CTS Boost Deflection: 120 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no. 55 R
Handlebars Bulls, MTB Alloy Aluminium
Handles Bulls ...
Stem MTBi with CCS slot
Saddle SELLE ROYAL, Vivo Ergo ...
Seat post Bulls Aluminium, 30.9, 350 mm
Saddle clamp MONKEYLINK ...
Crank bearing FSA 165 mm
Pedals Bulls, MTB ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 12-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Deore XT SL-M6100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M6100 -12 10-51T
Chain SHIMANO, CN-M6100 ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT420 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear SHIMANO, BL-MT401 ...
Disc, front ... 203 mm, centre lock
Disc, rear ... 180 mm, centre lock
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RYDE, Disc 30 ...
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT410 Cassette hub
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Nobby Nic Performance 65-584, 27.5 x 2.60
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ABUS ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 249
Documents
...not available
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 250
Documents
11.3.5 Copperhead EVO 1
22-18-0008, 22-18-0009
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, XCM DS HLO Coil Deflection: 100 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 B-1
Handlebars STYX Aluminium
Handles STYX ...
Stem MTB- S with CCS slot
Saddle Bulls, Sportive Ergo ...
Seat post STYX Aluminium, 30.9, 350 mm
Saddle clamp MONKEYLINK ...
Crank bearing FSA 165 mm
Pedals Bulls, MTB ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 10-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Deore SL-M4100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M4100-10 11-42T
Chain KMC, E10S ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake TEKTRO, MD-M280 Mechanical disc brakes
Rear brake TEKTRO, MD-M280 Mechanical disc brakes
Brake lever, front/rear TEKTRO, MD-M280 ...
Disc, front ... 180 mm, 6-bolt
Disc, rear ... 180 mm, 6-bolt
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear STYX, DDM-2 ...
Hub, front Bulls, QR ...
Hub, rear Bulls, QR ...
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SUPERO, Edge 57-622, 29 x 2.25
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 251
Documents
...not available
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 252
Documents
11.3.6 Copperhead EVO 1 Street
22-18-5029, 22-18-5031, 22-18-5032
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, NVX 30 DS HLO Deflection: 100 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 B-1
Handlebars STYX Aluminium
Handles Bulls ...
Stem MTB-SL with CCS slot
Saddle Bulls, Sportive Ergo ...
Seat post LIMOTEC, A3 Retractable seat post, 30.9 mm
Saddle clamp ... Aluminium
Crank bearing FSA 165 mm
Pedals WELLGO, C-098DU ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO, Alivio RD-M3100-SGS Shadow 9-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Alivio SL-M3100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Altus CS-HG200-9 11-36T
Chain KMC, E9S ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake TEKTRO, HD-T280 Mechanical disc brakes
Rear brake TEKTRO, HD-T280 Mechanical disc brakes
Brake lever, front/rear TEKTRO, HD-T280 ...
Disc, front ... 180 mm, 6-bolt
Disc, rear ... 180 mm, 6-bolt
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear STYX, DDM-2 ...
Hub, front Bulls, QR ...
Hub, rear Bulls, QR ...
Spokes ... ...
Tyres STYX, Ace of Pace 57-584, 27.5 x 2.25
Tube ... ...
Front lamp FUXON, FS-50 EB 50 lx
Rear lamp FUXON, RL-Mini EB Guard fitting
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard SKS, Urban Velo ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ABUS ...
Stand/stand mount ... Aluminium, black
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 253
Documents
...not available
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 254
Documents
11.3.7 Copperhead EVO 1 XXL
22-18-5002, 22-18-5010
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork Bulls, Lytro 34 BRONZE LOR Air CTS Boost Deflection: 120 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 SC
Handlebars ZECURE, MTB Alloy Aluminium
Handles Bulls ...
Stem MTB-SL with CCS slot
Saddle ZECURE, MTB ...
Seat post ZECURE Aluminium, 30.9, 350 mm
Saddle clamp MONKEYLINK, QR-ML 3 ...
Crank bearing FSA 165 mm
Pedals ZECURE, MTB ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO, Alivio RD-M3100-SGS Shadow 9-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Alivio SL-M3100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Altus CS-HG200-9 11-36T
Chain KMC, E9S ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT420 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear SHIMANO ...
Disc, front ... 203 mm, centre lock
Disc, rear ... 180 mm, centre lock
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RYDE, Disc 30 ...
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT410 Cassette hub
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Smart Sam K-Guard 65-622, 29 x 2.60
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ABUS ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 255
Documents
...not available
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 256
Documents
11.3.8 Copperhead EVO 2 Street
22-18-5025
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, XCR 32 Boost Air LOR Deflection: 120 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 SC
Handlebars STYX Aluminium
Handles Bulls ...
Stem MTB-SL with CCS slot
Saddle Bulls, Sportive Ergo ...
Seat post LIMOTEC, A3 Retractable seat post, 30.9 mm
Saddle clamp ... Aluminium
Crank bearing FSA 165 mm
Pedals WELLGO, C-098DU ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 10-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Deore SL-M4100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M4100-10 11-42T
Chain KMC, E10S ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT420 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT200 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear SHIMANO, BL-MT201 DUAL CONTROL lever
Disc, front ... 180 mm, centre lock
Disc, rear ... 180 mm, centre lock
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RYDE, Disc 30 ...
Hub, front Bulls, Boost TA/QR ...
Hub, rear Bulls, TA/Boost QR ...
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Smart Sam K-Guard 57-584, 27.5 x 2.25
Tube ... ...
Front lamp FUXON, FS-50 EB 50 lx
Rear lamp FUXON, RL-Mini EB Guard fitting
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard SKS, Urban Velo ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ABUS ...
Stand/stand mount ... Aluminium, black
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 257
Documents
...not available
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 258
Documents
11.3.9 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL
22-18-5003
Frame … Aluminium
Fork Bulls, Lytro 34 BRONZE LOR Air CTS Boost Deflection: 120 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 SC
Handlebars ZECURE, MTB Alloy Aluminium
Handles Bulls ...
Stem MTB-SL with CCS slot
Saddle ZECURE, MTB ...
Seat post ZECURE Aluminium, 30.9, 350 mm
Saddle clamp MONKEYLINK, QR-ML 3 ...
Crank bearing FSA 165 mm
Pedals ZECURE, MTB ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 10-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Deore SL-M4100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M4100-10 11-42T
Chain KMC, E10S ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT420 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear SHIMANO ...
Disc, front ... 203 mm, centre lock
Disc, rear ... 180 mm, centre lock
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RYDE, Disc 30 ...
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT410 Cassette hub
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Smart Sam K-Guard 65-584, 27.5 x 2.60
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ABUS ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 259
Documents
...not available
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 260
Documents
11.3.10 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL Street
22-18-5015
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, XCR 32 Boost Air LOR Deflection: 120 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 SC
Handlebars ZECURE, MTB Alloy Aluminium
Handles Bulls ...
Stem MTB-SL with CCS slot
Saddle ZECURE, MTB ...
Seat post LIMOTEC, A3 Retractable seat post, 30.9 mm
Saddle clamp ... Aluminium
Crank bearing FSA 165 mm
Pedals ZECURE, MTB ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 10-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Deore SL-M4100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M4100-10 11-42T
Chain KMC, E10S ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT420 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear SHIMANO ...
Disc, front ... 203 mm, centre lock
Disc, rear ... 180 mm, centre lock
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RYDE, Disc 30 ...
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT200-B Freewheel
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Smart Sam K-Guard 65-584, 27.5 x 2.60
Tube ... ...
Front lamp FUXON, FS-70 EB 70 lx
Rear lamp FUXON, RL-Mini EB Guard fitting
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard SKS, Urban Velo ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ABUS ...
Stand/stand mount ... Aluminium, black
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 261
Documents
...not available
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 262
Documents
11.3.11 Copperhead EVO AM 1
22-18-0012
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork Bulls, Lytro 34 Air Boost LOR DS CTS Deflection: 140 mm
Damper SR SUNTOUR, Unair TR LO-R8 ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 SC
Handlebars Bulls, MTB Alloy Aluminium
Handles Bulls ...
Stem MTB-SL with CCS slot
Saddle Bulls, Sportive Ergo ...
Seat post Bulls Alloy, 30.9, 350 mm
Saddle clamp MONKEYLINK ...
Crank bearing FSA 165 mm
Pedals Bulls, MTB ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 10-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Deore SL-M4100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M4100-10 11-42T
Chain KMC, E10S ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT420 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT200 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear SHIMANO, BL-MT201 DUAL CONTROL lever
Disc, front ... 180 mm, centre lock
Disc, rear ... 180 mm, centre lock
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RYDE, Disc 30 ...
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT400 Cassette hub
Spokes ... ...
Tyres Vee TIRE CO., Crown Gem 65-622/66-584, 29 x 2.60/27.5 x 2.60
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 263
Documents
...not available
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 264
Documents
11.3.12 Cross Mover EVO 1
22-15-4004, 22-15-4006
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, NCX-32-D Coil CTS QR Deflection: 75 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 SC
Handlebars ... ...
Handles ... Plastic
Stem ... Aluminium, adjustable
Saddle SELLE ROYAL, Essenza Plus Moderate/Relaxed
Seat post ZECURE 10 mm offset
Saddle clamp ... ...
Crank bearing FSA 175 mm
Pedals WELLGO, C-157 ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO, Alivio RD-M4000 9-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Alivio SL-M3100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket ... 11-36T
Chain ... ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake TEKTRO, HD-T280 Mechanical disc brakes
Rear brake TEKTRO, HD-T280 Mechanical disc brakes
Brake lever, front/rear ... ...
Disc, front ... 180 mm
Disc, rear ... 180 mm
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear Bulls, DDM-2 ...
Hub, front FORMULA, DC-20FQR Aluminium, 6-BOLT TYPE, 14G x 24H
Hub, rear FORMULA, DC-22RQR Aluminium, 6-BOLT TYPE, 13Gx32H
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SUPERO, Optima Safe 54-559, 28 x 2.15
Tube ... ...
Front lamp FUXON, FS-50 EB 50 lx
Rear lamp FUXON, R-242 EB LED
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... i-Rack system pannier rack
Guard SKS, PET A65 ...
Chain guard HORN, Catena ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... Steel
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 265
Documents
...not available
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 500, BBP280 horizontal, 500 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH ...
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 266
Documents
11.3.13 Iconic EVO 1
22-15-1054, 22-15-1058, 22-15-1055
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, XCM ATB DS HLO Deflection: 100 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 B-1 ...
Handlebars STYX Aluminium
Handles ... Plastic
Stem ... Aluminium, adjustable
Saddle ... ...
Seat post LIMOTEC, A3 Retractable seat post, 30.9 mm
Saddle clamp ... Aluminium
Crank bearing FSA 165 mm
Pedals WELLGO, C-098DU ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 10-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Deore SL-M4100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M4100-10 11-42T
Chain KMC, E10S ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT420 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT200 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear SHIMANO, BL-MT201 DUAL CONTROL lever
Disc, front ... 180 mm, centre lock
Disc, rear ... 180 mm, centre lock
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RYDE, Disc 30 ...
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Front wheel hub, cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT200-B Freewheel
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SUPERO, All Ground 62-584, 27.5 x 2.40
Tube ... ...
Front lamp FUXON, FS-50 EB 50 lx
Rear lamp SUPERNOVA, E3 Tail Light 2 Side light
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack MONKEYLOAD MonkeyLoad rack system
Guard ... Aluminium
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ABUS ...
Stand/stand mount ... Aluminium, black
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 267
Documents
...not available
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 268
Documents
11.3.14 Landscape EVO
22-15-1084, 22-15-1085, 22-15-1086
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, NVX 30 DS HLO Deflection: 100 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 B-1
Handlebars STYX, ...
Handles STYX, MTB Alloy ...
Stem ... Aluminium, adjustable
Saddle COMODORO, Comfort ...
Seat post STYX 10 mm offset
Saddle clamp ... Aluminium
Crank bearing FSA, 170 mm
Pedals WELLGO, C-098DU Black body
Rear derailleur SHIMANO, Alivio RD-M3100-SGS Shadow 9-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Alivio SL-M3100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Altus CS-HG200-9 11-36T
Chain KMC, E9S ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake TEKTRO, MD-M280 Mechanical disc brakes
Rear brake TEKTRO, MD-M280 Mechanical disc brakes
Brake lever, front/rear TEKTRO, MD-M280 ...
Disc, front ... 180 mm, 6-bolt
Disc, rear ... 160 mm, 6-bolt
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear STYX, DDM-2 ...
Hub, front FORMULA, DC-20FQR Aluminium, 6-BOLT TYPE, 14G x 24H
Hub, rear FORMULA, DC-22RQR Aluminium, 6-BOLT TYPE, 13G x 32H
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Smart Sam, Performance Line,
Performance 57-622, 29 x 2.25
Tube ... ...
Front lamp FUXON, FS-30 EB 30 lx
Rear lamp FUXON, RL-Mini EB Fitting of pannier rack
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack MONKEYLOAD MonkeyLoad rack system
Guard ... Aluminium
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ABUS ...
Stand/stand mount ... Aluminium, black
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 269
Documents
...not available
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line, BDU365 250 Watt, 65 Nm
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 270
Documents
11.3.15 LT CX
22-18-0006, 22-18-0007
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, XCM DS HLO Coil Deflection: 100 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 B-1
Handlebars Bulls, MTB Alloy Aluminium
Handles Bulls ...
Stem MTB- S with CCS slot
Saddle Bulls, Sportive Ergo ...
Seat post STYX Aluminium, 30.9, 350 mm
Saddle clamp MONKEYLINK ...
Crank bearing FSA 165 mm
Pedals Bulls, MTB ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO, Alivio RD-M3000-SGS 9-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Acera SL-M3000 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Altus CS-HG200-9 11-36T
Chain KMC, E9S ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake TEKTRO, HD-M275 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake TEKTRO, HD-M275 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear TEKTRO, HD-M275 ...
Disc, front ... 180 mm, 6-bolt
Disc, rear ... 180 mm, 6-bolt
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear STYX, DDM-2 ...
Hub, front Bulls, QR ...
Hub, rear Bulls, QR ...
Spokes ... ...
Tyres STYX, Ace of Pace 57-622, 29 x 2.25
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 271
Documents
...not available
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerPack 400, BBS265 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 272
Documents
11.3.16 LT EVO CX
22-18-0072, 22-18-0073
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, XCM DS HLO Coil Deflection: 100 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 B-1
Handlebars Bulls, MTB Alloy ...
Handles STYX ...
Stem MTB- S with CCS slot
Saddle Bulls, Sportive Ergo ...
Seat post STYX ...
Saddle clamp MONKEYLINK ...
Crank bearing FSA 165 mm
Pedals Bulls, MTB ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO, Alivio RD-M3000-SGS 9-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Acera SL-M3000 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Altus CS-HG200-9 11-36T
Chain KMC, E9S ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake TEKTRO, HD-M275 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake TEKTRO, HD-M275 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear TEKTRO, HD-M275 ...
Disc, front ... 180 mm
Disc, rear ... 180 mm
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear STYX, DDM-2 ...
Hub, front Bulls, QR Aluminium, 6-BOLT TYPE, 14G x 24H
Hub, rear Bulls, QR Aluminium, 6-BOLT TYPE, 13Gx32H
Spokes ... ...
Tyres STYX, Ace of Pace 57-622, 29 x 2.25
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 273
Documents
...not available
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 274
Documents
11.3.17 LT Performance
22-18-0070, 22-18-0071
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, XCE 28 DS Deflection: 100 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 B-1
Handlebars Bulls, MTB Alloy Aluminium
Handles STYX ...
Stem MTB- S with CCS slot
Saddle Bulls, Sportive Ergo ...
Seat post STYX Aluminium, 30.9, 350 mm
Saddle clamp MONKEYLINK ...
Crank bearing FSA 165 mm
Pedals Bulls, MTB ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO, Altus RD-M2000-GS 9-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Altus SL-M2010 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, CS-HG200-9 11-34T
Chain KMC, E9S ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake TEKTRO, HD-M275 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake TEKTRO, HD-M275 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear ... ...
Disc, front ... 180 mm
Disc, rear ... 160 mm
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear STYX, DDM-2 ...
Hub, front Bulls, QR ...
Hub, rear Bulls, QR ...
Spokes ... ...
Tyres STYX, Ace of Pace 57-622, 29 x 2.25
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line, BDU365 250 Watt, 65 Nm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 275
Documents
...not available
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerPack 400, BBS265 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 276
Documents
11.3.18 Sonic EVA 1
22-18-3003, 22-18-3004
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork Bulls, Lytro 34 LOR 1.8 tapered Deflection: 120 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset ... ...
Handlebars Bulls ...
Handles ... ...
Stem Bulls, The Frog ...
Saddle PROLOGO, Proxim 400 wide ...
Seat post LIMOTEC, A1 ...
Saddle clamp ... ...
Crank bearing SAMOX ...
Pedals ZECURE, VPE-527 ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 10-speed derailleur gears
Shifter ... ...
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M4100-10 11-42T
Chain ... ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear ... ...
Disc, front ... 203 mm
Disc, rear ... 203 mm
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RODI, TRYP30 Double wall, ...
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT400 Cassette hub
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Smart Sam K-Guard 65-584, 27.5 x 2.60
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 277
Documents
...not available
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 500, BBP280 vertical, 500 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 278
Documents
11.3.19 Sonic EVA TR 1
22-18-3004
Frame Bulls, Lytro 34 LOR 1.8 tapered Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, Edge R Deflection: 120 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset Bulls ...
Handlebars ... ...
Handles Bulls, The Frog ...
Stem PROLOGO, Proxim 400 wide ...
Saddle LIMOTEC, A1 ...
Seat post ... ...
Saddle clamp SAMOX ...
Crank bearing ZECURE, VPE-527 ...
Pedals SHIMANO ...
Rear derailleur 5-speed hub gear ...
Shifter ... ...
Front derailleur ...SHIMANO, Deore CS-M4100-10 ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket ... 11-46T
Chain ... ...
Belt SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake ... ...
Brake lever, front/rear ... ...
Disc, front ... 203 mm
Disc, rear ... 203 mm
Wheel set ... RODI, TRYP30
Rim, front/rear ... Double wall
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT400 Cassette hub
Spokes SCHWALBE, Smart Sam K-Guard ...
Tyres 65-584, 27.5 x 2.60 ...
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 279
Documents
...not available
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 500, BBP280 vertical, 500 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 280
Documents
11.3.20 Sonic EVA TR 2
22-18-3005
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork ROCKSHOX, 35 Gold 1.8 tapered Deflection: 130 mm
Damper ROCKSHOX, Deluxe Select+ RT ...
Steering headset ... ...
Handlebars Bulls ...
Handles ... ...
Stem Bulls, The Frog ...
Saddle PROLOGO, Proxim 400 wide ...
Seat post LIMOTEC, A1 ...
Saddle clamp ... ...
Crank bearing SAMOX ...
Pedals ZECURE, VPE-527 ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 12-speed derailleur gears
Shifter ... ...
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M6100 -12 10-51T
Chain ... ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, Deore BR-M6120 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, Deore BR-M6120 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear ... ...
Disc, front ... 203 mm
Disc, rear ... 203 mm
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RODI, TRYP30 Double wall, ...
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT400 Cassette hub
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Nobby Nic Performance 65-584, 27.5 x 2.60
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 281
Documents
...not available
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450
CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 500, BBP280 vertical, 500 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 282
Documents
11.3.21 Sonic EVO AM 1
22-18-3008
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork Bulls, Lytro 34 LOR 1.8 tapered Deflection: 140 mm
Damper SR SUNTOUR, Edge Plus R ...
Steering headset ACROS, no.1 1.8 tapered
Handlebars Bulls ...
Handles Bulls ...
Stem Bulls, S140 ...
Saddle PROLOGO, Proxim 400 wide ...
Seat post LIMOTEC, A1 ...
Saddle clamp ... ...
Crank bearing SAMOX ...
Pedals ZECURE, VPE-527 ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 10-speed derailleur gears
Shifter ... ...
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M4100-10 11-42T
Chain ... ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear ... ...
Disc, front ... 203 mm
Disc, rear ... 180 mm
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RODI, TRYP30 Double wall
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT400 Cassette hub
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Magic Mary Performance/Hans
Dampf Performance 62-622/65-584, 29 x 2.40/27.5 x 2.60
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 283
Documents
...not available
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 500, BBP280 vertical, 500 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 284
Documents
11.3.22 Sonic EVO AM 1
22-18-3008
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork Bulls, Lytro 34 LOR 1.8 tapered Deflection: 140 mm
Damper SR SUNTOUR, Edge Plus R ...
Steering headset ACROS, no.1 1.8 tapered
Handlebars Bulls ...
Handles Bulls ...
Stem Bulls, S140 ...
Saddle PROLOGO, Proxim 400 wide ...
Seat post LIMOTEC, A1 ...
Saddle clamp ... ...
Crank bearing SAMOX ...
Pedals ZECURE, VPE-527 ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 10-speed derailleur gears
Shifter ... ...
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M4100-10 11-42T
Chain ... ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear ... ...
Disc, front ... 203 mm
Disc, rear ... 180 mm
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RODI, TRYP30 Double wall
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT400 Cassette hub
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Magic Mary Performance/Hans
Dampf Performance 62-622/65-584, 29 x 2.40/27.5 x 2.60
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 285
Documents
...not available
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 500, BBP280 vertical, 500 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 286
Documents
11.3.23 Sonic EVO AM 2 Carbon
22-18-3009
Frame ... Carbon
Fork Bulls, Lytro 35 Supreme LOR Air 1.8
tapered Deflection: 150 mm
Damper SR SUNTOUR, Edge Plus R ...
Steering headset ACROS, no.1 1.8 tapered
Handlebars Bulls ...
Handles Bulls ...
Stem Bulls, S140 ...
Saddle PROLOGO, Proxim 400 ...
Seat post LIMOTEC, A1 ...
Saddle clamp ... ...
Crank bearing SAMOX ...
Pedals ZECURE, VPE-527 ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO, Deore RD-M5100 11-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Deore XT SL-M6100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M5100-11 11-51T
Chain ... ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear ... ...
Disc, front ... 203 mm
Disc, rear ... 203 mm
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RODI, TRYP30 Double wall, ...
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear ... ...
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Magic Mary Performance/
Hans Dampf Performance 62-622/65-584, 29 x 2.40/27.5 x 2.60
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 287
Documents
...not available
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450
CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 625, BBP290 vertical, 625 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 288
Documents
11.3.24 Sonic EVO EN 1
22-19-3001
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, Durolux 38 RC-PCS 1.8 tapered Deflection: 180 mm
Damper SR SUNTOUR, Tri Air ...
Steering headset ACROS, no.1 1.8 tapered
Handlebars Bulls ...
Handles Bulls ...
Stem Bulls, S140 ...
Saddle PROLOGO, Proxim 400 ...
Seat post LIMOTEC, A1L ...
Saddle clamp ... ...
Crank bearing E-Thirteen ...
Pedals ZECURE, VPE-527 ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 12-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, SLX SL-M7100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M6100 -12 10-51T
Chain ... ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, Deore BR-M6120 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, Deore BR-M6120 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear ... ...
Disc, front ... 220 mm
Disc, rear ... 203 mm
Wheel set SHIMANO MTB wheel set
Rim, front/rear SHIMANO ...
Hub, front SHIMANO, from wheel set WH-MT620 Front wheel hub set
Hub, rear SHIMANO, from wheel set WH-MT620 Freewheel
Spokes SHIMANO, from wheel set WH-MT620 ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Magic Mary Evo/Big Betty Evo 62-622/65-584, 29 x 2.40/27.5 x 2.60
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 289
Documents
...not available
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 625, BBP290 vertical, 625 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 290
Documents
11.3.25 Sonic EVO EN 2
22-19-3002
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork ROCKSHOX, ZEB Select RC 1.8 tapered Deflection: 180 mm
Damper ROCKSHOX, Deluxe Select+ RT ...
Steering headset ACROS, no.1 1.8 tapered
Handlebars Bulls ...
Handles Bulls ...
Stem Bulls, S140 ...
Saddle PROLOGO, Proxim 450 Sport ...
Seat post EIGHTPINS, H01 ...
Saddle clamp ... ...
Crank bearing E-Thirteen ...
Pedals ZECURE, VPE-527 ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 12-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Deore XT SL-M8100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, SLX CS-M7100-12 10-51T
Chain ... ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake TEKTRO, TRP, DH-R Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake TRP, DH-R Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear ... ...
Disc, front ... 220 mm
Disc, rear ... 203 mm
Wheel set DT SWISS eMTB wheel set
Rim, front/rear DT SWISS Aluminium, tubeless TC,
Hub, front DT SWISS, 370 ...
Hub, rear DT SWISS, Three Pawl Freewheel
Spokes DT SWISS, DT hybrid 1 ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Magic Mary Performance/Hans
Dampf Performance 62-622/65-584, 29 x 2.40/27.5 x 2.60
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 291
Documents
...not available
Motor ... Aluminium
Rechargeable battery ROCKSHOX, ZEB Select RC 1.8 tapered Deflection: 180 mm
Display ROCKSHOX, Deluxe Select+ RT ...
Charger ACROS, no.1 1.8 tapered
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 292
Documents
11.3.26 Sonic EVO TR1
22-19-3006
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork Bulls, Lytro 34 LOR 1.8 tapered Deflection: 120 mm
Damper SR SUNTOUR, Edge Plus R ...
Steering headset ACROS, no.1 1.8 tapered
Handlebars Bulls ...
Handles ... Plastic
Stem Bulls, The Frog ...
Saddle PROLOGO, Proxim 400 wide ...
Seat post LIMOTEC, A1 ...
Saddle clamp ... ...
Crank bearing SAMOX ...
Pedals ZECURE, VPE-527 ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 10-speed derailleur gears
Shifter ... ...
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M4100-10 11-42T
Chain ... ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear ... ...
Disc, front ... 203 mm
Disc, rear ... 203 mm
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RODI, TRYP30 Double wall
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT400 Cassette hub
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Smart Sam K-Guard 57-622, 29 x 2.25
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 293
Documents
...not available
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 500, BBP280 vertical, 500 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 294
Documents
11.3.27 Sonic EVO TR2 Carbon
22-19-3007
Frame ... Carbon
Fork Bulls, Lytro 35 Supreme LOR Air 1.8 tapered Deflection: 120 mm
Damper SR SUNTOUR, Edge Plus R ...
Steering headset ACROS, no.1 1.8 tapered
Handlebars Bulls ...
Handles ... Plastic
Stem Bulls, The Frog ...
Saddle PROLOGO, Proxim 400 wide ...
Seat post LIMOTEC, A1 ...
Saddle clamp ... ...
Crank bearing SAMOX ...
Pedals ZECURE, VPE-527 ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO, Deore RD-M5100 11-speed derailleur gears
Shifter ... ...
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M5100-11 11-51T
Chain ... ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear ... ...
Disc, front ... 203 mm
Disc, rear ... 203 mm
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RODI, TRYP30 Double wall, ...
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT400 Cassette hub
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Nobby Nic Performance 60-622, 28 x 2.35
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 295
Documents
...not available
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 625, BBP290 vertical, 625 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 296
Documents
11.3.28 Sonic EVO XS
22-18-3013
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork Bulls, Lytro 34 LOR 1.8 tapered Deflection: 120 mm
Damper SR SUNTOUR, Edge R ...
Steering headset ... ...
Handlebars Bulls ...
Handles ... ...
Stem Bulls, S140 ...
Saddle PROLOGO, Proxim 400 ...
Seat post LIMOTEC, A1 ...
Saddle clamp ... ...
Crank bearing SAMOX ...
Pedals ZECURE, VPE-527 ...
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 10-speed derailleur gears
Shifter ... ...
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M4100-10 11-42T
Chain ... ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT410 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear ... ...
Disc, front ... 203 mm
Disc, rear ... 203 mm
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear RODI, TRYP30 Double wall
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT400 Cassette hub
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Hans Dampf, Performance Line,
Performance 60-584/60-559, 27.5 x 2.35/26 x 2.35
Tube ... ...
Front lamp ... ...
Rear lamp ... ...
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack ... ...
Guard ... ...
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ... ...
Stand/stand mount ... ...
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 297
Documents
...not available
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 500, BBP280 vertical, 500 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 298
Documents
11.3.29 Urban EVO 12
22-15-1068
Frame ... Aluminium
Fork SR SUNTOUR, NCX-E LO Air CTS Deflection: 75 mm
Damper ... ...
Steering headset FSA, no.57 SC
Handlebars ZECURE, ...
Handles Bulls ...
Stem ZECURE ...
Saddle ... Leather saddle
Seat post STYX 10 mm offset, 30.9 mm
Saddle clamp ... Aluminium
Crank bearing FSA 170 mm
Pedals WELLGO, C-211 With sandpaper
Rear derailleur SHIMANO 12-speed derailleur gears
Shifter SHIMANO, Deore XT SL-M6100 Shifter
Front derailleur ... ...
Cassette/cassette sprocket SHIMANO, Deore CS-M6100 -12 10-51T
Chain KMC, E12S ...
Belt ... ...
Front brake SHIMANO, BR-MT200 Hydraulic disc brake
Rear brake SHIMANO, BR-MT200 Hydraulic disc brake
Brake lever, front/rear SHIMANO, BL-MT201 DUAL CONTROL lever
Disc, front ... 180 mm, centre lock
Disc, rear ... 180 mm, centre lock
Wheel set ... ...
Rim, front/rear Bulls, DDM-2 ...
Hub, front SHIMANO, HB-MT400 Cassette hub for disc brake
Hub, rear SHIMANO, FH-MT500 Cassette hub
Spokes ... ...
Tyres SCHWALBE, Big Ben, Active Line, K-Guard 50-622, 28 x 2.00
Tube ... ...
Front lamp SUPERNOVA, V521 s 245 lm, 100 lux, 4.8 W, Terraflux 4 lens, integrated
daytime riding light
Rear lamp SUPERNOVA, E3 Tail Light 2 Side light
Dynamo ... ...
Pannier rack MONKEYLOAD MonkeyLoad rack system, max. load capacity 27 kg
Guard ... Aluminium
Chain guard ... ...
Lock ABUS ...
Stand/stand mount PLETSCHER, Comp 40 ...
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 299
Documents
...not available
Motor BOSCH, Performance Line CX, BDU450 CX 250 Watt, 85 Nm
Rechargeable battery BOSCH, PowerTube 400, BBP282 horizontal, 400 Wh
Display BOSCH ...
Charger BOSCH, Compact Charger, BCS230 2 A
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 300
Documents
11.4 Charger operating instructions
 
 
 !"!"
 #!$
%!&'
 #(!)
! *+**,+(
" $
# *$
 *$
 -*.*./
! 01234356789:;<=78>7?3951<=@8
"$
ABCDABCDABC
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 301
Documents
D
eBike Battery Charger 36-6/230
0 275 007 918
Li-Ion
Use ONLY with BOSCH Li-Ion batteries
Input: 230V 50Hz 2.15A
Output: 36V 6A
Made in Vietnam
Fast Charger BCS250
eBike Battery Charger 36-4/230
0 275 007 907
Li-Ion
Use ONLY with BOSCH Li-Ion batteries
Input: 230V 50Hz 1.5A
Output: 36V 4A
Made in PRC
Robert Bosch GmbH
72757 Reutlingen
Germany
Standard Charger BCS220
Robert Bosch GmbH
72757 Reutlingen
Germany
Standard Charger
Fast Charger
%&
%'&
%(&
%&
%)&
EBEDF AGA*C
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 302
Documents
D'

Compact Charger
%&
%&
%(&
%'&
%)&
AGA*C EBEDF
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 303
Documents
)D
%*& %(&
%& %&
%'&
%((&
%+&
%,&
%,&
%&
EBEDF AGA*C
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 304
Documents
D
%+&
%&
%,&
%&
%&
%&
%,&
%((&
AGA*C EBEDF
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 305
Documents
,D
%&
%,&
-
EBEDF AGA*C
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 306
Documents
KGI(
."C0
""!!"C"
$"!0TL
$GN
!
G*M
N!+
."#"!!"C"$"000

G"C!G
AGA*G*
-? "$"
#N,GMG
*NG*
"$!C!0"""" 
#0>"C#!"$0
""C"$$#!"$"$
G,G!NN!Q
; "$!"H*N
G*
1!"C"$:"!" !0$0
. 0$"$C0#"C""$-
 "$H!GM!
G*NG*
- ""$""!C$0
"%$ " :?!:&"!""!#
G*NN!GGG
!
>""C00"$!"$$
" #$!#GG$GM
,GGGG
>"C"C$#0""$
0!C0""!!#!
"""!"0!C0? 
"C"#GNG

>"C0!0"!
"$$
.0 #!0$0:!"$""
"G,GG!!,GG
G
! :$ C"!:
C"!!"!"? 
!$:"" "!"!C "
$"$"C!C0"$00 
#""#$0C" !
G,MG!N
!+
""#"C"$"
""!!C "$0
" "$0C0
-*KG!G!GNGGL
*!%)&G!GG
GVS Pk,GACBUGL
=0 "
 "
7
#!!GNG,GMGN,
G!N!N
!!
GAGA*G!!Q$NGL
AGA*!!N
G
=0"0
GNGG,NGL
GGGNG

#!$!G
!NNGNG!!!G
aNA*
%(& BG
%& H$*
%'& H$
%)& BGN
%& BG
%,& C*NG
%& BG*$
%+& *L!
%*& NG!
%(& ANN
%((& C!!
AGA*C EBEDF
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 307
Documents
KGI
>"!""
"$ ."""$
%',D)E'&
 ""$
%',DE('&
B""$
%',D,E'&
[!! ABC ABC ABC
!$ J\ ]]_ `]]_ ]]_
Ta U( ]]_ ]]_ ]]_
AG$ Jb _ _ _
BGQ - _-
BG
I[,[*MQ G 
I[,[*MQ G  _ 
I[,[*MQ G  
 dB ]]e ]]e ]]e
C dB eF]]e eF]]e eF]]e
OGMQ * f _ F
[ #[] #[] #[]
- GG!]-NG[,[*!NBeP
GN!$gShNJGN$!NN$!LN!
J "
."0
$"$"%$01&
="C""#!"$G$NG
,GG$N!G
NGGBG*!J
!J
[G!$%'&NG,G
!$*%&GG
BG,LNG
"$$#"C%$0&
C,GGNN!$NG!G
A*OG!M!!$GL
NG
0"C !"!"0"!C
-$!!M!MGG*
!
[GG%&NGGG
*%,&G
"$$"C%$0"G-&
C,GGNNBG$NGG
*%&-$!!M!MGGL
*!PNG$NG
G*%&!GG%&
GG*%,&
>"0"$"$0
0$"$$0"C
 !!CC" !"" 0"
"$$#NGM$G
NGG!!G
OG!M!!$GL
NG
"$$ "
#N,N!A*MG
G!G$!,GM
GG!NGGG
GQ]fI`]iMGGGN
G!GGPKHNGG
OGG*M,!,NGL

#N*GNGG!MG
G!$!
"$$ 
GGGGL
!GG*G*!
G
5HGG,GGL
NGA*,GG!GL

5HG!$!$!!GGL

GG!,G!,GGL!
OGG,GGL!M
GG!$!G
G!
OGGL!!MGL
NG!
GNG!!GG!L
%*&G!GGL!L

GPKHGG!%*&NG!G
GKG!!PKHL
EBEDF AGA*C
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 308
Documents
KGI'
Q]iNGGGNGPKH
!GQ]iG
GA*NG!MGPKHL
!!GL!,G!NNG
G!GNG
!!NG!GNNL
]%(&GA*
HGGNG!GN
GG
OGG!!NGGMGL
,G!NN
5H#NG$G!GG*MN
GG*%,&,GG$%&NGL
MG!,
#NGG!!NGN
GMNN,GGG,,GN*
MG*GNGNG!G
G!N
D"0"#"0
"0 #"0
A!N$
>/-!""C
BG!*!G
A,!
>/-!""C
HGNGGGG
GG!
HGGGG
G!GG
GGG
5/-!"$%/-!!" "
!C! $""$"
C&
BG!*!G
"$$ !%""C&
BG! BG*
A! BNG
[*MG!N$ BG*G$MG$GGG*!$
*!G
A!N$ BG!*!G
K"""#$
K"""!"$
#NGGNMG!*!L
G
1"!#""#0$ 0
#NG$aGGML
G!*!G
T!NG!*!GM
$,,,GL*
- "!
BGM!*G!!
$N!
H!NG,GGG!,
J!C0H
-!GKH$FF`
KSOK!KKaL
!,M
GGL
!!!!N$L
N!
.09"$0
AGA*C EBEDF
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 309
Glossary
12 Glossary
Bicycle for young adults
Source: ISO 4210-2: pedelec designed for use on
public roads by a young adult whose weight is less
than 40 kg, with maximum saddle height of
635 mm or more and less than 750 mm (see
ISO 4210).
Brake lever
Source: EN 15194:2017: lever used to apply the
brake.
Braking distance
Source: EN 15194:2017: distance travelled by a
pedelec between the commencement of braking
and the point at which the pedelec comes to rest.
Cargo bike
Source: DIN 79010: pedelec mainly designed to
carry goods.
CE marking
Source: Directive on Machinery: the manufacturer
uses the CE marking to declare that the pedelec
complies with the applicable requirements.
City and trekking bicycles
Source: EN-ISO 4210 - 2: pedelec designed for
use on public roads primarily for means of trans-
portation or leisure.
Consumables
Source: EN 82079-1: any part or material that is
needed to continue using or maintain the product.
Continuous power rating
Source: ISO 15194:2017, output power specified
by the manufacturer at which the motor reaches
its thermal equilibrium under the specified ambi-
ent conditions.
Decommissioning
Source: DIN 31051: intentional, unlimited inter-
ruption in an object's functional capability.
Disc brake
Source: EN 15194:2017: brake in which brake
pads are used to grip the lateral faces of a thin
disc attached to or incorporated into the wheel
hub.
Drive belt
Source: EN 15194:2017: seamless ring belt which
is used as a means of transmitting drive force.
Electrical control system
Source: EN 15194:2017: electronic and/or electri-
cal component or an assembly of components
provided for installation into a vehicle, together
with all electrical connections and associated wir-
ing for the motor electrical power assistance.
Electrically power assisted pedelec, pedelec
Source: EN 15194:2017: electrically power assist-
ed cycle pedelec EPAC bicycles, equipped with
pedals and an auxiliary electric motor, which can-
not be propelled exclusively by means of the aux-
iliary electric motor, except in start-up assistance
mode.
Emergency stop
Source: ISO 13850:2015, function or signal, de-
signed: — to avert arising or reduce existing haz-
ards to persons, damage to machinery or to work
in progress; – to be initiated by a single human ac-
tion.
Fault
Source: EN 13306:2018-02, 6.1: state of an item
(4.2.1) characterized by inability to perform a re-
quired function (4.5.1), excluding the inability dur-
ing preventive maintenance or other planned ac-
tions, or due to lack of external resources.
Folding bicycle
Source: ISO 4210-2: pedelec designed to fold into
a compact form, making it easy to transport and
store.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 310
Glossary
Fork steerer
Source: EN 15194:2017: part of a fork that rotates
around the steering axis of a pedelec frame head
tube. It is normally connected to the fork crown or
directly to the fork legs, and is normally the point
of connection between the fork and the handlebar
stem.
Fracture
Source: EN 15194:2017: unintentional separation
into two or more parts.
Maintenance
Source: DIN 31051: maintenance is generally per-
formed at regular intervals and often carried out
by trained technical staff. This ensures a maxi-
mum service life and low wear and tear for the
maintained items. Proper maintenance is often
also a pre-requisite for providing a warranty.
Manufacturer
Source: Directive 2006/42/EC on Machin-
ery,17.05.2006 Any natural or legal person who
designs and/or manufactures machinery or partly
completed machinery covered by this Directive
and is responsible for the conformity of the ma-
chinery or the partly completed machinery with
this Directive with a view to its being placed on the
market, under his own name or trademark or for
his own use.
Maximum continuous power rating
Source: ZEG: the maximum continuous power rat-
ing is the maximum power for the electric motor
output shaft during 30 minutes.
Maximum permitted total weight
Source: EN 15194:2017: weight of the fully as-
sembled pedelec plus the rider and baggage, as
specified by the manufacturer.
Maximum saddle height
Source: EN 15194:2017: vertical distance from
the ground to the point where the top of the seat
surface is intersected by the seat-post axis, meas-
ured with the saddle in a horizontal position and
with the seat-post set to the minimum insertion-
depth mark.
Maximum tyre pressure
Source: EN 15194:2017: maximum tyre pressure
recommended by the tyre or rim manufacturer for
a safe and efficient performance. If the rim and
tyre both indicate a maximum tyre pressure, the
maximum inflation pressure is the lower of the two
pressures indicated.
Minimum insertion depth
Source: EN 15194:2017: mark indicating the min-
imum insertion depth of handlebar stem into fork
steerer (fork stem) or seat post into frame.
Model year
Source: ZEG: the model year refers to the first
production year that the series-manufactured
pedelec was manufactured in the version in ques-
tion and is not always identical with the year of
manufacture. The year of manufacture may be be-
fore the model year in some cases. If no technical
modifications are introduced to the series, produc-
tion may continue of pedelecs from a previous
model year.
Mountain bike
Source: ISO 4210 - 2: pedelec designed for use
off-road on rough terrain, on public roads, and on
public pathways, equipped with a suitably
strengthened frame and other components, and,
typically, with wide-section tyres with coarse tread
patterns and a wide range of transmission gears.
Negative deflection
Negative deflection or sag is fork compression
caused by body weight and gear (e.g. a backpack),
their sitting position and the frame geometry.
Off-road rough terrain
Source: EN 15194:2017: rough gravel tracks, for-
est trails and other generally off-road tracks where
tree roots and rocks are likely to be encountered.
Operating instructions
Source: ISO/DIS 20607:2018: part of the user in-
formation that machine manufacturers provide to
machine operators; it contains guidance, instruc-
tions and tips related to the use of the machine in
all its life cycle phases.
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 311
Glossary
Placing on the market
Source: Directive 2006/42/EC on Machinery,
17.05.2006, Making available for the first time in
the Community machinery or partly completed
machinery with a view to distribution or use,
whether for reward or free of charge.
Pressure point
Source: ZEG: the pressure point on a brake is the
point on the brake lever where the brake disc and
brake pads respond and the braking process is in-
itiated.
Quick-release device, quick release
Source: EN 15194:2017: lever actuated mecha-
nism that connects, retains or secures a wheel or
any other component.
Racing bicycle
Source: ISO 4210-2: pedelec designed for ama-
teur rides at high speed and for use on public
roads having a control and steering assembly with
multiple grip positions to provide an aerodynamic
posture Bicycle multi-speed transmission system
and a tyre width not greater than 28 mm with the
fully assembled bicycle having a maximum mass
of 12 kg.
Rebound
The rebound defines the speed at which the fork
rebounds after being loaded.
Rechargeable battery, battery
Source: DIN 40729:1985-05: a rechargeable bat-
tery is an energy storage device that can store
supplied electrical energy as chemical energy
(charging) and release it as electrical energy
when required (discharging).
Seat post
Source: EN 15194:2017: component that clamps
the saddle (with a bolt or assembly) and connects
it to the frame.
Serial number
Source – ZEG: each pedelec has an eight-digit
type number which is used to specify the design
model year, the type and the version.
Shut-off speed
Source: EN 15194:2017: speed reached, by the
pedelec, at the moment the current has dropped
to zero or to the no load current value.
Slippage
Source: DIN 75204-1:1992-05: the difference in
relation to vehicle speed between the vehicle
speed and the speed of its wheels at their circum-
ference.
Spare part
Source: EN 13306:2018-02, 3.5: item intended to
replace a corresponding item in order to retain or
maintain the original required function of the item.
Suspension fork
Source: EN 15194:2017: front wheel fork incorpo-
rating controlled, axial flexibility to reduce the
transmission of road-shocks to the rider.
Suspension frame
Source: EN 15194:2017: frame incorporating con-
trolled, vertical flexibility to reduce the transmis-
sion of road-shocks to the rider.
Total deflection
Source: Benny Wilbers, Werner Koch: Neue Fahr-
werkstechnik im Detail (New chassis technology
in detail): The distance that the wheel travels be-
tween an unloaded and a loaded position is called
total deflection. When at rest, the vehicle's mass
is applied to the springs and reduces the total de-
flection by the negative deflection to the positive
deflection.
Wear
Source: DIN 31051: reduction in useful life (4.3.4),
caused by chemical and/or physical processes.
Weight of ready-to-ride pedelec
Source: ZEG: the indicated weight for a ready-to-
ride pedelec refers to the weight of a pedelec at
the time of sale. The weight of each additional ac-
cessory must be added to this weight
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 312
Glossary
Wheel
Source: ISO 4210 - 2: unit or combination of hub,
rim and spokes or disc, but excluding tyre assem-
bly.
Work environment
Source: ISO 9000:2015: set of conditions under
which work is performed.
Year of manufacture
Source: ZEG: the year of manufacture is the year
in which the pedelec was manufactured. The pro-
duction period is always from May to July the fol-
lowing year.
12.1 Abbreviations
ABS = anti-blocking system
ECP = electronic cell protection
12.2 Simplified terms
The following terms are used for better legibility:
Term Meaning
Operating instruc-
tions
Original operating instruc-
tions
Damper Rear frame damper
Specialist dealer Bicycle specialist dealer
Motor Drive motor, sub-system
Belt drive Toothed belt drive
Table 62: Simplified terms
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 313
Appendix
13 Appendix
I. Translation of the original EC/EU Declaration of Conformity
The machine, pedelec types:
22-15-1054 Iconic EVO 1 27.5" City and trekking bicycle
22-15-1055 Iconic EVO 1 29" City and trekking bicycle
22-15-1058 Iconic EVO 1 27.5" City and trekking bicycle
22-15-1066 Urban EVO 12 City and trekking bicycle
22-15-1067 Urban EVO 12 City and trekking bicycle
22-15-1068 Urban EVO 12 City and trekking bicycle
22-15-1081 Cross Flyer EVO City and trekking bicycle
22-15-1082 Cross Flyer EVO City and trekking bicycle
22-15-1083 Cross Flyer EVO City and trekking bicycle
22-15-1084 Landscape EVO City and trekking bicycle
22-15-1085 Landscape EVO City and trekking bicycle
22-15-1086 Landscape EVO City and trekking bicycle
22-15-4004 Cross Mover EVO 1 City and trekking bicycle
22-15-4006 Cross Mover EVO 1 City and trekking bicycle
22-18-0006 LT CX 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0007 LT CX 29" Mountain bike
22-18-0008 Copperhead EVO 1 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0009 Copperhead EVO 1 29" Mountain bike
22-18-0010 Copperhead EVO 2 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0011 Copperhead EVO 2 29" Mountain bike
22-18-0012 Copperhead EVO AM 1 Mountain bike
22-18-0020 Copperhead EVO 2 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0024 Copperhead EVO 2 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0070 LT Performance 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0071 LT Performance 29" Mountain bike
22-18-0072 LT EVO CX 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0073 LT EVO CX 29" Mountain bike
22-18-0074 Aminga EVA TR 2 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0075 Aminga EVA TR 1 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0076 Aminga EVA 1 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0077 Aminga EVA 2 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0078 Aminga EVA 2 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0079 Aminga EVA 2 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-0080 Aminga EVA 3 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-2009 AMINGA E2 CX (MARKGRAF) Mountain bike
22-18-3001 Sonic EVO 1 29" Mountain bike
22-18-3002 Sonic EVO 1 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-3003 Sonic EVA 1 Mountain bike
22-18-3004 Sonic EVA TR 1 Mountain bike
22-18-3005 Sonic EVA TR 2 Mountain bike
22-18-3006 Sonic EVO TR1 29" Mountain bike
*Community member who is authorised to compile the technical documentation
Manufacturer
ZEG Zweirad-Einkaufs-Genossenschaft eG
Longericher Strasse 2
50739 Köln, Germany
Authorised representative for documentation*
Janine Otto
c/o ZEG Zweirad-Einkaufs-Genossenschaft eG
Longericher Strasse 2
50739 Köln, Germany
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 314
Appendix
22-18-3007 Sonic Evo TR2 Carbon 29" Mountain bike
22-18-3008 Sonic EVO AM 1 Mountain bike
22-18-3009 Sonic EVO AM 2 Carbon Mountain bike
22-18-3013 Sonic EVO XS Mountain bike
22-18-5001 Copperhead EVO 1 XXL 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5002 Copperhead EVO 1 XXL 29" Mountain bike
22-18-5003 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5004 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL 29" Mountain bike
22-18-5010 Copperhead EVO 1 XXL 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5015 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL Street 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5017 Copperhead EVO 2 XXL Street 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5025 Copperhead EVO 2 Street 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5027 Copperhead EVO 2 Street 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5029 Copperhead EVO 1 Street 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5031 Copperhead EVO 1 Street 27.5" Mountain bike
22-18-5032 Copperhead EVO 1 Street 29" Mountain bike
22-19-3001 Sonic EVO EN 1 Mountain bike
Year of manufacture 2021 and year of manufacture 2022, complies with the following applicable EU provisions:
• Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
• RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
• Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2014/30/EU.
The safety objectives in the Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU have been met in compliance with Appendix I,
No. 1.5.1 of the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
The following harmonised standards have been applied:
• ISO 20607:2018 Safety machinery – Instruction handbook – General drafting principles
• EN 15194:2017, Cycles – Electrically power assisted cycles – EPAC Bicycles
The following other technical standards have been applied:
• EN 11243:2016: Cycles – Pannier racks for bicycles – Requirements and test methods
Cologne, 19/04/2021
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Egbert Hageböck, Chairman, ZEG Zweirad-Einkaufs-Genossenschaft eG
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 315
Appendix
II. Declaration of conformity for incomplete machine
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 316
Appendix
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 317
Appendix
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 318
Keyword index
14 Keyword index
A
Air valve, 33
Articulated shaft,
- caring for 168
Axle, 33
B
Basic cleaning 161
Battery housing, 46, 47
Battery key, 46
Battery level indicator (battery),
46, 47
Battery level indicator, 54
Battery lock, 46
Battery, 45
- charging, 141, 144
- checking, 65
- cleaning, 161
- disposing of, 234
- inserting, 139
- remove, 144
- removing, 139, 140, 141
- shipping 62
- transporting, 62
- waking, 142
Frame battery, 46
Integrated battery, 47
Pannier rack battery, 46
Technical data 56
Belt guard 17
Belt pulley, 44
Belt tension,
- check 179
Belt, 44
- cleaning, 164
Bike headset, see steering
headset
Bowden cable 41
Brake cable, 41
Brake calliper, 42
Brake disc, 42
- checking 175
- cleaning, 164
Brake lever
- cleaning, 164
Brake lever,
– caring for, 169
Brake lining, 42
Brake, 41
- checking brake cables 178
- checking the brake disc
175
– checking the pressure
point 174
- cleaning, 160
- securing during transport
62
Cable clip, 41
Cover cap, 41
hydraulic 41
Insert pin, 41
Knob, 41
mechanical 41
Union nut 41
Break in operation, 63
- carrying out, 63
- preparing, 63
Button,
Minus, 50, 132, 144
On-Off (battery) 46, 47
On-Off (display), 50, 132,
144
Plus, 50, 132, 144
Push assist, 50, 132, 144
C
Carbon seat post
– caring for, 167
Cassette,
- cleaning, 163
Chain guard 17
- cleaning, 164
Chain tension,
- checking 179
Chain wheel, 44
Chain wheels,
- cleaning, 163
Chain, 27, 44
– caring for, 168
- cleaning, 164
- maintaining, 171, 180
Charger, 47
- disposing of, 234
Charging port cover, 46
Charging port, 46
Chassis, 28
Child seat, 133
Clamping force,
- Adjusting the quick releas-
es, 72
- Checking the quick releas-
es, 72
Compression adjustment, 32
Compression damper, 33
Control panel,
- cleaning, 161
Crown, 33
D
Dimensions, 59
Direction of travel, 44
Disc brake, 42
Drive system, 44
- switching off, 143
- switching on, 143
Electric, 45
mechanical 44
Dust seal, 33
E
Electrical cable,
- checking 178
Emergency stop system 18
F
Fork end, 29, 33
Fork leg 29
Fork steerer, 29, 33
Fork, 29
– caring for, 165
- cleaning, 162
- Rigid fork 30
– servicing, 160
- SR Suntour structure, 33
- Suspension fork, 30
Position 27
Frame battery,
- inserting, 139
Frame, 28
– caring for, 165
- cleaning, 162
– servicing, 160
Position 27
Front derailleur, 44
- cleaning, 163
Front light, 45
Front wheel brake, 42
- braking, 147
Front wheel, see Wheel
G
Gear shift,
- switching, 151, 152
H
Handle,
– caring for, 166
Handlebars, 29
– caring for, 166
- cleaning, 162
Position 27
Handles,
- cleaning, 162
Headset, see steering headset
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 319
Keyword index
Hub, 39
– caring for, 167
- cleaning, 163
I
Indicator,
Battery level, position 50
Display 50
Function 50
Level of assistance 51
Level of assistance, position
50
Lighting, position 50
RANGE 51
RANGE, position 50
Service, position 50
Tachometer 50
Tachometer, position 50
TOTAL 51
TOTAL, position 50
TRIP 51
TRIP, position 50
Unit 50
Unit, position 50
Initial commissioning, 65
J
Jockey wheel,
- caring for 168
Journey information, 51
- switching, 145
K
Kickstand,
– caring for, 166
- cleaning, 162
L
Leather handle,
– caring for, 167
Leather handles,
- cleaning, 162
Leather saddle,
– caring for, 167
- cleaning, 163
Level of assistance, 51, 54
- selecting, 145
ECO, 51
eMTB 51
OFF, 51
SPORT 51
SPORT, 51
TOUR, 51
TURBO, 51
M
Minimum insertion depth mark-
ing, 91
Minus button, 50, 132, 144
Motor cover 17
Motor, 45
- cleaning, 161
Technical data 55
Mudguard 17
– caring for, 166
- cleaning, 162
O
On-board computer,
- cleaning, 161
On-Off button (battery), 46
On-Off button,
Display, 50, 132, 144
On-screen indicator, 134
Operating status indicator, 54
P
Pannier rack battery,
- remove, 144
- removing, 139, 140, 141
Pannier rack,
– caring for, 166
- changing, 138
- cleaning, 162
- using, 137
Patent seat post, 43
Pedal, 44
– caring for, 168
- cleaning, 160
Pedelec,
- shipping 62
- transporting, 62
Plus button, 50, 132, 144
Push assist button, 50, 132, 144
Push assist,
- using, 145
Q
Q-Loc, 33
R
Rear derailleur, 44
– caring for, 168
Rear frame damper,
structure, 34, 37, 38, 124
Rear light, 45
Rear wheel brake, 42
Rebound adjuster, 33
Rebound damping 32
Retainer guard, 47
Rim brake locking lever 41
Rim, 39
– caring for, 167
S
Saddle, 138
- changing the saddle tilt, 90
- changing the seat length,
92, 95
- cleaning, 162
- determining the saddle
height, 90, 92, 95
- using, 138
Sag,
Setting wheel, 33
Seat post, 43
– caring for, 167
- cleaning, 162
Position 27
Securing hook, 47
Shifter,
– caring for, 168
- cleaning, 163
Spoke nipples, 40
– caring for, 167
Spoke, 39
Stanchion, 33
Steering headset 28
Steering system, 28
Stem, 28
– caring for, 166
- checking 179
- cleaning, 162
Position 27
Suspension fork,
- cleaning, 160
– servicing, 160
Suspension seat post, 43
– caring for, 167
- cleaning, 160
Switching elements,
- cleaning, 163
System message, 51, 82
T
Trailer, 134
Transporting, 59
Transporting, see Transporta-
tion
Tyre pressure, 39
Tyre size, 39
Tyres, 39
- checking 172
- cleaning, 163
- converting 135
Airless 135
Tubeless 135
U
USB port, 50, 132, 144
V
Valve, 39
Dunlop valve, 40
Presta valve, 40
Schrader valve, 40
MY22B01 - 22_1.0_27.08.2021 320
Keyword index
Vehicle,
Technical data 55
W
Weight,
– Shipping weight, 59
– Weight, 59
Wheel, 39
- installing, 71, 74
Winter break, see Break in oper-
ation
… 6 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Bulls EVO 2 - BOSCH Purion 2022 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Bulls EVO 2 - BOSCH Purion 2022 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 33.82 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Bulls EVO 2 - BOSCH Purion 2022

Bulls EVO 2 - BOSCH Purion 2022 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 322 pagina's

Bulls EVO 2 - BOSCH Purion 2022 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 329 pagina's

Bulls EVO 2 - BOSCH Purion 2022 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 322 pagina's

Bulls EVO 2 - BOSCH Purion 2022 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Italiano - 323 pagina's

Bulls EVO 2 - BOSCH Purion 2022 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Espanõl - 324 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info